cvs-1.12.13/0000777000076400007640000000000010320232621007456 500000000000000cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/0000777000076400007640000000000010320232542011352 500000000000000cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/compile0000775000076400007640000000716710224574110012664 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # Wrapper for compilers which do not understand `-c -o'. scriptversion=2005-02-03.08 # Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Written by Tom Tromey . # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. # As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you # distribute this file as part of a program that contains a # configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under # the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. # This file is maintained in Automake, please report # bugs to or send patches to # . case $1 in '') echo "$0: No command. Try \`$0 --help' for more information." 1>&2 exit 1; ;; -h | --h*) cat <<\EOF Usage: compile [--help] [--version] PROGRAM [ARGS] Wrapper for compilers which do not understand `-c -o'. Remove `-o dest.o' from ARGS, run PROGRAM with the remaining arguments, and rename the output as expected. If you are trying to build a whole package this is not the right script to run: please start by reading the file `INSTALL'. Report bugs to . EOF exit $? ;; -v | --v*) echo "compile $scriptversion" exit $? ;; esac ofile= cfile= eat= for arg do if test -n "$eat"; then eat= else case $1 in -o) # configure might choose to run compile as `compile cc -o foo foo.c'. # So we strip `-o arg' only if arg is an object. eat=1 case $2 in *.o | *.obj) ofile=$2 ;; *) set x "$@" -o "$2" shift ;; esac ;; *.c) cfile=$1 set x "$@" "$1" shift ;; *) set x "$@" "$1" shift ;; esac fi shift done if test -z "$ofile" || test -z "$cfile"; then # If no `-o' option was seen then we might have been invoked from a # pattern rule where we don't need one. That is ok -- this is a # normal compilation that the losing compiler can handle. If no # `.c' file was seen then we are probably linking. That is also # ok. exec "$@" fi # Name of file we expect compiler to create. cofile=`echo "$cfile" | sed -e 's|^.*/||' -e 's/\.c$/.o/'` # Create the lock directory. # Note: use `[/.-]' here to ensure that we don't use the same name # that we are using for the .o file. Also, base the name on the expected # object file name, since that is what matters with a parallel build. lockdir=`echo "$cofile" | sed -e 's|[/.-]|_|g'`.d while true; do if mkdir "$lockdir" >/dev/null 2>&1; then break fi sleep 1 done # FIXME: race condition here if user kills between mkdir and trap. trap "rmdir '$lockdir'; exit 1" 1 2 15 # Run the compile. "$@" ret=$? if test -f "$cofile"; then mv "$cofile" "$ofile" elif test -f "${cofile}bj"; then mv "${cofile}bj" "$ofile" fi rmdir "$lockdir" exit $ret # Local Variables: # mode: shell-script # sh-indentation: 2 # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" # time-stamp-end: "$" # End: cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/config.guess0000775000076400007640000012206510224574110013621 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # Attempt to guess a canonical system name. # Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, # 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. timestamp='2003-06-17' # This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it # under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or # (at your option) any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but # WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU # General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. # # As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you # distribute this file as part of a program that contains a # configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under # the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. # Originally written by Per Bothner . # Please send patches to . Submit a context # diff and a properly formatted ChangeLog entry. # # This script attempts to guess a canonical system name similar to # config.sub. If it succeeds, it prints the system name on stdout, and # exits with 0. Otherwise, it exits with 1. # # The plan is that this can be called by configure scripts if you # don't specify an explicit build system type. me=`echo "$0" | sed -e 's,.*/,,'` usage="\ Usage: $0 [OPTION] Output the configuration name of the system \`$me' is run on. Operation modes: -h, --help print this help, then exit -t, --time-stamp print date of last modification, then exit -v, --version print version number, then exit Report bugs and patches to ." version="\ GNU config.guess ($timestamp) Originally written by Per Bothner. Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE." help=" Try \`$me --help' for more information." # Parse command line while test $# -gt 0 ; do case $1 in --time-stamp | --time* | -t ) echo "$timestamp" ; exit 0 ;; --version | -v ) echo "$version" ; exit 0 ;; --help | --h* | -h ) echo "$usage"; exit 0 ;; -- ) # Stop option processing shift; break ;; - ) # Use stdin as input. break ;; -* ) echo "$me: invalid option $1$help" >&2 exit 1 ;; * ) break ;; esac done if test $# != 0; then echo "$me: too many arguments$help" >&2 exit 1 fi trap 'exit 1' 1 2 15 # CC_FOR_BUILD -- compiler used by this script. Note that the use of a # compiler to aid in system detection is discouraged as it requires # temporary files to be created and, as you can see below, it is a # headache to deal with in a portable fashion. # Historically, `CC_FOR_BUILD' used to be named `HOST_CC'. We still # use `HOST_CC' if defined, but it is deprecated. # Portable tmp directory creation inspired by the Autoconf team. set_cc_for_build=' trap "exitcode=\$?; (rm -f \$tmpfiles 2>/dev/null; rmdir \$tmp 2>/dev/null) && exit \$exitcode" 0 ; trap "rm -f \$tmpfiles 2>/dev/null; rmdir \$tmp 2>/dev/null; exit 1" 1 2 13 15 ; : ${TMPDIR=/tmp} ; { tmp=`(umask 077 && mktemp -d -q "$TMPDIR/cgXXXXXX") 2>/dev/null` && test -n "$tmp" && test -d "$tmp" ; } || { test -n "$RANDOM" && tmp=$TMPDIR/cg$$-$RANDOM && (umask 077 && mkdir $tmp) ; } || { tmp=$TMPDIR/cg-$$ && (umask 077 && mkdir $tmp) && echo "Warning: creating insecure temp directory" >&2 ; } || { echo "$me: cannot create a temporary directory in $TMPDIR" >&2 ; exit 1 ; } ; dummy=$tmp/dummy ; tmpfiles="$dummy.c $dummy.o $dummy.rel $dummy" ; case $CC_FOR_BUILD,$HOST_CC,$CC in ,,) echo "int x;" > $dummy.c ; for c in cc gcc c89 c99 ; do if ($c -c -o $dummy.o $dummy.c) >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then CC_FOR_BUILD="$c"; break ; fi ; done ; if test x"$CC_FOR_BUILD" = x ; then CC_FOR_BUILD=no_compiler_found ; fi ;; ,,*) CC_FOR_BUILD=$CC ;; ,*,*) CC_FOR_BUILD=$HOST_CC ;; esac ;' # This is needed to find uname on a Pyramid OSx when run in the BSD universe. # (ghazi@noc.rutgers.edu 1994-08-24) if (test -f /.attbin/uname) >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then PATH=$PATH:/.attbin ; export PATH fi UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -m) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_MACHINE=unknown UNAME_RELEASE=`(uname -r) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_RELEASE=unknown UNAME_SYSTEM=`(uname -s) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_SYSTEM=unknown UNAME_VERSION=`(uname -v) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_VERSION=unknown ## for Red Hat Linux if test -f /etc/redhat-release ; then VENDOR=redhat ; else VENDOR= ; fi # Note: order is significant - the case branches are not exclusive. case "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" in *:NetBSD:*:*) # NetBSD (nbsd) targets should (where applicable) match one or # more of the tupples: *-*-netbsdelf*, *-*-netbsdaout*, # *-*-netbsdecoff* and *-*-netbsd*. For targets that recently # switched to ELF, *-*-netbsd* would select the old # object file format. This provides both forward # compatibility and a consistent mechanism for selecting the # object file format. # # Note: NetBSD doesn't particularly care about the vendor # portion of the name. We always set it to "unknown". sysctl="sysctl -n hw.machine_arch" UNAME_MACHINE_ARCH=`(/sbin/$sysctl 2>/dev/null || \ /usr/sbin/$sysctl 2>/dev/null || echo unknown)` case "${UNAME_MACHINE_ARCH}" in armeb) machine=armeb-unknown ;; arm*) machine=arm-unknown ;; sh3el) machine=shl-unknown ;; sh3eb) machine=sh-unknown ;; *) machine=${UNAME_MACHINE_ARCH}-unknown ;; esac # The Operating System including object format, if it has switched # to ELF recently, or will in the future. case "${UNAME_MACHINE_ARCH}" in arm*|i386|m68k|ns32k|sh3*|sparc|vax) eval $set_cc_for_build if echo __ELF__ | $CC_FOR_BUILD -E - 2>/dev/null \ | grep __ELF__ >/dev/null then # Once all utilities can be ECOFF (netbsdecoff) or a.out (netbsdaout). # Return netbsd for either. FIX? os=netbsd else os=netbsdelf fi ;; *) os=netbsd ;; esac # The OS release # Debian GNU/NetBSD machines have a different userland, and # thus, need a distinct triplet. However, they do not need # kernel version information, so it can be replaced with a # suitable tag, in the style of linux-gnu. case "${UNAME_VERSION}" in Debian*) release='-gnu' ;; *) release=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'` ;; esac # Since CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM: # contains redundant information, the shorter form: # CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM is used. echo "${machine}-${os}${release}" exit 0 ;; amiga:OpenBSD:*:*) echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; arc:OpenBSD:*:*) echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; hp300:OpenBSD:*:*) echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; mac68k:OpenBSD:*:*) echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; macppc:OpenBSD:*:*) echo powerpc-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; mvme68k:OpenBSD:*:*) echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; mvme88k:OpenBSD:*:*) echo m88k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; mvmeppc:OpenBSD:*:*) echo powerpc-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; pmax:OpenBSD:*:*) echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; sgi:OpenBSD:*:*) echo mipseb-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; sun3:OpenBSD:*:*) echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; wgrisc:OpenBSD:*:*) echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:OpenBSD:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; alpha:OSF1:*:*) if test $UNAME_RELEASE = "V4.0"; then UNAME_RELEASE=`/usr/sbin/sizer -v | awk '{print $3}'` fi # According to Compaq, /usr/sbin/psrinfo has been available on # OSF/1 and Tru64 systems produced since 1995. I hope that # covers most systems running today. This code pipes the CPU # types through head -n 1, so we only detect the type of CPU 0. ALPHA_CPU_TYPE=`/usr/sbin/psrinfo -v | sed -n -e 's/^ The alpha \(.*\) processor.*$/\1/p' | head -n 1` case "$ALPHA_CPU_TYPE" in "EV4 (21064)") UNAME_MACHINE="alpha" ;; "EV4.5 (21064)") UNAME_MACHINE="alpha" ;; "LCA4 (21066/21068)") UNAME_MACHINE="alpha" ;; "EV5 (21164)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev5" ;; "EV5.6 (21164A)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev56" ;; "EV5.6 (21164PC)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphapca56" ;; "EV5.7 (21164PC)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphapca57" ;; "EV6 (21264)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev6" ;; "EV6.7 (21264A)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev67" ;; "EV6.8CB (21264C)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev68" ;; "EV6.8AL (21264B)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev68" ;; "EV6.8CX (21264D)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev68" ;; "EV6.9A (21264/EV69A)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev69" ;; "EV7 (21364)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev7" ;; "EV7.9 (21364A)") UNAME_MACHINE="alphaev79" ;; esac # A Vn.n version is a released version. # A Tn.n version is a released field test version. # A Xn.n version is an unreleased experimental baselevel. # 1.2 uses "1.2" for uname -r. echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-dec-osf`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/^[VTX]//' | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'` exit 0 ;; Alpha*:OpenVMS:*:*) echo alpha-hp-vms exit 0 ;; Alpha\ *:Windows_NT*:*) # How do we know it's Interix rather than the generic POSIX subsystem? # Should we change UNAME_MACHINE based on the output of uname instead # of the specific Alpha model? echo alpha-pc-interix exit 0 ;; 21064:Windows_NT:50:3) echo alpha-dec-winnt3.5 exit 0 ;; Amiga*:UNIX_System_V:4.0:*) echo m68k-unknown-sysv4 exit 0;; *:[Aa]miga[Oo][Ss]:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-amigaos exit 0 ;; *:[Mm]orph[Oo][Ss]:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-morphos exit 0 ;; *:OS/390:*:*) echo i370-ibm-openedition exit 0 ;; arm:RISC*:1.[012]*:*|arm:riscix:1.[012]*:*) echo arm-acorn-riscix${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0;; SR2?01:HI-UX/MPP:*:* | SR8000:HI-UX/MPP:*:*) echo hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxmpp exit 0;; Pyramid*:OSx*:*:* | MIS*:OSx*:*:* | MIS*:SMP_DC-OSx*:*:*) # akee@wpdis03.wpafb.af.mil (Earle F. Ake) contributed MIS and NILE. if test "`(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null`" = att ; then echo pyramid-pyramid-sysv3 else echo pyramid-pyramid-bsd fi exit 0 ;; NILE*:*:*:dcosx) echo pyramid-pyramid-svr4 exit 0 ;; DRS?6000:unix:4.0:6*) echo sparc-icl-nx6 exit 0 ;; DRS?6000:UNIX_SV:4.2*:7*) case `/usr/bin/uname -p` in sparc) echo sparc-icl-nx7 && exit 0 ;; esac ;; sun4H:SunOS:5.*:*) echo sparc-hal-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'` exit 0 ;; sun4*:SunOS:5.*:* | tadpole*:SunOS:5.*:*) echo sparc-sun-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'` exit 0 ;; i86pc:SunOS:5.*:*) echo i386-pc-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'` exit 0 ;; sun4*:SunOS:6*:*) # According to config.sub, this is the proper way to canonicalize # SunOS6. Hard to guess exactly what SunOS6 will be like, but # it's likely to be more like Solaris than SunOS4. echo sparc-sun-solaris3`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'` exit 0 ;; sun4*:SunOS:*:*) case "`/usr/bin/arch -k`" in Series*|S4*) UNAME_RELEASE=`uname -v` ;; esac # Japanese Language versions have a version number like `4.1.3-JL'. echo sparc-sun-sunos`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/'` exit 0 ;; sun3*:SunOS:*:*) echo m68k-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; sun*:*:4.2BSD:*) UNAME_RELEASE=`(sed 1q /etc/motd | awk '{print substr($5,1,3)}') 2>/dev/null` test "x${UNAME_RELEASE}" = "x" && UNAME_RELEASE=3 case "`/bin/arch`" in sun3) echo m68k-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE} ;; sun4) echo sparc-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE} ;; esac exit 0 ;; aushp:SunOS:*:*) echo sparc-auspex-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; # The situation for MiNT is a little confusing. The machine name # can be virtually everything (everything which is not # "atarist" or "atariste" at least should have a processor # > m68000). The system name ranges from "MiNT" over "FreeMiNT" # to the lowercase version "mint" (or "freemint"). Finally # the system name "TOS" denotes a system which is actually not # MiNT. But MiNT is downward compatible to TOS, so this should # be no problem. atarist[e]:*MiNT:*:* | atarist[e]:*mint:*:* | atarist[e]:*TOS:*:*) echo m68k-atari-mint${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; atari*:*MiNT:*:* | atari*:*mint:*:* | atarist[e]:*TOS:*:*) echo m68k-atari-mint${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *falcon*:*MiNT:*:* | *falcon*:*mint:*:* | *falcon*:*TOS:*:*) echo m68k-atari-mint${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; milan*:*MiNT:*:* | milan*:*mint:*:* | *milan*:*TOS:*:*) echo m68k-milan-mint${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; hades*:*MiNT:*:* | hades*:*mint:*:* | *hades*:*TOS:*:*) echo m68k-hades-mint${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:*MiNT:*:* | *:*mint:*:* | *:*TOS:*:*) echo m68k-unknown-mint${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; powerpc:machten:*:*) echo powerpc-apple-machten${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; RISC*:Mach:*:*) echo mips-dec-mach_bsd4.3 exit 0 ;; RISC*:ULTRIX:*:*) echo mips-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; VAX*:ULTRIX*:*:*) echo vax-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; 2020:CLIX:*:* | 2430:CLIX:*:*) echo clipper-intergraph-clix${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; mips:*:*:UMIPS | mips:*:*:RISCos) eval $set_cc_for_build sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c #ifdef __cplusplus #include /* for printf() prototype */ int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { #else int main (argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[]; { #endif #if defined (host_mips) && defined (MIPSEB) #if defined (SYSTYPE_SYSV) printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssysv\n", argv[1]); exit (0); #endif #if defined (SYSTYPE_SVR4) printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssvr4\n", argv[1]); exit (0); #endif #if defined (SYSTYPE_BSD43) || defined(SYSTYPE_BSD) printf ("mips-mips-riscos%sbsd\n", argv[1]); exit (0); #endif #endif exit (-1); } EOF $CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c \ && $dummy `echo "${UNAME_RELEASE}" | sed -n 's/\([0-9]*\).*/\1/p'` \ && exit 0 echo mips-mips-riscos${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; Motorola:PowerMAX_OS:*:*) echo powerpc-motorola-powermax exit 0 ;; Motorola:*:4.3:PL8-*) echo powerpc-harris-powermax exit 0 ;; Night_Hawk:*:*:PowerMAX_OS | Synergy:PowerMAX_OS:*:*) echo powerpc-harris-powermax exit 0 ;; Night_Hawk:Power_UNIX:*:*) echo powerpc-harris-powerunix exit 0 ;; m88k:CX/UX:7*:*) echo m88k-harris-cxux7 exit 0 ;; m88k:*:4*:R4*) echo m88k-motorola-sysv4 exit 0 ;; m88k:*:3*:R3*) echo m88k-motorola-sysv3 exit 0 ;; AViiON:dgux:*:*) # DG/UX returns AViiON for all architectures UNAME_PROCESSOR=`/usr/bin/uname -p` if [ $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88100 ] || [ $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88110 ] then if [ ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = m88kdguxelfx ] || \ [ ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = x ] then echo m88k-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE} else echo m88k-dg-dguxbcs${UNAME_RELEASE} fi else echo i586-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE} fi exit 0 ;; M88*:DolphinOS:*:*) # DolphinOS (SVR3) echo m88k-dolphin-sysv3 exit 0 ;; M88*:*:R3*:*) # Delta 88k system running SVR3 echo m88k-motorola-sysv3 exit 0 ;; XD88*:*:*:*) # Tektronix XD88 system running UTekV (SVR3) echo m88k-tektronix-sysv3 exit 0 ;; Tek43[0-9][0-9]:UTek:*:*) # Tektronix 4300 system running UTek (BSD) echo m68k-tektronix-bsd exit 0 ;; *:IRIX*:*:*) echo mips-sgi-irix`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/g'` exit 0 ;; ????????:AIX?:[12].1:2) # AIX 2.2.1 or AIX 2.1.1 is RT/PC AIX. echo romp-ibm-aix # uname -m gives an 8 hex-code CPU id exit 0 ;; # Note that: echo "'`uname -s`'" gives 'AIX ' i*86:AIX:*:*) echo i386-ibm-aix exit 0 ;; ia64:AIX:*:*) if [ -x /usr/bin/oslevel ] ; then IBM_REV=`/usr/bin/oslevel` else IBM_REV=${UNAME_VERSION}.${UNAME_RELEASE} fi echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-ibm-aix${IBM_REV} exit 0 ;; *:AIX:2:3) if grep bos325 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then eval $set_cc_for_build sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c #include main() { if (!__power_pc()) exit(1); puts("powerpc-ibm-aix3.2.5"); exit(0); } EOF $CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c && $dummy && exit 0 echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.5 elif grep bos324 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.4 else echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2 fi exit 0 ;; *:AIX:*:[45]) IBM_CPU_ID=`/usr/sbin/lsdev -C -c processor -S available | sed 1q | awk '{ print $1 }'` if /usr/sbin/lsattr -El ${IBM_CPU_ID} | grep ' POWER' >/dev/null 2>&1; then IBM_ARCH=rs6000 else IBM_ARCH=powerpc fi if [ -x /usr/bin/oslevel ] ; then IBM_REV=`/usr/bin/oslevel` else IBM_REV=${UNAME_VERSION}.${UNAME_RELEASE} fi echo ${IBM_ARCH}-ibm-aix${IBM_REV} exit 0 ;; *:AIX:*:*) echo rs6000-ibm-aix exit 0 ;; ibmrt:4.4BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*) echo romp-ibm-bsd4.4 exit 0 ;; ibmrt:*BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*) # covers RT/PC BSD and echo romp-ibm-bsd${UNAME_RELEASE} # 4.3 with uname added to exit 0 ;; # report: romp-ibm BSD 4.3 *:BOSX:*:*) echo rs6000-bull-bosx exit 0 ;; DPX/2?00:B.O.S.:*:*) echo m68k-bull-sysv3 exit 0 ;; 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:1.*:*) echo m68k-hp-bsd exit 0 ;; hp300:4.4BSD:*:* | 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:2.*:*) echo m68k-hp-bsd4.4 exit 0 ;; 9000/[34678]??:HP-UX:*:*) HPUX_REV=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*.[0B]*//'` case "${UNAME_MACHINE}" in 9000/31? ) HP_ARCH=m68000 ;; 9000/[34]?? ) HP_ARCH=m68k ;; 9000/[678][0-9][0-9]) if [ -x /usr/bin/getconf ]; then sc_cpu_version=`/usr/bin/getconf SC_CPU_VERSION 2>/dev/null` sc_kernel_bits=`/usr/bin/getconf SC_KERNEL_BITS 2>/dev/null` case "${sc_cpu_version}" in 523) HP_ARCH="hppa1.0" ;; # CPU_PA_RISC1_0 528) HP_ARCH="hppa1.1" ;; # CPU_PA_RISC1_1 532) # CPU_PA_RISC2_0 case "${sc_kernel_bits}" in 32) HP_ARCH="hppa2.0n" ;; 64) HP_ARCH="hppa2.0w" ;; '') HP_ARCH="hppa2.0" ;; # HP-UX 10.20 esac ;; esac fi if [ "${HP_ARCH}" = "" ]; then eval $set_cc_for_build sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c #define _HPUX_SOURCE #include #include int main () { #if defined(_SC_KERNEL_BITS) long bits = sysconf(_SC_KERNEL_BITS); #endif long cpu = sysconf (_SC_CPU_VERSION); switch (cpu) { case CPU_PA_RISC1_0: puts ("hppa1.0"); break; case CPU_PA_RISC1_1: puts ("hppa1.1"); break; case CPU_PA_RISC2_0: #if defined(_SC_KERNEL_BITS) switch (bits) { case 64: puts ("hppa2.0w"); break; case 32: puts ("hppa2.0n"); break; default: puts ("hppa2.0"); break; } break; #else /* !defined(_SC_KERNEL_BITS) */ puts ("hppa2.0"); break; #endif default: puts ("hppa1.0"); break; } exit (0); } EOF (CCOPTS= $CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c 2>/dev/null) && HP_ARCH=`$dummy` test -z "$HP_ARCH" && HP_ARCH=hppa fi ;; esac if [ ${HP_ARCH} = "hppa2.0w" ] then # avoid double evaluation of $set_cc_for_build test -n "$CC_FOR_BUILD" || eval $set_cc_for_build if echo __LP64__ | (CCOPTS= $CC_FOR_BUILD -E -) | grep __LP64__ >/dev/null then HP_ARCH="hppa2.0w" else HP_ARCH="hppa64" fi fi echo ${HP_ARCH}-hp-hpux${HPUX_REV} exit 0 ;; ia64:HP-UX:*:*) HPUX_REV=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*.[0B]*//'` echo ia64-hp-hpux${HPUX_REV} exit 0 ;; 3050*:HI-UX:*:*) eval $set_cc_for_build sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c #include int main () { long cpu = sysconf (_SC_CPU_VERSION); /* The order matters, because CPU_IS_HP_MC68K erroneously returns true for CPU_PA_RISC1_0. CPU_IS_PA_RISC returns correct results, however. */ if (CPU_IS_PA_RISC (cpu)) { switch (cpu) { case CPU_PA_RISC1_0: puts ("hppa1.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break; case CPU_PA_RISC1_1: puts ("hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break; case CPU_PA_RISC2_0: puts ("hppa2.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break; default: puts ("hppa-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break; } } else if (CPU_IS_HP_MC68K (cpu)) puts ("m68k-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); else puts ("unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); exit (0); } EOF $CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c && $dummy && exit 0 echo unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2 exit 0 ;; 9000/7??:4.3bsd:*:* | 9000/8?[79]:4.3bsd:*:* ) echo hppa1.1-hp-bsd exit 0 ;; 9000/8??:4.3bsd:*:*) echo hppa1.0-hp-bsd exit 0 ;; *9??*:MPE/iX:*:* | *3000*:MPE/iX:*:*) echo hppa1.0-hp-mpeix exit 0 ;; hp7??:OSF1:*:* | hp8?[79]:OSF1:*:* ) echo hppa1.1-hp-osf exit 0 ;; hp8??:OSF1:*:*) echo hppa1.0-hp-osf exit 0 ;; i*86:OSF1:*:*) if [ -x /usr/sbin/sysversion ] ; then echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1mk else echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1 fi exit 0 ;; parisc*:Lites*:*:*) echo hppa1.1-hp-lites exit 0 ;; C1*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C1*:*) echo c1-convex-bsd exit 0 ;; C2*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C2*:*) if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc then echo c32-convex-bsd else echo c2-convex-bsd fi exit 0 ;; C34*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C34*:*) echo c34-convex-bsd exit 0 ;; C38*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C38*:*) echo c38-convex-bsd exit 0 ;; C4*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C4*:*) echo c4-convex-bsd exit 0 ;; CRAY*Y-MP:*:*:*) echo ymp-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/' exit 0 ;; CRAY*[A-Z]90:*:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} \ | sed -e 's/CRAY.*\([A-Z]90\)/\1/' \ -e y/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ/abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz/ \ -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/' exit 0 ;; CRAY*TS:*:*:*) echo t90-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/' exit 0 ;; CRAY*T3E:*:*:*) echo alphaev5-cray-unicosmk${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/' exit 0 ;; CRAY*SV1:*:*:*) echo sv1-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/' exit 0 ;; *:UNICOS/mp:*:*) echo nv1-cray-unicosmp${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/\.[^.]*$/.X/' exit 0 ;; F30[01]:UNIX_System_V:*:* | F700:UNIX_System_V:*:*) FUJITSU_PROC=`uname -m | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz'` FUJITSU_SYS=`uname -p | tr 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ' 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' | sed -e 's/\///'` FUJITSU_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/ /_/'` echo "${FUJITSU_PROC}-fujitsu-${FUJITSU_SYS}${FUJITSU_REL}" exit 0 ;; i*86:BSD/386:*:* | i*86:BSD/OS:*:* | *:Ascend\ Embedded/OS:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; sparc*:BSD/OS:*:*) echo sparc-unknown-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:BSD/OS:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:FreeBSD:*:*|*:GNU/FreeBSD:*:*) # Determine whether the default compiler uses glibc. eval $set_cc_for_build sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c #include #if __GLIBC__ >= 2 LIBC=gnu #else LIBC= #endif EOF eval `$CC_FOR_BUILD -E $dummy.c 2>/dev/null | grep ^LIBC=` echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-freebsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-(].*//'`${LIBC:+-$LIBC} exit 0 ;; i*:CYGWIN*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-cygwin exit 0 ;; i*:MINGW*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-mingw32 exit 0 ;; i*:PW*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-pw32 exit 0 ;; x86:Interix*:[34]*) echo i586-pc-interix${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/\..*//' exit 0 ;; [345]86:Windows_95:* | [345]86:Windows_98:* | [345]86:Windows_NT:*) echo i${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-mks exit 0 ;; i*:Windows_NT*:* | Pentium*:Windows_NT*:*) # How do we know it's Interix rather than the generic POSIX subsystem? # It also conflicts with pre-2.0 versions of AT&T UWIN. Should we # UNAME_MACHINE based on the output of uname instead of i386? echo i586-pc-interix exit 0 ;; i*:UWIN*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-uwin exit 0 ;; p*:CYGWIN*:*) echo powerpcle-unknown-cygwin exit 0 ;; prep*:SunOS:5.*:*) echo powerpcle-unknown-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'` exit 0 ;; *:GNU:*:*) echo `echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}|sed -e 's,[-/].*$,,'`-unknown-gnu`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's,/.*$,,'` exit 0 ;; i*86:Minix:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-minix exit 0 ;; arm*:Linux:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; cris:Linux:*:*) echo cris-axis-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; ia64:Linux:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-${VENDOR:-unknown}-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; m68*:Linux:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; mips:Linux:*:*) eval $set_cc_for_build sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c #undef CPU #undef mips #undef mipsel #if defined(__MIPSEL__) || defined(__MIPSEL) || defined(_MIPSEL) || defined(MIPSEL) CPU=mipsel #else #if defined(__MIPSEB__) || defined(__MIPSEB) || defined(_MIPSEB) || defined(MIPSEB) CPU=mips #else CPU= #endif #endif EOF eval `$CC_FOR_BUILD -E $dummy.c 2>/dev/null | grep ^CPU=` test x"${CPU}" != x && echo "${CPU}-unknown-linux-gnu" && exit 0 ;; mips64:Linux:*:*) eval $set_cc_for_build sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c #undef CPU #undef mips64 #undef mips64el #if defined(__MIPSEL__) || defined(__MIPSEL) || defined(_MIPSEL) || defined(MIPSEL) CPU=mips64el #else #if defined(__MIPSEB__) || defined(__MIPSEB) || defined(_MIPSEB) || defined(MIPSEB) CPU=mips64 #else CPU= #endif #endif EOF eval `$CC_FOR_BUILD -E $dummy.c 2>/dev/null | grep ^CPU=` test x"${CPU}" != x && echo "${CPU}-unknown-linux-gnu" && exit 0 ;; ppc:Linux:*:*) echo powerpc-${VENDOR:-unknown}-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; ppc64:Linux:*:*) echo powerpc64-${VENDOR:-unknown}-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; alpha:Linux:*:*) case `sed -n '/^cpu model/s/^.*: \(.*\)/\1/p' < /proc/cpuinfo` in EV5) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev5 ;; EV56) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev56 ;; PCA56) UNAME_MACHINE=alphapca56 ;; PCA57) UNAME_MACHINE=alphapca56 ;; EV6) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev6 ;; EV67) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev67 ;; EV68*) UNAME_MACHINE=alphaev68 ;; esac objdump --private-headers /bin/sh | grep ld.so.1 >/dev/null if test "$?" = 0 ; then LIBC="libc1" ; else LIBC="" ; fi echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu${LIBC} exit 0 ;; parisc:Linux:*:* | hppa:Linux:*:*) # Look for CPU level case `grep '^cpu[^a-z]*:' /proc/cpuinfo 2>/dev/null | cut -d' ' -f2` in PA7*) echo hppa1.1-unknown-linux-gnu ;; PA8*) echo hppa2.0-unknown-linux-gnu ;; *) echo hppa-unknown-linux-gnu ;; esac exit 0 ;; parisc64:Linux:*:* | hppa64:Linux:*:*) echo hppa64-unknown-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; s390:Linux:*:* | s390x:Linux:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-${VENDOR:-ibm}-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; sh64*:Linux:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; sh*:Linux:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; sparc:Linux:*:* | sparc64:Linux:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; x86_64:Linux:*:*) echo x86_64-${VENDOR:-unknown}-linux-gnu exit 0 ;; i*86:Linux:*:*) # The BFD linker knows what the default object file format is, so # first see if it will tell us. cd to the root directory to prevent # problems with other programs or directories called `ld' in the path. # Set LC_ALL=C to ensure ld outputs messages in English. ld_supported_targets=`cd /; LC_ALL=C ld --help 2>&1 \ | sed -ne '/supported targets:/!d s/[ ][ ]*/ /g s/.*supported targets: *// s/ .*// p'` case "$ld_supported_targets" in elf32-i386) TENTATIVE="${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnu" ;; a.out-i386-linux) echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuaout" exit 0 ;; coff-i386) echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnucoff" exit 0 ;; "") # Either a pre-BFD a.out linker (linux-gnuoldld) or # one that does not give us useful --help. echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuoldld" exit 0 ;; esac # Determine whether the default compiler is a.out or elf eval $set_cc_for_build sed 's/^ //' << EOF >$dummy.c #include #ifdef __ELF__ # ifdef __GLIBC__ # if __GLIBC__ >= 2 LIBC=gnu # else LIBC=gnulibc1 # endif # else LIBC=gnulibc1 # endif #else #ifdef __INTEL_COMPILER LIBC=gnu #else LIBC=gnuaout #endif #endif EOF eval `$CC_FOR_BUILD -E $dummy.c 2>/dev/null | grep ^LIBC=` test x"${LIBC}" != x && echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-${VENDOR:-pc}-linux-${LIBC}" && exit 0 test x"${TENTATIVE}" != x && echo "${TENTATIVE}" && exit 0 ;; i*86:DYNIX/ptx:4*:*) # ptx 4.0 does uname -s correctly, with DYNIX/ptx in there. # earlier versions are messed up and put the nodename in both # sysname and nodename. echo i386-sequent-sysv4 exit 0 ;; i*86:UNIX_SV:4.2MP:2.*) # Unixware is an offshoot of SVR4, but it has its own version # number series starting with 2... # I am not positive that other SVR4 systems won't match this, # I just have to hope. -- rms. # Use sysv4.2uw... so that sysv4* matches it. echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv4.2uw${UNAME_VERSION} exit 0 ;; i*86:OS/2:*:*) # If we were able to find `uname', then EMX Unix compatibility # is probably installed. echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-os2-emx exit 0 ;; i*86:XTS-300:*:STOP) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-stop exit 0 ;; i*86:atheos:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-atheos exit 0 ;; i*86:LynxOS:2.*:* | i*86:LynxOS:3.[01]*:* | i*86:LynxOS:4.0*:*) echo i386-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; i*86:*DOS:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-msdosdjgpp exit 0 ;; i*86:*:4.*:* | i*86:SYSTEM_V:4.*:*) UNAME_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed 's/\/MP$//'` if grep Novell /usr/include/link.h >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-univel-sysv${UNAME_REL} else echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv${UNAME_REL} fi exit 0 ;; i*86:*:5:[78]*) case `/bin/uname -X | grep "^Machine"` in *486*) UNAME_MACHINE=i486 ;; *Pentium) UNAME_MACHINE=i586 ;; *Pent*|*Celeron) UNAME_MACHINE=i686 ;; esac echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}${UNAME_SYSTEM}${UNAME_VERSION} exit 0 ;; i*86:*:3.2:*) if test -f /usr/options/cb.name; then UNAME_REL=`sed -n 's/.*Version //p' /dev/null >/dev/null ; then UNAME_REL=`(/bin/uname -X|grep Release|sed -e 's/.*= //')` (/bin/uname -X|grep i80486 >/dev/null) && UNAME_MACHINE=i486 (/bin/uname -X|grep '^Machine.*Pentium' >/dev/null) \ && UNAME_MACHINE=i586 (/bin/uname -X|grep '^Machine.*Pent *II' >/dev/null) \ && UNAME_MACHINE=i686 (/bin/uname -X|grep '^Machine.*Pentium Pro' >/dev/null) \ && UNAME_MACHINE=i686 echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sco$UNAME_REL else echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv32 fi exit 0 ;; pc:*:*:*) # Left here for compatibility: # uname -m prints for DJGPP always 'pc', but it prints nothing about # the processor, so we play safe by assuming i386. echo i386-pc-msdosdjgpp exit 0 ;; Intel:Mach:3*:*) echo i386-pc-mach3 exit 0 ;; paragon:*:*:*) echo i860-intel-osf1 exit 0 ;; i860:*:4.*:*) # i860-SVR4 if grep Stardent /usr/include/sys/uadmin.h >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then echo i860-stardent-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Stardent Vistra i860-SVR4 else # Add other i860-SVR4 vendors below as they are discovered. echo i860-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Unknown i860-SVR4 fi exit 0 ;; mini*:CTIX:SYS*5:*) # "miniframe" echo m68010-convergent-sysv exit 0 ;; mc68k:UNIX:SYSTEM5:3.51m) echo m68k-convergent-sysv exit 0 ;; M680?0:D-NIX:5.3:*) echo m68k-diab-dnix exit 0 ;; M68*:*:R3V[567]*:*) test -r /sysV68 && echo 'm68k-motorola-sysv' && exit 0 ;; 3[34]??:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??A:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??/*:*:4.0:3.0 | 4400:*:4.0:3.0 | 4850:*:4.0:3.0 | SKA40:*:4.0:3.0 | SDS2:*:4.0:3.0 | SHG2:*:4.0:3.0) OS_REL='' test -r /etc/.relid \ && OS_REL=.`sed -n 's/[^ ]* [^ ]* \([0-9][0-9]\).*/\1/p' < /etc/.relid` /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \ && echo i486-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0 /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | /bin/grep entium >/dev/null \ && echo i586-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0 ;; 3[34]??:*:4.0:* | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:*) /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \ && echo i486-ncr-sysv4 && exit 0 ;; m68*:LynxOS:2.*:* | m68*:LynxOS:3.0*:*) echo m68k-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; mc68030:UNIX_System_V:4.*:*) echo m68k-atari-sysv4 exit 0 ;; TSUNAMI:LynxOS:2.*:*) echo sparc-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; rs6000:LynxOS:2.*:*) echo rs6000-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; PowerPC:LynxOS:2.*:* | PowerPC:LynxOS:3.[01]*:* | PowerPC:LynxOS:4.0*:*) echo powerpc-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; SM[BE]S:UNIX_SV:*:*) echo mips-dde-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; RM*:ReliantUNIX-*:*:*) echo mips-sni-sysv4 exit 0 ;; RM*:SINIX-*:*:*) echo mips-sni-sysv4 exit 0 ;; *:SINIX-*:*:*) if uname -p 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -p) 2>/dev/null` echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-sni-sysv4 else echo ns32k-sni-sysv fi exit 0 ;; PENTIUM:*:4.0*:*) # Unisys `ClearPath HMP IX 4000' SVR4/MP effort # says echo i586-unisys-sysv4 exit 0 ;; *:UNIX_System_V:4*:FTX*) # From Gerald Hewes . # How about differentiating between stratus architectures? -djm echo hppa1.1-stratus-sysv4 exit 0 ;; *:*:*:FTX*) # From seanf@swdc.stratus.com. echo i860-stratus-sysv4 exit 0 ;; *:VOS:*:*) # From Paul.Green@stratus.com. echo hppa1.1-stratus-vos exit 0 ;; mc68*:A/UX:*:*) echo m68k-apple-aux${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; news*:NEWS-OS:6*:*) echo mips-sony-newsos6 exit 0 ;; R[34]000:*System_V*:*:* | R4000:UNIX_SYSV:*:* | R*000:UNIX_SV:*:*) if [ -d /usr/nec ]; then echo mips-nec-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} else echo mips-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} fi exit 0 ;; BeBox:BeOS:*:*) # BeOS running on hardware made by Be, PPC only. echo powerpc-be-beos exit 0 ;; BeMac:BeOS:*:*) # BeOS running on Mac or Mac clone, PPC only. echo powerpc-apple-beos exit 0 ;; BePC:BeOS:*:*) # BeOS running on Intel PC compatible. echo i586-pc-beos exit 0 ;; SX-4:SUPER-UX:*:*) echo sx4-nec-superux${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; SX-5:SUPER-UX:*:*) echo sx5-nec-superux${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; SX-6:SUPER-UX:*:*) echo sx6-nec-superux${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; Power*:Rhapsody:*:*) echo powerpc-apple-rhapsody${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:Rhapsody:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-apple-rhapsody${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:Darwin:*:*) case `uname -p` in *86) UNAME_PROCESSOR=i686 ;; powerpc) UNAME_PROCESSOR=powerpc ;; esac echo ${UNAME_PROCESSOR}-apple-darwin${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:procnto*:*:* | *:QNX:[0123456789]*:*) UNAME_PROCESSOR=`uname -p` if test "$UNAME_PROCESSOR" = "x86"; then UNAME_PROCESSOR=i386 UNAME_MACHINE=pc fi echo ${UNAME_PROCESSOR}-${UNAME_MACHINE}-nto-qnx${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:QNX:*:4*) echo i386-pc-qnx exit 0 ;; NSR-[DGKLNPTVW]:NONSTOP_KERNEL:*:*) echo nsr-tandem-nsk${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:NonStop-UX:*:*) echo mips-compaq-nonstopux exit 0 ;; BS2000:POSIX*:*:*) echo bs2000-siemens-sysv exit 0 ;; DS/*:UNIX_System_V:*:*) echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-${UNAME_SYSTEM}-${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; *:Plan9:*:*) # "uname -m" is not consistent, so use $cputype instead. 386 # is converted to i386 for consistency with other x86 # operating systems. if test "$cputype" = "386"; then UNAME_MACHINE=i386 else UNAME_MACHINE="$cputype" fi echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-plan9 exit 0 ;; *:TOPS-10:*:*) echo pdp10-unknown-tops10 exit 0 ;; *:TENEX:*:*) echo pdp10-unknown-tenex exit 0 ;; KS10:TOPS-20:*:* | KL10:TOPS-20:*:* | TYPE4:TOPS-20:*:*) echo pdp10-dec-tops20 exit 0 ;; XKL-1:TOPS-20:*:* | TYPE5:TOPS-20:*:*) echo pdp10-xkl-tops20 exit 0 ;; *:TOPS-20:*:*) echo pdp10-unknown-tops20 exit 0 ;; *:ITS:*:*) echo pdp10-unknown-its exit 0 ;; SEI:*:*:SEIUX) echo mips-sei-seiux${UNAME_RELEASE} exit 0 ;; esac #echo '(No uname command or uname output not recognized.)' 1>&2 #echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" 1>&2 eval $set_cc_for_build cat >$dummy.c < # include #endif main () { #if defined (sony) #if defined (MIPSEB) /* BFD wants "bsd" instead of "newsos". Perhaps BFD should be changed, I don't know.... */ printf ("mips-sony-bsd\n"); exit (0); #else #include printf ("m68k-sony-newsos%s\n", #ifdef NEWSOS4 "4" #else "" #endif ); exit (0); #endif #endif #if defined (__arm) && defined (__acorn) && defined (__unix) printf ("arm-acorn-riscix"); exit (0); #endif #if defined (hp300) && !defined (hpux) printf ("m68k-hp-bsd\n"); exit (0); #endif #if defined (NeXT) #if !defined (__ARCHITECTURE__) #define __ARCHITECTURE__ "m68k" #endif int version; version=`(hostinfo | sed -n 's/.*NeXT Mach \([0-9]*\).*/\1/p') 2>/dev/null`; if (version < 4) printf ("%s-next-nextstep%d\n", __ARCHITECTURE__, version); else printf ("%s-next-openstep%d\n", __ARCHITECTURE__, version); exit (0); #endif #if defined (MULTIMAX) || defined (n16) #if defined (UMAXV) printf ("ns32k-encore-sysv\n"); exit (0); #else #if defined (CMU) printf ("ns32k-encore-mach\n"); exit (0); #else printf ("ns32k-encore-bsd\n"); exit (0); #endif #endif #endif #if defined (__386BSD__) printf ("i386-pc-bsd\n"); exit (0); #endif #if defined (sequent) #if defined (i386) printf ("i386-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0); #endif #if defined (ns32000) printf ("ns32k-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0); #endif #endif #if defined (_SEQUENT_) struct utsname un; uname(&un); if (strncmp(un.version, "V2", 2) == 0) { printf ("i386-sequent-ptx2\n"); exit (0); } if (strncmp(un.version, "V1", 2) == 0) { /* XXX is V1 correct? */ printf ("i386-sequent-ptx1\n"); exit (0); } printf ("i386-sequent-ptx\n"); exit (0); #endif #if defined (vax) # if !defined (ultrix) # include # if defined (BSD) # if BSD == 43 printf ("vax-dec-bsd4.3\n"); exit (0); # else # if BSD == 199006 printf ("vax-dec-bsd4.3reno\n"); exit (0); # else printf ("vax-dec-bsd\n"); exit (0); # endif # endif # else printf ("vax-dec-bsd\n"); exit (0); # endif # else printf ("vax-dec-ultrix\n"); exit (0); # endif #endif #if defined (alliant) && defined (i860) printf ("i860-alliant-bsd\n"); exit (0); #endif exit (1); } EOF $CC_FOR_BUILD -o $dummy $dummy.c 2>/dev/null && $dummy && exit 0 # Apollos put the system type in the environment. test -d /usr/apollo && { echo ${ISP}-apollo-${SYSTYPE}; exit 0; } # Convex versions that predate uname can use getsysinfo(1) if [ -x /usr/convex/getsysinfo ] then case `getsysinfo -f cpu_type` in c1*) echo c1-convex-bsd exit 0 ;; c2*) if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc then echo c32-convex-bsd else echo c2-convex-bsd fi exit 0 ;; c34*) echo c34-convex-bsd exit 0 ;; c38*) echo c38-convex-bsd exit 0 ;; c4*) echo c4-convex-bsd exit 0 ;; esac fi cat >&2 < in order to provide the needed information to handle your system. config.guess timestamp = $timestamp uname -m = `(uname -m) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` uname -r = `(uname -r) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` uname -s = `(uname -s) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` uname -v = `(uname -v) 2>/dev/null || echo unknown` /usr/bin/uname -p = `(/usr/bin/uname -p) 2>/dev/null` /bin/uname -X = `(/bin/uname -X) 2>/dev/null` hostinfo = `(hostinfo) 2>/dev/null` /bin/universe = `(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null` /usr/bin/arch -k = `(/usr/bin/arch -k) 2>/dev/null` /bin/arch = `(/bin/arch) 2>/dev/null` /usr/bin/oslevel = `(/usr/bin/oslevel) 2>/dev/null` /usr/convex/getsysinfo = `(/usr/convex/getsysinfo) 2>/dev/null` UNAME_MACHINE = ${UNAME_MACHINE} UNAME_RELEASE = ${UNAME_RELEASE} UNAME_SYSTEM = ${UNAME_SYSTEM} UNAME_VERSION = ${UNAME_VERSION} EOF exit 1 # Local variables: # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "timestamp='" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d" # time-stamp-end: "'" # End: cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/config.rpath0000775000076400007640000003502510224574110013610 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # Output a system dependent set of variables, describing how to set the # run time search path of shared libraries in an executable. # # Copyright 1996-2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Taken from GNU libtool, 2001 # Originally by Gordon Matzigkeit , 1996 # # This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation gives # unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, with or without # modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # # The first argument passed to this file is the canonical host specification, # CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM # or # CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM # The environment variables CC, GCC, LDFLAGS, LD, with_gnu_ld # should be set by the caller. # # The set of defined variables is at the end of this script. # Known limitations: # - On IRIX 6.5 with CC="cc", the run time search patch must not be longer # than 256 bytes, otherwise the compiler driver will dump core. The only # known workaround is to choose shorter directory names for the build # directory and/or the installation directory. # All known linkers require a `.a' archive for static linking (except M$VC, # which needs '.lib'). libext=a shrext=.so host="$1" host_cpu=`echo "$host" | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\1/'` host_vendor=`echo "$host" | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\2/'` host_os=`echo "$host" | sed 's/^\([^-]*\)-\([^-]*\)-\(.*\)$/\3/'` cc_basename=`echo "$CC" | sed -e 's%^.*/%%'` # Code taken from libtool.m4's AC_LIBTOOL_PROG_COMPILER_PIC. wl= if test "$GCC" = yes; then wl='-Wl,' else case "$host_os" in aix*) wl='-Wl,' ;; darwin*) case "$cc_basename" in xlc*) wl='-Wl,' ;; esac ;; mingw* | pw32* | os2*) ;; hpux9* | hpux10* | hpux11*) wl='-Wl,' ;; irix5* | irix6* | nonstopux*) wl='-Wl,' ;; newsos6) ;; linux*) case $cc_basename in icc* | ecc*) wl='-Wl,' ;; pgcc | pgf77 | pgf90) wl='-Wl,' ;; ccc*) wl='-Wl,' ;; como) wl='-lopt=' ;; esac ;; osf3* | osf4* | osf5*) wl='-Wl,' ;; sco3.2v5*) ;; solaris*) wl='-Wl,' ;; sunos4*) wl='-Qoption ld ' ;; sysv4 | sysv4.2uw2* | sysv4.3* | sysv5*) wl='-Wl,' ;; sysv4*MP*) ;; unicos*) wl='-Wl,' ;; uts4*) ;; esac fi # Code taken from libtool.m4's AC_LIBTOOL_PROG_LD_SHLIBS. hardcode_libdir_flag_spec= hardcode_libdir_separator= hardcode_direct=no hardcode_minus_L=no case "$host_os" in cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*) # FIXME: the MSVC++ port hasn't been tested in a loooong time # When not using gcc, we currently assume that we are using # Microsoft Visual C++. if test "$GCC" != yes; then with_gnu_ld=no fi ;; openbsd*) with_gnu_ld=no ;; esac ld_shlibs=yes if test "$with_gnu_ld" = yes; then case "$host_os" in aix3* | aix4* | aix5*) # On AIX/PPC, the GNU linker is very broken if test "$host_cpu" != ia64; then ld_shlibs=no fi ;; amigaos*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir' hardcode_minus_L=yes # Samuel A. Falvo II reports # that the semantics of dynamic libraries on AmigaOS, at least up # to version 4, is to share data among multiple programs linked # with the same dynamic library. Since this doesn't match the # behavior of shared libraries on other platforms, we cannot use # them. ld_shlibs=no ;; beos*) if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then : else ld_shlibs=no fi ;; cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*) # hardcode_libdir_flag_spec is actually meaningless, as there is # no search path for DLLs. hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir' if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep 'auto-import' > /dev/null; then : else ld_shlibs=no fi ;; netbsd*) ;; solaris* | sysv5*) if $LD -v 2>&1 | grep 'BFD 2\.8' > /dev/null; then ld_shlibs=no elif $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then : else ld_shlibs=no fi ;; sunos4*) hardcode_direct=yes ;; linux*) if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then : else ld_shlibs=no fi ;; *) if $LD --help 2>&1 | grep ': supported targets:.* elf' > /dev/null; then : else ld_shlibs=no fi ;; esac if test "$ld_shlibs" = yes; then # Unlike libtool, we use -rpath here, not --rpath, since the documented # option of GNU ld is called -rpath, not --rpath. hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir' fi else case "$host_os" in aix3*) # Note: this linker hardcodes the directories in LIBPATH if there # are no directories specified by -L. hardcode_minus_L=yes if test "$GCC" = yes; then # Neither direct hardcoding nor static linking is supported with a # broken collect2. hardcode_direct=unsupported fi ;; aix4* | aix5*) if test "$host_cpu" = ia64; then # On IA64, the linker does run time linking by default, so we don't # have to do anything special. aix_use_runtimelinking=no else aix_use_runtimelinking=no # Test if we are trying to use run time linking or normal # AIX style linking. If -brtl is somewhere in LDFLAGS, we # need to do runtime linking. case $host_os in aix4.[23]|aix4.[23].*|aix5*) for ld_flag in $LDFLAGS; do if (test $ld_flag = "-brtl" || test $ld_flag = "-Wl,-brtl"); then aix_use_runtimelinking=yes break fi done esac fi hardcode_direct=yes hardcode_libdir_separator=':' if test "$GCC" = yes; then case $host_os in aix4.[012]|aix4.[012].*) collect2name=`${CC} -print-prog-name=collect2` if test -f "$collect2name" && \ strings "$collect2name" | grep resolve_lib_name >/dev/null then # We have reworked collect2 hardcode_direct=yes else # We have old collect2 hardcode_direct=unsupported hardcode_minus_L=yes hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir' hardcode_libdir_separator= fi esac fi # Begin _LT_AC_SYS_LIBPATH_AIX. echo 'int main () { return 0; }' > conftest.c ${CC} ${LDFLAGS} conftest.c -o conftest aix_libpath=`dump -H conftest 2>/dev/null | sed -n -e '/Import File Strings/,/^$/ { /^0/ { s/^0 *\(.*\)$/\1/; p; } }'` if test -z "$aix_libpath"; then aix_libpath=`dump -HX64 conftest 2>/dev/null | sed -n -e '/Import File Strings/,/^$/ { /^0/ { s/^0 *\(.*\)$/\1/; p; } }'` fi if test -z "$aix_libpath"; then aix_libpath="/usr/lib:/lib" fi rm -f conftest.c conftest # End _LT_AC_SYS_LIBPATH_AIX. if test "$aix_use_runtimelinking" = yes; then hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-blibpath:$libdir:'"$aix_libpath" else if test "$host_cpu" = ia64; then hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-R $libdir:/usr/lib:/lib' else hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-blibpath:$libdir:'"$aix_libpath" fi fi ;; amigaos*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir' hardcode_minus_L=yes # see comment about different semantics on the GNU ld section ld_shlibs=no ;; bsdi[45]*) ;; cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*) # When not using gcc, we currently assume that we are using # Microsoft Visual C++. # hardcode_libdir_flag_spec is actually meaningless, as there is # no search path for DLLs. hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=' ' libext=lib ;; darwin* | rhapsody*) hardcode_direct=no if test "$GCC" = yes ; then : else case "$cc_basename" in xlc*) ;; *) ld_shlibs=no ;; esac fi ;; dgux*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir' ;; freebsd1*) ld_shlibs=no ;; freebsd2.2*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir' hardcode_direct=yes ;; freebsd2*) hardcode_direct=yes hardcode_minus_L=yes ;; freebsd* | kfreebsd*-gnu | dragonfly*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir' hardcode_direct=yes ;; hpux9*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}+b ${wl}$libdir' hardcode_libdir_separator=: hardcode_direct=yes # hardcode_minus_L: Not really in the search PATH, # but as the default location of the library. hardcode_minus_L=yes ;; hpux10* | hpux11*) if test "$with_gnu_ld" = no; then case "$host_cpu" in hppa*64*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}+b ${wl}$libdir' hardcode_libdir_separator=: hardcode_direct=no ;; ia64*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir' hardcode_direct=no # hardcode_minus_L: Not really in the search PATH, # but as the default location of the library. hardcode_minus_L=yes ;; *) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}+b ${wl}$libdir' hardcode_libdir_separator=: hardcode_direct=yes # hardcode_minus_L: Not really in the search PATH, # but as the default location of the library. hardcode_minus_L=yes ;; esac fi ;; irix5* | irix6* | nonstopux*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir' hardcode_libdir_separator=: ;; netbsd*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir' hardcode_direct=yes ;; newsos6) hardcode_direct=yes hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir' hardcode_libdir_separator=: ;; openbsd*) hardcode_direct=yes if test -z "`echo __ELF__ | $CC -E - | grep __ELF__`" || test "$host_os-$host_cpu" = "openbsd2.8-powerpc"; then hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath,$libdir' else case "$host_os" in openbsd[01].* | openbsd2.[0-7] | openbsd2.[0-7].*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir' ;; *) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath,$libdir' ;; esac fi ;; os2*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir' hardcode_minus_L=yes ;; osf3*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir' hardcode_libdir_separator=: ;; osf4* | osf5*) if test "$GCC" = yes; then hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='${wl}-rpath ${wl}$libdir' else # Both cc and cxx compiler support -rpath directly hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-rpath $libdir' fi hardcode_libdir_separator=: ;; sco3.2v5*) ;; solaris*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-R$libdir' ;; sunos4*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir' hardcode_direct=yes hardcode_minus_L=yes ;; sysv4) case $host_vendor in sni) hardcode_direct=yes # is this really true??? ;; siemens) hardcode_direct=no ;; motorola) hardcode_direct=no #Motorola manual says yes, but my tests say they lie ;; esac ;; sysv4.3*) ;; sysv4*MP*) if test -d /usr/nec; then ld_shlibs=yes fi ;; sysv4.2uw2*) hardcode_direct=yes hardcode_minus_L=no ;; sysv5OpenUNIX8* | sysv5UnixWare7* | sysv5uw[78]* | unixware7*) ;; sysv5*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec= ;; uts4*) hardcode_libdir_flag_spec='-L$libdir' ;; *) ld_shlibs=no ;; esac fi # Check dynamic linker characteristics # Code taken from libtool.m4's AC_LIBTOOL_SYS_DYNAMIC_LINKER. libname_spec='lib$name' case "$host_os" in aix3*) ;; aix4* | aix5*) ;; amigaos*) ;; beos*) ;; bsdi[45]*) ;; cygwin* | mingw* | pw32*) shrext=.dll ;; darwin* | rhapsody*) shrext=.dylib ;; dgux*) ;; freebsd1*) ;; kfreebsd*-gnu) ;; freebsd*) ;; gnu*) ;; hpux9* | hpux10* | hpux11*) case "$host_cpu" in ia64*) shrext=.so ;; hppa*64*) shrext=.sl ;; *) shrext=.sl ;; esac ;; irix5* | irix6* | nonstopux*) case "$host_os" in irix5* | nonstopux*) libsuff= shlibsuff= ;; *) case $LD in *-32|*"-32 "|*-melf32bsmip|*"-melf32bsmip ") libsuff= shlibsuff= ;; *-n32|*"-n32 "|*-melf32bmipn32|*"-melf32bmipn32 ") libsuff=32 shlibsuff=N32 ;; *-64|*"-64 "|*-melf64bmip|*"-melf64bmip ") libsuff=64 shlibsuff=64 ;; *) libsuff= shlibsuff= ;; esac ;; esac ;; linux*oldld* | linux*aout* | linux*coff*) ;; linux*) ;; knetbsd*-gnu) ;; netbsd*) ;; newsos6) ;; nto-qnx*) ;; openbsd*) ;; os2*) libname_spec='$name' shrext=.dll ;; osf3* | osf4* | osf5*) ;; sco3.2v5*) ;; solaris*) ;; sunos4*) ;; sysv4 | sysv4.2uw2* | sysv4.3* | sysv5*) ;; sysv4*MP*) ;; uts4*) ;; esac sed_quote_subst='s/\(["`$\\]\)/\\\1/g' escaped_wl=`echo "X$wl" | sed -e 's/^X//' -e "$sed_quote_subst"` shlibext=`echo "$shrext" | sed -e 's,^\.,,'` escaped_hardcode_libdir_flag_spec=`echo "X$hardcode_libdir_flag_spec" | sed -e 's/^X//' -e "$sed_quote_subst"` LC_ALL=C sed -e 's/^\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=/acl_cv_\1=/' <. Submit a context # diff and a properly formatted ChangeLog entry. # # Configuration subroutine to validate and canonicalize a configuration type. # Supply the specified configuration type as an argument. # If it is invalid, we print an error message on stderr and exit with code 1. # Otherwise, we print the canonical config type on stdout and succeed. # This file is supposed to be the same for all GNU packages # and recognize all the CPU types, system types and aliases # that are meaningful with *any* GNU software. # Each package is responsible for reporting which valid configurations # it does not support. The user should be able to distinguish # a failure to support a valid configuration from a meaningless # configuration. # The goal of this file is to map all the various variations of a given # machine specification into a single specification in the form: # CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM # or in some cases, the newer four-part form: # CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM # It is wrong to echo any other type of specification. me=`echo "$0" | sed -e 's,.*/,,'` usage="\ Usage: $0 [OPTION] CPU-MFR-OPSYS $0 [OPTION] ALIAS Canonicalize a configuration name. Operation modes: -h, --help print this help, then exit -t, --time-stamp print date of last modification, then exit -v, --version print version number, then exit Report bugs and patches to ." version="\ GNU config.sub ($timestamp) Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE." help=" Try \`$me --help' for more information." # Parse command line while test $# -gt 0 ; do case $1 in --time-stamp | --time* | -t ) echo "$timestamp" ; exit 0 ;; --version | -v ) echo "$version" ; exit 0 ;; --help | --h* | -h ) echo "$usage"; exit 0 ;; -- ) # Stop option processing shift; break ;; - ) # Use stdin as input. break ;; -* ) echo "$me: invalid option $1$help" exit 1 ;; *local*) # First pass through any local machine types. echo $1 exit 0;; * ) break ;; esac done case $# in 0) echo "$me: missing argument$help" >&2 exit 1;; 1) ;; *) echo "$me: too many arguments$help" >&2 exit 1;; esac # Separate what the user gave into CPU-COMPANY and OS or KERNEL-OS (if any). # Here we must recognize all the valid KERNEL-OS combinations. maybe_os=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\2/'` case $maybe_os in nto-qnx* | linux-gnu* | freebsd*-gnu* | netbsd*-gnu* | storm-chaos* | os2-emx* | rtmk-nova*) os=-$maybe_os basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\1/'` ;; *) basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/-[^-]*$//'` if [ $basic_machine != $1 ] then os=`echo $1 | sed 's/.*-/-/'` else os=; fi ;; esac ### Let's recognize common machines as not being operating systems so ### that things like config.sub decstation-3100 work. We also ### recognize some manufacturers as not being operating systems, so we ### can provide default operating systems below. case $os in -sun*os*) # Prevent following clause from handling this invalid input. ;; -dec* | -mips* | -sequent* | -encore* | -pc532* | -sgi* | -sony* | \ -att* | -7300* | -3300* | -delta* | -motorola* | -sun[234]* | \ -unicom* | -ibm* | -next | -hp | -isi* | -apollo | -altos* | \ -convergent* | -ncr* | -news | -32* | -3600* | -3100* | -hitachi* |\ -c[123]* | -convex* | -sun | -crds | -omron* | -dg | -ultra | -tti* | \ -harris | -dolphin | -highlevel | -gould | -cbm | -ns | -masscomp | \ -apple | -axis) os= basic_machine=$1 ;; -sim | -cisco | -oki | -wec | -winbond) os= basic_machine=$1 ;; -scout) ;; -wrs) os=-vxworks basic_machine=$1 ;; -chorusos*) os=-chorusos basic_machine=$1 ;; -chorusrdb) os=-chorusrdb basic_machine=$1 ;; -hiux*) os=-hiuxwe2 ;; -sco5) os=-sco3.2v5 basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` ;; -sco4) os=-sco3.2v4 basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` ;; -sco3.2.[4-9]*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/sco3.2./sco3.2v/'` basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` ;; -sco3.2v[4-9]*) # Don't forget version if it is 3.2v4 or newer. basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` ;; -sco*) os=-sco3.2v2 basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` ;; -udk*) basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` ;; -isc) os=-isc2.2 basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` ;; -clix*) basic_machine=clipper-intergraph ;; -isc*) basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` ;; -lynx*) os=-lynxos ;; -ptx*) basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-sequent/'` ;; -windowsnt*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/windowsnt/winnt/'` ;; -psos*) os=-psos ;; -mint | -mint[0-9]*) basic_machine=m68k-atari os=-mint ;; esac # Decode aliases for certain CPU-COMPANY combinations. case $basic_machine in # Recognize the basic CPU types without company name. # Some are omitted here because they have special meanings below. 1750a | 580 \ | a29k \ | alpha | alphaev[4-8] | alphaev56 | alphaev6[78] | alphapca5[67] \ | alpha64 | alpha64ev[4-8] | alpha64ev56 | alpha64ev6[78] | alpha64pca5[67] \ | arc | arm | arm[bl]e | arme[lb] | armv[2345] | armv[345][lb] | avr \ | c4x | clipper \ | d10v | d30v | dlx | dsp16xx \ | fr30 | frv \ | h8300 | h8500 | hppa | hppa1.[01] | hppa2.0 | hppa2.0[nw] | hppa64 \ | i370 | i860 | i960 | ia64 \ | ip2k \ | m32r | m68000 | m68k | m88k | mcore \ | mips | mipsbe | mipseb | mipsel | mipsle \ | mips16 \ | mips64 | mips64el \ | mips64vr | mips64vrel \ | mips64orion | mips64orionel \ | mips64vr4100 | mips64vr4100el \ | mips64vr4300 | mips64vr4300el \ | mips64vr5000 | mips64vr5000el \ | mipsisa32 | mipsisa32el \ | mipsisa32r2 | mipsisa32r2el \ | mipsisa64 | mipsisa64el \ | mipsisa64sb1 | mipsisa64sb1el \ | mipsisa64sr71k | mipsisa64sr71kel \ | mipstx39 | mipstx39el \ | mn10200 | mn10300 \ | msp430 \ | ns16k | ns32k \ | openrisc | or32 \ | pdp10 | pdp11 | pj | pjl \ | powerpc | powerpc64 | powerpc64le | powerpcle | ppcbe \ | pyramid \ | s390 | s390x \ | sh | sh[1234] | sh[23]e | sh[34]eb | shbe | shle | sh[1234]le | sh3ele \ | sh64 | sh64le \ | sparc | sparc64 | sparc86x | sparclet | sparclite | sparcv9 | sparcv9b \ | strongarm \ | tahoe | thumb | tic4x | tic80 | tron \ | v850 | v850e \ | we32k \ | x86 | xscale | xstormy16 | xtensa \ | z8k) basic_machine=$basic_machine-unknown ;; m6811 | m68hc11 | m6812 | m68hc12) # Motorola 68HC11/12. basic_machine=$basic_machine-unknown os=-none ;; m88110 | m680[12346]0 | m683?2 | m68360 | m5200 | v70 | w65 | z8k) ;; # We use `pc' rather than `unknown' # because (1) that's what they normally are, and # (2) the word "unknown" tends to confuse beginning users. i*86 | x86_64) basic_machine=$basic_machine-pc ;; # Object if more than one company name word. *-*-*) echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2 exit 1 ;; # Recognize the basic CPU types with company name. 580-* \ | a29k-* \ | alpha-* | alphaev[4-8]-* | alphaev56-* | alphaev6[78]-* \ | alpha64-* | alpha64ev[4-8]-* | alpha64ev56-* | alpha64ev6[78]-* \ | alphapca5[67]-* | alpha64pca5[67]-* | arc-* \ | arm-* | armbe-* | armle-* | armeb-* | armv*-* \ | avr-* \ | bs2000-* \ | c[123]* | c30-* | [cjt]90-* | c4x-* | c54x-* | c55x-* | c6x-* \ | clipper-* | cydra-* \ | d10v-* | d30v-* | dlx-* \ | elxsi-* \ | f30[01]-* | f700-* | fr30-* | frv-* | fx80-* \ | h8300-* | h8500-* \ | hppa-* | hppa1.[01]-* | hppa2.0-* | hppa2.0[nw]-* | hppa64-* \ | i*86-* | i860-* | i960-* | ia64-* \ | ip2k-* \ | m32r-* \ | m68000-* | m680[012346]0-* | m68360-* | m683?2-* | m68k-* \ | m88110-* | m88k-* | mcore-* \ | mips-* | mipsbe-* | mipseb-* | mipsel-* | mipsle-* \ | mips16-* \ | mips64-* | mips64el-* \ | mips64vr-* | mips64vrel-* \ | mips64orion-* | mips64orionel-* \ | mips64vr4100-* | mips64vr4100el-* \ | mips64vr4300-* | mips64vr4300el-* \ | mips64vr5000-* | mips64vr5000el-* \ | mipsisa32-* | mipsisa32el-* \ | mipsisa32r2-* | mipsisa32r2el-* \ | mipsisa64-* | mipsisa64el-* \ | mipsisa64sb1-* | mipsisa64sb1el-* \ | mipsisa64sr71k-* | mipsisa64sr71kel-* \ | mipstx39-* | mipstx39el-* \ | msp430-* \ | none-* | np1-* | nv1-* | ns16k-* | ns32k-* \ | orion-* \ | pdp10-* | pdp11-* | pj-* | pjl-* | pn-* | power-* \ | powerpc-* | powerpc64-* | powerpc64le-* | powerpcle-* | ppcbe-* \ | pyramid-* \ | romp-* | rs6000-* \ | s390-* | s390x-* \ | sh-* | sh[1234]-* | sh[23]e-* | sh[34]eb-* | shbe-* \ | shle-* | sh[1234]le-* | sh3ele-* | sh64-* | sh64le-* \ | sparc-* | sparc64-* | sparc86x-* | sparclet-* | sparclite-* \ | sparcv9-* | sparcv9b-* | strongarm-* | sv1-* | sx?-* \ | tahoe-* | thumb-* \ | tic30-* | tic4x-* | tic54x-* | tic55x-* | tic6x-* | tic80-* \ | tron-* \ | v850-* | v850e-* | vax-* \ | we32k-* \ | x86-* | x86_64-* | xps100-* | xscale-* | xstormy16-* \ | xtensa-* \ | ymp-* \ | z8k-*) ;; # Recognize the various machine names and aliases which stand # for a CPU type and a company and sometimes even an OS. 386bsd) basic_machine=i386-unknown os=-bsd ;; 3b1 | 7300 | 7300-att | att-7300 | pc7300 | safari | unixpc) basic_machine=m68000-att ;; 3b*) basic_machine=we32k-att ;; a29khif) basic_machine=a29k-amd os=-udi ;; adobe68k) basic_machine=m68010-adobe os=-scout ;; alliant | fx80) basic_machine=fx80-alliant ;; altos | altos3068) basic_machine=m68k-altos ;; am29k) basic_machine=a29k-none os=-bsd ;; amd64) basic_machine=x86_64-pc ;; amdahl) basic_machine=580-amdahl os=-sysv ;; amiga | amiga-*) basic_machine=m68k-unknown ;; amigaos | amigados) basic_machine=m68k-unknown os=-amigaos ;; amigaunix | amix) basic_machine=m68k-unknown os=-sysv4 ;; apollo68) basic_machine=m68k-apollo os=-sysv ;; apollo68bsd) basic_machine=m68k-apollo os=-bsd ;; aux) basic_machine=m68k-apple os=-aux ;; balance) basic_machine=ns32k-sequent os=-dynix ;; c90) basic_machine=c90-cray os=-unicos ;; convex-c1) basic_machine=c1-convex os=-bsd ;; convex-c2) basic_machine=c2-convex os=-bsd ;; convex-c32) basic_machine=c32-convex os=-bsd ;; convex-c34) basic_machine=c34-convex os=-bsd ;; convex-c38) basic_machine=c38-convex os=-bsd ;; cray | j90) basic_machine=j90-cray os=-unicos ;; crds | unos) basic_machine=m68k-crds ;; cris | cris-* | etrax*) basic_machine=cris-axis ;; da30 | da30-*) basic_machine=m68k-da30 ;; decstation | decstation-3100 | pmax | pmax-* | pmin | dec3100 | decstatn) basic_machine=mips-dec ;; decsystem10* | dec10*) basic_machine=pdp10-dec os=-tops10 ;; decsystem20* | dec20*) basic_machine=pdp10-dec os=-tops20 ;; delta | 3300 | motorola-3300 | motorola-delta \ | 3300-motorola | delta-motorola) basic_machine=m68k-motorola ;; delta88) basic_machine=m88k-motorola os=-sysv3 ;; dpx20 | dpx20-*) basic_machine=rs6000-bull os=-bosx ;; dpx2* | dpx2*-bull) basic_machine=m68k-bull os=-sysv3 ;; ebmon29k) basic_machine=a29k-amd os=-ebmon ;; elxsi) basic_machine=elxsi-elxsi os=-bsd ;; encore | umax | mmax) basic_machine=ns32k-encore ;; es1800 | OSE68k | ose68k | ose | OSE) basic_machine=m68k-ericsson os=-ose ;; fx2800) basic_machine=i860-alliant ;; genix) basic_machine=ns32k-ns ;; gmicro) basic_machine=tron-gmicro os=-sysv ;; go32) basic_machine=i386-pc os=-go32 ;; h3050r* | hiux*) basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi os=-hiuxwe2 ;; h8300hms) basic_machine=h8300-hitachi os=-hms ;; h8300xray) basic_machine=h8300-hitachi os=-xray ;; h8500hms) basic_machine=h8500-hitachi os=-hms ;; harris) basic_machine=m88k-harris os=-sysv3 ;; hp300-*) basic_machine=m68k-hp ;; hp300bsd) basic_machine=m68k-hp os=-bsd ;; hp300hpux) basic_machine=m68k-hp os=-hpux ;; hp3k9[0-9][0-9] | hp9[0-9][0-9]) basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp ;; hp9k2[0-9][0-9] | hp9k31[0-9]) basic_machine=m68000-hp ;; hp9k3[2-9][0-9]) basic_machine=m68k-hp ;; hp9k6[0-9][0-9] | hp6[0-9][0-9]) basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp ;; hp9k7[0-79][0-9] | hp7[0-79][0-9]) basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp ;; hp9k78[0-9] | hp78[0-9]) # FIXME: really hppa2.0-hp basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp ;; hp9k8[67]1 | hp8[67]1 | hp9k80[24] | hp80[24] | hp9k8[78]9 | hp8[78]9 | hp9k893 | hp893) # FIXME: really hppa2.0-hp basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp ;; hp9k8[0-9][13679] | hp8[0-9][13679]) basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp ;; hp9k8[0-9][0-9] | hp8[0-9][0-9]) basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp ;; hppa-next) os=-nextstep3 ;; hppaosf) basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp os=-osf ;; hppro) basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp os=-proelf ;; i370-ibm* | ibm*) basic_machine=i370-ibm ;; # I'm not sure what "Sysv32" means. Should this be sysv3.2? i*86v32) basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'` os=-sysv32 ;; i*86v4*) basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'` os=-sysv4 ;; i*86v) basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'` os=-sysv ;; i*86sol2) basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'` os=-solaris2 ;; i386mach) basic_machine=i386-mach os=-mach ;; i386-vsta | vsta) basic_machine=i386-unknown os=-vsta ;; iris | iris4d) basic_machine=mips-sgi case $os in -irix*) ;; *) os=-irix4 ;; esac ;; isi68 | isi) basic_machine=m68k-isi os=-sysv ;; m88k-omron*) basic_machine=m88k-omron ;; magnum | m3230) basic_machine=mips-mips os=-sysv ;; merlin) basic_machine=ns32k-utek os=-sysv ;; mingw32) basic_machine=i386-pc os=-mingw32 ;; miniframe) basic_machine=m68000-convergent ;; *mint | -mint[0-9]* | *MiNT | *MiNT[0-9]*) basic_machine=m68k-atari os=-mint ;; mips3*-*) basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'` ;; mips3*) basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`-unknown ;; mmix*) basic_machine=mmix-knuth os=-mmixware ;; monitor) basic_machine=m68k-rom68k os=-coff ;; morphos) basic_machine=powerpc-unknown os=-morphos ;; msdos) basic_machine=i386-pc os=-msdos ;; mvs) basic_machine=i370-ibm os=-mvs ;; ncr3000) basic_machine=i486-ncr os=-sysv4 ;; netbsd386) basic_machine=i386-unknown os=-netbsd ;; netwinder) basic_machine=armv4l-rebel os=-linux ;; news | news700 | news800 | news900) basic_machine=m68k-sony os=-newsos ;; news1000) basic_machine=m68030-sony os=-newsos ;; news-3600 | risc-news) basic_machine=mips-sony os=-newsos ;; necv70) basic_machine=v70-nec os=-sysv ;; next | m*-next ) basic_machine=m68k-next case $os in -nextstep* ) ;; -ns2*) os=-nextstep2 ;; *) os=-nextstep3 ;; esac ;; nh3000) basic_machine=m68k-harris os=-cxux ;; nh[45]000) basic_machine=m88k-harris os=-cxux ;; nindy960) basic_machine=i960-intel os=-nindy ;; mon960) basic_machine=i960-intel os=-mon960 ;; nonstopux) basic_machine=mips-compaq os=-nonstopux ;; np1) basic_machine=np1-gould ;; nv1) basic_machine=nv1-cray os=-unicosmp ;; nsr-tandem) basic_machine=nsr-tandem ;; op50n-* | op60c-*) basic_machine=hppa1.1-oki os=-proelf ;; or32 | or32-*) basic_machine=or32-unknown os=-coff ;; OSE68000 | ose68000) basic_machine=m68000-ericsson os=-ose ;; os68k) basic_machine=m68k-none os=-os68k ;; pa-hitachi) basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi os=-hiuxwe2 ;; paragon) basic_machine=i860-intel os=-osf ;; pbd) basic_machine=sparc-tti ;; pbb) basic_machine=m68k-tti ;; pc532 | pc532-*) basic_machine=ns32k-pc532 ;; pentium | p5 | k5 | k6 | nexgen | viac3) basic_machine=i586-pc ;; pentiumpro | p6 | 6x86 | athlon | athlon_*) basic_machine=i686-pc ;; pentiumii | pentium2 | pentiumiii | pentium3) basic_machine=i686-pc ;; pentium4) basic_machine=i786-pc ;; pentium-* | p5-* | k5-* | k6-* | nexgen-* | viac3-*) basic_machine=i586-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` ;; pentiumpro-* | p6-* | 6x86-* | athlon-*) basic_machine=i686-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` ;; pentiumii-* | pentium2-* | pentiumiii-* | pentium3-*) basic_machine=i686-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` ;; pentium4-*) basic_machine=i786-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` ;; pn) basic_machine=pn-gould ;; power) basic_machine=power-ibm ;; ppc) basic_machine=powerpc-unknown ;; ppc-*) basic_machine=powerpc-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` ;; ppcle | powerpclittle | ppc-le | powerpc-little) basic_machine=powerpcle-unknown ;; ppcle-* | powerpclittle-*) basic_machine=powerpcle-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` ;; ppc64) basic_machine=powerpc64-unknown ;; ppc64-*) basic_machine=powerpc64-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` ;; ppc64le | powerpc64little | ppc64-le | powerpc64-little) basic_machine=powerpc64le-unknown ;; ppc64le-* | powerpc64little-*) basic_machine=powerpc64le-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` ;; ps2) basic_machine=i386-ibm ;; pw32) basic_machine=i586-unknown os=-pw32 ;; rom68k) basic_machine=m68k-rom68k os=-coff ;; rm[46]00) basic_machine=mips-siemens ;; rtpc | rtpc-*) basic_machine=romp-ibm ;; sa29200) basic_machine=a29k-amd os=-udi ;; sb1) basic_machine=mipsisa64sb1-unknown ;; sb1el) basic_machine=mipsisa64sb1el-unknown ;; sei) basic_machine=mips-sei os=-seiux ;; sequent) basic_machine=i386-sequent ;; sh) basic_machine=sh-hitachi os=-hms ;; sh64) basic_machine=sh64-unknown ;; sparclite-wrs | simso-wrs) basic_machine=sparclite-wrs os=-vxworks ;; sps7) basic_machine=m68k-bull os=-sysv2 ;; spur) basic_machine=spur-unknown ;; st2000) basic_machine=m68k-tandem ;; stratus) basic_machine=i860-stratus os=-sysv4 ;; sun2) basic_machine=m68000-sun ;; sun2os3) basic_machine=m68000-sun os=-sunos3 ;; sun2os4) basic_machine=m68000-sun os=-sunos4 ;; sun3os3) basic_machine=m68k-sun os=-sunos3 ;; sun3os4) basic_machine=m68k-sun os=-sunos4 ;; sun4os3) basic_machine=sparc-sun os=-sunos3 ;; sun4os4) basic_machine=sparc-sun os=-sunos4 ;; sun4sol2) basic_machine=sparc-sun os=-solaris2 ;; sun3 | sun3-*) basic_machine=m68k-sun ;; sun4) basic_machine=sparc-sun ;; sun386 | sun386i | roadrunner) basic_machine=i386-sun ;; sv1) basic_machine=sv1-cray os=-unicos ;; symmetry) basic_machine=i386-sequent os=-dynix ;; t3e) basic_machine=alphaev5-cray os=-unicos ;; t90) basic_machine=t90-cray os=-unicos ;; tic54x | c54x*) basic_machine=tic54x-unknown os=-coff ;; tic55x | c55x*) basic_machine=tic55x-unknown os=-coff ;; tic6x | c6x*) basic_machine=tic6x-unknown os=-coff ;; tx39) basic_machine=mipstx39-unknown ;; tx39el) basic_machine=mipstx39el-unknown ;; toad1) basic_machine=pdp10-xkl os=-tops20 ;; tower | tower-32) basic_machine=m68k-ncr ;; udi29k) basic_machine=a29k-amd os=-udi ;; ultra3) basic_machine=a29k-nyu os=-sym1 ;; v810 | necv810) basic_machine=v810-nec os=-none ;; vaxv) basic_machine=vax-dec os=-sysv ;; vms) basic_machine=vax-dec os=-vms ;; vpp*|vx|vx-*) basic_machine=f301-fujitsu ;; vxworks960) basic_machine=i960-wrs os=-vxworks ;; vxworks68) basic_machine=m68k-wrs os=-vxworks ;; vxworks29k) basic_machine=a29k-wrs os=-vxworks ;; w65*) basic_machine=w65-wdc os=-none ;; w89k-*) basic_machine=hppa1.1-winbond os=-proelf ;; xps | xps100) basic_machine=xps100-honeywell ;; ymp) basic_machine=ymp-cray os=-unicos ;; z8k-*-coff) basic_machine=z8k-unknown os=-sim ;; none) basic_machine=none-none os=-none ;; # Here we handle the default manufacturer of certain CPU types. It is in # some cases the only manufacturer, in others, it is the most popular. w89k) basic_machine=hppa1.1-winbond ;; op50n) basic_machine=hppa1.1-oki ;; op60c) basic_machine=hppa1.1-oki ;; romp) basic_machine=romp-ibm ;; rs6000) basic_machine=rs6000-ibm ;; vax) basic_machine=vax-dec ;; pdp10) # there are many clones, so DEC is not a safe bet basic_machine=pdp10-unknown ;; pdp11) basic_machine=pdp11-dec ;; we32k) basic_machine=we32k-att ;; sh3 | sh4 | sh[34]eb | sh[1234]le | sh[23]ele) basic_machine=sh-unknown ;; sh64) basic_machine=sh64-unknown ;; sparc | sparcv9 | sparcv9b) basic_machine=sparc-sun ;; cydra) basic_machine=cydra-cydrome ;; orion) basic_machine=orion-highlevel ;; orion105) basic_machine=clipper-highlevel ;; mac | mpw | mac-mpw) basic_machine=m68k-apple ;; pmac | pmac-mpw) basic_machine=powerpc-apple ;; *-unknown) # Make sure to match an already-canonicalized machine name. ;; *) echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2 exit 1 ;; esac # Here we canonicalize certain aliases for manufacturers. case $basic_machine in *-digital*) basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/digital.*/dec/'` ;; *-commodore*) basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/commodore.*/cbm/'` ;; *) ;; esac # Decode manufacturer-specific aliases for certain operating systems. if [ x"$os" != x"" ] then case $os in # First match some system type aliases # that might get confused with valid system types. # -solaris* is a basic system type, with this one exception. -solaris1 | -solaris1.*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|solaris1|sunos4|'` ;; -solaris) os=-solaris2 ;; -svr4*) os=-sysv4 ;; -unixware*) os=-sysv4.2uw ;; -gnu/linux*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|gnu/linux|linux-gnu|'` ;; # First accept the basic system types. # The portable systems comes first. # Each alternative MUST END IN A *, to match a version number. # -sysv* is not here because it comes later, after sysvr4. -gnu* | -bsd* | -mach* | -minix* | -genix* | -ultrix* | -irix* \ | -*vms* | -sco* | -esix* | -isc* | -aix* | -sunos | -sunos[34]*\ | -hpux* | -unos* | -osf* | -luna* | -dgux* | -solaris* | -sym* \ | -amigaos* | -amigados* | -msdos* | -newsos* | -unicos* | -aof* \ | -aos* \ | -nindy* | -vxsim* | -vxworks* | -ebmon* | -hms* | -mvs* \ | -clix* | -riscos* | -uniplus* | -iris* | -rtu* | -xenix* \ | -hiux* | -386bsd* | -netbsd* | -openbsd* | -freebsd* | -riscix* \ | -lynxos* | -bosx* | -nextstep* | -cxux* | -aout* | -elf* | -oabi* \ | -ptx* | -coff* | -ecoff* | -winnt* | -domain* | -vsta* \ | -udi* | -eabi* | -lites* | -ieee* | -go32* | -aux* \ | -chorusos* | -chorusrdb* \ | -cygwin* | -pe* | -psos* | -moss* | -proelf* | -rtems* \ | -mingw32* | -linux-gnu* | -uxpv* | -beos* | -mpeix* | -udk* \ | -interix* | -uwin* | -mks* | -rhapsody* | -darwin* | -opened* \ | -openstep* | -oskit* | -conix* | -pw32* | -nonstopux* \ | -storm-chaos* | -tops10* | -tenex* | -tops20* | -its* \ | -os2* | -vos* | -palmos* | -uclinux* | -nucleus* \ | -morphos* | -superux* | -rtmk* | -rtmk-nova* | -windiss* \ | -powermax* | -dnix* | -nx6 | -nx7 | -sei*) # Remember, each alternative MUST END IN *, to match a version number. ;; -qnx*) case $basic_machine in x86-* | i*86-*) ;; *) os=-nto$os ;; esac ;; -nto-qnx*) ;; -nto*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|nto|nto-qnx|'` ;; -sim | -es1800* | -hms* | -xray | -os68k* | -none* | -v88r* \ | -windows* | -osx | -abug | -netware* | -os9* | -beos* \ | -macos* | -mpw* | -magic* | -mmixware* | -mon960* | -lnews*) ;; -mac*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|mac|macos|'` ;; -linux*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|linux|linux-gnu|'` ;; -sunos5*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos5|solaris2|'` ;; -sunos6*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos6|solaris3|'` ;; -opened*) os=-openedition ;; -wince*) os=-wince ;; -osfrose*) os=-osfrose ;; -osf*) os=-osf ;; -utek*) os=-bsd ;; -dynix*) os=-bsd ;; -acis*) os=-aos ;; -atheos*) os=-atheos ;; -386bsd) os=-bsd ;; -ctix* | -uts*) os=-sysv ;; -nova*) os=-rtmk-nova ;; -ns2 ) os=-nextstep2 ;; -nsk*) os=-nsk ;; # Preserve the version number of sinix5. -sinix5.*) os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sinix|sysv|'` ;; -sinix*) os=-sysv4 ;; -triton*) os=-sysv3 ;; -oss*) os=-sysv3 ;; -svr4) os=-sysv4 ;; -svr3) os=-sysv3 ;; -sysvr4) os=-sysv4 ;; # This must come after -sysvr4. -sysv*) ;; -ose*) os=-ose ;; -es1800*) os=-ose ;; -xenix) os=-xenix ;; -*mint | -mint[0-9]* | -*MiNT | -MiNT[0-9]*) os=-mint ;; -aros*) os=-aros ;; -kaos*) os=-kaos ;; -none) ;; *) # Get rid of the `-' at the beginning of $os. os=`echo $os | sed 's/[^-]*-//'` echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': system \`$os\' not recognized 1>&2 exit 1 ;; esac else # Here we handle the default operating systems that come with various machines. # The value should be what the vendor currently ships out the door with their # machine or put another way, the most popular os provided with the machine. # Note that if you're going to try to match "-MANUFACTURER" here (say, # "-sun"), then you have to tell the case statement up towards the top # that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating system. Otherwise, code above # will signal an error saying that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating # system, and we'll never get to this point. case $basic_machine in *-acorn) os=-riscix1.2 ;; arm*-rebel) os=-linux ;; arm*-semi) os=-aout ;; c4x-* | tic4x-*) os=-coff ;; # This must come before the *-dec entry. pdp10-*) os=-tops20 ;; pdp11-*) os=-none ;; *-dec | vax-*) os=-ultrix4.2 ;; m68*-apollo) os=-domain ;; i386-sun) os=-sunos4.0.2 ;; m68000-sun) os=-sunos3 # This also exists in the configure program, but was not the # default. # os=-sunos4 ;; m68*-cisco) os=-aout ;; mips*-cisco) os=-elf ;; mips*-*) os=-elf ;; or32-*) os=-coff ;; *-tti) # must be before sparc entry or we get the wrong os. os=-sysv3 ;; sparc-* | *-sun) os=-sunos4.1.1 ;; *-be) os=-beos ;; *-ibm) os=-aix ;; *-wec) os=-proelf ;; *-winbond) os=-proelf ;; *-oki) os=-proelf ;; *-hp) os=-hpux ;; *-hitachi) os=-hiux ;; i860-* | *-att | *-ncr | *-altos | *-motorola | *-convergent) os=-sysv ;; *-cbm) os=-amigaos ;; *-dg) os=-dgux ;; *-dolphin) os=-sysv3 ;; m68k-ccur) os=-rtu ;; m88k-omron*) os=-luna ;; *-next ) os=-nextstep ;; *-sequent) os=-ptx ;; *-crds) os=-unos ;; *-ns) os=-genix ;; i370-*) os=-mvs ;; *-next) os=-nextstep3 ;; *-gould) os=-sysv ;; *-highlevel) os=-bsd ;; *-encore) os=-bsd ;; *-sgi) os=-irix ;; *-siemens) os=-sysv4 ;; *-masscomp) os=-rtu ;; f30[01]-fujitsu | f700-fujitsu) os=-uxpv ;; *-rom68k) os=-coff ;; *-*bug) os=-coff ;; *-apple) os=-macos ;; *-atari*) os=-mint ;; *) os=-none ;; esac fi # Here we handle the case where we know the os, and the CPU type, but not the # manufacturer. We pick the logical manufacturer. vendor=unknown case $basic_machine in *-unknown) case $os in -riscix*) vendor=acorn ;; -sunos*) vendor=sun ;; -aix*) vendor=ibm ;; -beos*) vendor=be ;; -hpux*) vendor=hp ;; -mpeix*) vendor=hp ;; -hiux*) vendor=hitachi ;; -unos*) vendor=crds ;; -dgux*) vendor=dg ;; -luna*) vendor=omron ;; -genix*) vendor=ns ;; -mvs* | -opened*) vendor=ibm ;; -ptx*) vendor=sequent ;; -vxsim* | -vxworks* | -windiss*) vendor=wrs ;; -aux*) vendor=apple ;; -hms*) vendor=hitachi ;; -mpw* | -macos*) vendor=apple ;; -*mint | -mint[0-9]* | -*MiNT | -MiNT[0-9]*) vendor=atari ;; -vos*) vendor=stratus ;; esac basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed "s/unknown/$vendor/"` ;; esac echo $basic_machine$os exit 0 # Local variables: # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "timestamp='" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d" # time-stamp-end: "'" # End: cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/depcomp0000775000076400007640000003677410224574110012671 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # depcomp - compile a program generating dependencies as side-effects scriptversion=2005-02-09.22 # Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA # 02111-1307, USA. # As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you # distribute this file as part of a program that contains a # configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under # the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. # Originally written by Alexandre Oliva . case $1 in '') echo "$0: No command. Try \`$0 --help' for more information." 1>&2 exit 1; ;; -h | --h*) cat <<\EOF Usage: depcomp [--help] [--version] PROGRAM [ARGS] Run PROGRAMS ARGS to compile a file, generating dependencies as side-effects. Environment variables: depmode Dependency tracking mode. source Source file read by `PROGRAMS ARGS'. object Object file output by `PROGRAMS ARGS'. DEPDIR directory where to store dependencies. depfile Dependency file to output. tmpdepfile Temporary file to use when outputing dependencies. libtool Whether libtool is used (yes/no). Report bugs to . EOF exit $? ;; -v | --v*) echo "depcomp $scriptversion" exit $? ;; esac if test -z "$depmode" || test -z "$source" || test -z "$object"; then echo "depcomp: Variables source, object and depmode must be set" 1>&2 exit 1 fi # Dependencies for sub/bar.o or sub/bar.obj go into sub/.deps/bar.Po. depfile=${depfile-`echo "$object" | sed 's|[^\\/]*$|'${DEPDIR-.deps}'/&|;s|\.\([^.]*\)$|.P\1|;s|Pobj$|Po|'`} tmpdepfile=${tmpdepfile-`echo "$depfile" | sed 's/\.\([^.]*\)$/.T\1/'`} rm -f "$tmpdepfile" # Some modes work just like other modes, but use different flags. We # parameterize here, but still list the modes in the big case below, # to make depend.m4 easier to write. Note that we *cannot* use a case # here, because this file can only contain one case statement. if test "$depmode" = hp; then # HP compiler uses -M and no extra arg. gccflag=-M depmode=gcc fi if test "$depmode" = dashXmstdout; then # This is just like dashmstdout with a different argument. dashmflag=-xM depmode=dashmstdout fi case "$depmode" in gcc3) ## gcc 3 implements dependency tracking that does exactly what ## we want. Yay! Note: for some reason libtool 1.4 doesn't like ## it if -MD -MP comes after the -MF stuff. Hmm. "$@" -MT "$object" -MD -MP -MF "$tmpdepfile" stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile" exit $stat fi mv "$tmpdepfile" "$depfile" ;; gcc) ## There are various ways to get dependency output from gcc. Here's ## why we pick this rather obscure method: ## - Don't want to use -MD because we'd like the dependencies to end ## up in a subdir. Having to rename by hand is ugly. ## (We might end up doing this anyway to support other compilers.) ## - The DEPENDENCIES_OUTPUT environment variable makes gcc act like ## -MM, not -M (despite what the docs say). ## - Using -M directly means running the compiler twice (even worse ## than renaming). if test -z "$gccflag"; then gccflag=-MD, fi "$@" -Wp,"$gccflag$tmpdepfile" stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile" exit $stat fi rm -f "$depfile" echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile" alpha=ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ## The second -e expression handles DOS-style file names with drive letters. sed -e 's/^[^:]*: / /' \ -e 's/^['$alpha']:\/[^:]*: / /' < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile" ## This next piece of magic avoids the `deleted header file' problem. ## The problem is that when a header file which appears in a .P file ## is deleted, the dependency causes make to die (because there is ## typically no way to rebuild the header). We avoid this by adding ## dummy dependencies for each header file. Too bad gcc doesn't do ## this for us directly. tr ' ' ' ' < "$tmpdepfile" | ## Some versions of gcc put a space before the `:'. On the theory ## that the space means something, we add a space to the output as ## well. ## Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation ## correctly. Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround. sed -e 's/^\\$//' -e '/^$/d' -e '/:$/d' | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; hp) # This case exists only to let depend.m4 do its work. It works by # looking at the text of this script. This case will never be run, # since it is checked for above. exit 1 ;; sgi) if test "$libtool" = yes; then "$@" "-Wp,-MDupdate,$tmpdepfile" else "$@" -MDupdate "$tmpdepfile" fi stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile" exit $stat fi rm -f "$depfile" if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then # yes, the sourcefile depend on other files echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile" # Clip off the initial element (the dependent). Don't try to be # clever and replace this with sed code, as IRIX sed won't handle # lines with more than a fixed number of characters (4096 in # IRIX 6.2 sed, 8192 in IRIX 6.5). We also remove comment lines; # the IRIX cc adds comments like `#:fec' to the end of the # dependency line. tr ' ' ' ' < "$tmpdepfile" \ | sed -e 's/^.*\.o://' -e 's/#.*$//' -e '/^$/ d' | \ tr ' ' ' ' >> $depfile echo >> $depfile # The second pass generates a dummy entry for each header file. tr ' ' ' ' < "$tmpdepfile" \ | sed -e 's/^.*\.o://' -e 's/#.*$//' -e '/^$/ d' -e 's/$/:/' \ >> $depfile else # The sourcefile does not contain any dependencies, so just # store a dummy comment line, to avoid errors with the Makefile # "include basename.Plo" scheme. echo "#dummy" > "$depfile" fi rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; aix) # The C for AIX Compiler uses -M and outputs the dependencies # in a .u file. In older versions, this file always lives in the # current directory. Also, the AIX compiler puts `$object:' at the # start of each line; $object doesn't have directory information. # Version 6 uses the directory in both cases. stripped=`echo "$object" | sed 's/\(.*\)\..*$/\1/'` tmpdepfile="$stripped.u" if test "$libtool" = yes; then "$@" -Wc,-M else "$@" -M fi stat=$? if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then : else stripped=`echo "$stripped" | sed 's,^.*/,,'` tmpdepfile="$stripped.u" fi if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile" exit $stat fi if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then outname="$stripped.o" # Each line is of the form `foo.o: dependent.h'. # Do two passes, one to just change these to # `$object: dependent.h' and one to simply `dependent.h:'. sed -e "s,^$outname:,$object :," < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" sed -e "s,^$outname: \(.*\)$,\1:," < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile" else # The sourcefile does not contain any dependencies, so just # store a dummy comment line, to avoid errors with the Makefile # "include basename.Plo" scheme. echo "#dummy" > "$depfile" fi rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; icc) # Intel's C compiler understands `-MD -MF file'. However on # icc -MD -MF foo.d -c -o sub/foo.o sub/foo.c # ICC 7.0 will fill foo.d with something like # foo.o: sub/foo.c # foo.o: sub/foo.h # which is wrong. We want: # sub/foo.o: sub/foo.c # sub/foo.o: sub/foo.h # sub/foo.c: # sub/foo.h: # ICC 7.1 will output # foo.o: sub/foo.c sub/foo.h # and will wrap long lines using \ : # foo.o: sub/foo.c ... \ # sub/foo.h ... \ # ... "$@" -MD -MF "$tmpdepfile" stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile" exit $stat fi rm -f "$depfile" # Each line is of the form `foo.o: dependent.h', # or `foo.o: dep1.h dep2.h \', or ` dep3.h dep4.h \'. # Do two passes, one to just change these to # `$object: dependent.h' and one to simply `dependent.h:'. sed "s,^[^:]*:,$object :," < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" # Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation # correctly. Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround. sed 's,^[^:]*: \(.*\)$,\1,;s/^\\$//;/^$/d;/:$/d' < "$tmpdepfile" | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; tru64) # The Tru64 compiler uses -MD to generate dependencies as a side # effect. `cc -MD -o foo.o ...' puts the dependencies into `foo.o.d'. # At least on Alpha/Redhat 6.1, Compaq CCC V6.2-504 seems to put # dependencies in `foo.d' instead, so we check for that too. # Subdirectories are respected. dir=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|/[^/]*$|/|'` test "x$dir" = "x$object" && dir= base=`echo "$object" | sed -e 's|^.*/||' -e 's/\.o$//' -e 's/\.lo$//'` if test "$libtool" = yes; then # With Tru64 cc, shared objects can also be used to make a # static library. This mecanism is used in libtool 1.4 series to # handle both shared and static libraries in a single compilation. # With libtool 1.4, dependencies were output in $dir.libs/$base.lo.d. # # With libtool 1.5 this exception was removed, and libtool now # generates 2 separate objects for the 2 libraries. These two # compilations output dependencies in in $dir.libs/$base.o.d and # in $dir$base.o.d. We have to check for both files, because # one of the two compilations can be disabled. We should prefer # $dir$base.o.d over $dir.libs/$base.o.d because the latter is # automatically cleaned when .libs/ is deleted, while ignoring # the former would cause a distcleancheck panic. tmpdepfile1=$dir.libs/$base.lo.d # libtool 1.4 tmpdepfile2=$dir$base.o.d # libtool 1.5 tmpdepfile3=$dir.libs/$base.o.d # libtool 1.5 tmpdepfile4=$dir.libs/$base.d # Compaq CCC V6.2-504 "$@" -Wc,-MD else tmpdepfile1=$dir$base.o.d tmpdepfile2=$dir$base.d tmpdepfile3=$dir$base.d tmpdepfile4=$dir$base.d "$@" -MD fi stat=$? if test $stat -eq 0; then : else rm -f "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" "$tmpdepfile3" "$tmpdepfile4" exit $stat fi for tmpdepfile in "$tmpdepfile1" "$tmpdepfile2" "$tmpdepfile3" "$tmpdepfile4" do test -f "$tmpdepfile" && break done if test -f "$tmpdepfile"; then sed -e "s,^.*\.[a-z]*:,$object:," < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" # That's a tab and a space in the []. sed -e 's,^.*\.[a-z]*:[ ]*,,' -e 's,$,:,' < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile" else echo "#dummy" > "$depfile" fi rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; #nosideeffect) # This comment above is used by automake to tell side-effect # dependency tracking mechanisms from slower ones. dashmstdout) # Important note: in order to support this mode, a compiler *must* # always write the preprocessed file to stdout, regardless of -o. "$@" || exit $? # Remove the call to Libtool. if test "$libtool" = yes; then while test $1 != '--mode=compile'; do shift done shift fi # Remove `-o $object'. IFS=" " for arg do case $arg in -o) shift ;; $object) shift ;; *) set fnord "$@" "$arg" shift # fnord shift # $arg ;; esac done test -z "$dashmflag" && dashmflag=-M # Require at least two characters before searching for `:' # in the target name. This is to cope with DOS-style filenames: # a dependency such as `c:/foo/bar' could be seen as target `c' otherwise. "$@" $dashmflag | sed 's:^[ ]*[^: ][^:][^:]*\:[ ]*:'"$object"'\: :' > "$tmpdepfile" rm -f "$depfile" cat < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" tr ' ' ' ' < "$tmpdepfile" | \ ## Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation ## correctly. Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround. sed -e 's/^\\$//' -e '/^$/d' -e '/:$/d' | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; dashXmstdout) # This case only exists to satisfy depend.m4. It is never actually # run, as this mode is specially recognized in the preamble. exit 1 ;; makedepend) "$@" || exit $? # Remove any Libtool call if test "$libtool" = yes; then while test $1 != '--mode=compile'; do shift done shift fi # X makedepend shift cleared=no for arg in "$@"; do case $cleared in no) set ""; shift cleared=yes ;; esac case "$arg" in -D*|-I*) set fnord "$@" "$arg"; shift ;; # Strip any option that makedepend may not understand. Remove # the object too, otherwise makedepend will parse it as a source file. -*|$object) ;; *) set fnord "$@" "$arg"; shift ;; esac done obj_suffix="`echo $object | sed 's/^.*\././'`" touch "$tmpdepfile" ${MAKEDEPEND-makedepend} -o"$obj_suffix" -f"$tmpdepfile" "$@" rm -f "$depfile" cat < "$tmpdepfile" > "$depfile" sed '1,2d' "$tmpdepfile" | tr ' ' ' ' | \ ## Some versions of the HPUX 10.20 sed can't process this invocation ## correctly. Breaking it into two sed invocations is a workaround. sed -e 's/^\\$//' -e '/^$/d' -e '/:$/d' | sed -e 's/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" "$tmpdepfile".bak ;; cpp) # Important note: in order to support this mode, a compiler *must* # always write the preprocessed file to stdout. "$@" || exit $? # Remove the call to Libtool. if test "$libtool" = yes; then while test $1 != '--mode=compile'; do shift done shift fi # Remove `-o $object'. IFS=" " for arg do case $arg in -o) shift ;; $object) shift ;; *) set fnord "$@" "$arg" shift # fnord shift # $arg ;; esac done "$@" -E | sed -n '/^# [0-9][0-9]* "\([^"]*\)".*/ s:: \1 \\:p' | sed '$ s: \\$::' > "$tmpdepfile" rm -f "$depfile" echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile" cat < "$tmpdepfile" >> "$depfile" sed < "$tmpdepfile" '/^$/d;s/^ //;s/ \\$//;s/$/ :/' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; msvisualcpp) # Important note: in order to support this mode, a compiler *must* # always write the preprocessed file to stdout, regardless of -o, # because we must use -o when running libtool. "$@" || exit $? IFS=" " for arg do case "$arg" in "-Gm"|"/Gm"|"-Gi"|"/Gi"|"-ZI"|"/ZI") set fnord "$@" shift shift ;; *) set fnord "$@" "$arg" shift shift ;; esac done "$@" -E | sed -n '/^#line [0-9][0-9]* "\([^"]*\)"/ s::echo "`cygpath -u \\"\1\\"`":p' | sort | uniq > "$tmpdepfile" rm -f "$depfile" echo "$object : \\" > "$depfile" . "$tmpdepfile" | sed 's% %\\ %g' | sed -n '/^\(.*\)$/ s:: \1 \\:p' >> "$depfile" echo " " >> "$depfile" . "$tmpdepfile" | sed 's% %\\ %g' | sed -n '/^\(.*\)$/ s::\1\::p' >> "$depfile" rm -f "$tmpdepfile" ;; none) exec "$@" ;; *) echo "Unknown depmode $depmode" 1>&2 exit 1 ;; esac exit 0 # Local Variables: # mode: shell-script # sh-indentation: 2 # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" # time-stamp-end: "$" # End: cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/install-sh0000775000076400007640000002202110224574110013274 00000000000000#!/bin/sh # install - install a program, script, or datafile scriptversion=2005-02-02.21 # This originates from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh), which was # later released in X11R6 (xc/config/util/install.sh) with the # following copyright and license. # # Copyright (C) 1994 X Consortium # # Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy # of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to # deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the # rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or # sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is # furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: # # The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in # all copies or substantial portions of the Software. # # THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR # IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, # FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE # X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN # AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNEC- # TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. # # Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not # be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- # ings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consor- # tium. # # # FSF changes to this file are in the public domain. # # Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent # `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it # when there is no Makefile. # # This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written # from scratch. It can only install one file at a time, a restriction # shared with many OS's install programs. # set DOITPROG to echo to test this script # Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it. doit="${DOITPROG-}" # put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars. mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}" cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}" chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}" chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}" chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}" stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}" rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}" mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}" chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755" chowncmd= chgrpcmd= stripcmd= rmcmd="$rmprog -f" mvcmd="$mvprog" src= dst= dir_arg= dstarg= no_target_directory= usage="Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [-T] SRCFILE DSTFILE or: $0 [OPTION]... SRCFILES... DIRECTORY or: $0 [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SRCFILES... or: $0 [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORIES... In the 1st form, copy SRCFILE to DSTFILE. In the 2nd and 3rd, copy all SRCFILES to DIRECTORY. In the 4th, create DIRECTORIES. Options: -c (ignored) -d create directories instead of installing files. -g GROUP $chgrpprog installed files to GROUP. -m MODE $chmodprog installed files to MODE. -o USER $chownprog installed files to USER. -s $stripprog installed files. -t DIRECTORY install into DIRECTORY. -T report an error if DSTFILE is a directory. --help display this help and exit. --version display version info and exit. Environment variables override the default commands: CHGRPPROG CHMODPROG CHOWNPROG CPPROG MKDIRPROG MVPROG RMPROG STRIPPROG " while test -n "$1"; do case $1 in -c) shift continue;; -d) dir_arg=true shift continue;; -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2" shift shift continue;; --help) echo "$usage"; exit $?;; -m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2" shift shift continue;; -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2" shift shift continue;; -s) stripcmd=$stripprog shift continue;; -t) dstarg=$2 shift shift continue;; -T) no_target_directory=true shift continue;; --version) echo "$0 $scriptversion"; exit $?;; *) # When -d is used, all remaining arguments are directories to create. # When -t is used, the destination is already specified. test -n "$dir_arg$dstarg" && break # Otherwise, the last argument is the destination. Remove it from $@. for arg do if test -n "$dstarg"; then # $@ is not empty: it contains at least $arg. set fnord "$@" "$dstarg" shift # fnord fi shift # arg dstarg=$arg done break;; esac done if test -z "$1"; then if test -z "$dir_arg"; then echo "$0: no input file specified." >&2 exit 1 fi # It's OK to call `install-sh -d' without argument. # This can happen when creating conditional directories. exit 0 fi for src do # Protect names starting with `-'. case $src in -*) src=./$src ;; esac if test -n "$dir_arg"; then dst=$src src= if test -d "$dst"; then mkdircmd=: chmodcmd= else mkdircmd=$mkdirprog fi else # Waiting for this to be detected by the "$cpprog $src $dsttmp" command # might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad # if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'. if test ! -f "$src" && test ! -d "$src"; then echo "$0: $src does not exist." >&2 exit 1 fi if test -z "$dstarg"; then echo "$0: no destination specified." >&2 exit 1 fi dst=$dstarg # Protect names starting with `-'. case $dst in -*) dst=./$dst ;; esac # If destination is a directory, append the input filename; won't work # if double slashes aren't ignored. if test -d "$dst"; then if test -n "$no_target_directory"; then echo "$0: $dstarg: Is a directory" >&2 exit 1 fi dst=$dst/`basename "$src"` fi fi # This sed command emulates the dirname command. dstdir=`echo "$dst" | sed -e 's,/*$,,;s,[^/]*$,,;s,/*$,,;s,^$,.,'` # Make sure that the destination directory exists. # Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case. if test ! -d "$dstdir"; then defaultIFS=' ' IFS="${IFS-$defaultIFS}" oIFS=$IFS # Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason. IFS='%' set x `echo "$dstdir" | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'` shift IFS=$oIFS pathcomp= while test $# -ne 0 ; do pathcomp=$pathcomp$1 shift if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then $mkdirprog "$pathcomp" # mkdir can fail with a `File exist' error in case several # install-sh are creating the directory concurrently. This # is OK. test -d "$pathcomp" || exit fi pathcomp=$pathcomp/ done fi if test -n "$dir_arg"; then $doit $mkdircmd "$dst" \ && { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dst"; } \ && { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dst"; } \ && { test -z "$stripcmd" || $doit $stripcmd "$dst"; } \ && { test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd "$dst"; } else dstfile=`basename "$dst"` # Make a couple of temp file names in the proper directory. dsttmp=$dstdir/_inst.$$_ rmtmp=$dstdir/_rm.$$_ # Trap to clean up those temp files at exit. trap 'ret=$?; rm -f "$dsttmp" "$rmtmp" && exit $ret' 0 trap '(exit $?); exit' 1 2 13 15 # Copy the file name to the temp name. $doit $cpprog "$src" "$dsttmp" && # and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits. # # If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to # ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore # errors from the above "$doit $cpprog $src $dsttmp" command. # { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dsttmp"; } \ && { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dsttmp"; } \ && { test -z "$stripcmd" || $doit $stripcmd "$dsttmp"; } \ && { test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd "$dsttmp"; } && # Now rename the file to the real destination. { $doit $mvcmd -f "$dsttmp" "$dstdir/$dstfile" 2>/dev/null \ || { # The rename failed, perhaps because mv can't rename something else # to itself, or perhaps because mv is so ancient that it does not # support -f. # Now remove or move aside any old file at destination location. # We try this two ways since rm can't unlink itself on some # systems and the destination file might be busy for other # reasons. In this case, the final cleanup might fail but the new # file should still install successfully. { if test -f "$dstdir/$dstfile"; then $doit $rmcmd -f "$dstdir/$dstfile" 2>/dev/null \ || $doit $mvcmd -f "$dstdir/$dstfile" "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null \ || { echo "$0: cannot unlink or rename $dstdir/$dstfile" >&2 (exit 1); exit 1 } else : fi } && # Now rename the file to the real destination. $doit $mvcmd "$dsttmp" "$dstdir/$dstfile" } } fi || { (exit 1); exit 1; } done # The final little trick to "correctly" pass the exit status to the exit trap. { (exit 0); exit 0 } # Local variables: # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" # time-stamp-end: "$" # End: cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/mdate-sh0000775000076400007640000001215110224574110012723 00000000000000#!/bin/sh # Get modification time of a file or directory and pretty-print it. scriptversion=2005-02-07.09 # Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software # Foundation, Inc. # written by Ulrich Drepper , June 1995 # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, # Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. # As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you # distribute this file as part of a program that contains a # configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under # the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. # This file is maintained in Automake, please report # bugs to or send patches to # . case $1 in '') echo "$0: No file. Try \`$0 --help' for more information." 1>&2 exit 1; ;; -h | --h*) cat <<\EOF Usage: mdate-sh [--help] [--version] FILE Pretty-print the modification time of FILE. Report bugs to . EOF exit $? ;; -v | --v*) echo "mdate-sh $scriptversion" exit $? ;; esac # Prevent date giving response in another language. LANG=C export LANG LC_ALL=C export LC_ALL LC_TIME=C export LC_TIME save_arg1="$1" # Find out how to get the extended ls output of a file or directory. if ls -L /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then ls_command='ls -L -l -d' else ls_command='ls -l -d' fi # A `ls -l' line looks as follows on OS/2. # drwxrwx--- 0 Aug 11 2001 foo # This differs from Unix, which adds ownership information. # drwxrwx--- 2 root root 4096 Aug 11 2001 foo # # To find the date, we split the line on spaces and iterate on words # until we find a month. This cannot work with files whose owner is a # user named `Jan', or `Feb', etc. However, it's unlikely that `/' # will be owned by a user whose name is a month. So we first look at # the extended ls output of the root directory to decide how many # words should be skipped to get the date. # On HPUX /bin/sh, "set" interprets "-rw-r--r--" as options, so the "x" below. set x`ls -l -d /` # Find which argument is the month. month= command= until test $month do shift # Add another shift to the command. command="$command shift;" case $1 in Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;; Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;; Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;; Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;; May) month=May; nummonth=5;; Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;; Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;; Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;; Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;; Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;; Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;; Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;; esac done # Get the extended ls output of the file or directory. set dummy x`eval "$ls_command \"\$save_arg1\""` # Remove all preceding arguments eval $command # Because of the dummy argument above, month is in $2. # # On a POSIX system, we should have # # $# = 5 # $1 = file size # $2 = month # $3 = day # $4 = year or time # $5 = filename # # On Darwin 7.7.0 and 7.6.0, we have # # $# = 4 # $1 = day # $2 = month # $3 = year or time # $4 = filename # Get the month. case $2 in Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;; Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;; Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;; Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;; May) month=May; nummonth=5;; Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;; Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;; Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;; Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;; Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;; Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;; Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;; esac case $3 in ???*) day=$1;; *) day=$3; shift;; esac # Here we have to deal with the problem that the ls output gives either # the time of day or the year. case $3 in *:*) set `date`; eval year=\$$# case $2 in Jan) nummonthtod=1;; Feb) nummonthtod=2;; Mar) nummonthtod=3;; Apr) nummonthtod=4;; May) nummonthtod=5;; Jun) nummonthtod=6;; Jul) nummonthtod=7;; Aug) nummonthtod=8;; Sep) nummonthtod=9;; Oct) nummonthtod=10;; Nov) nummonthtod=11;; Dec) nummonthtod=12;; esac # For the first six month of the year the time notation can also # be used for files modified in the last year. if (expr $nummonth \> $nummonthtod) > /dev/null; then year=`expr $year - 1` fi;; *) year=$3;; esac # The result. echo $day $month $year # Local Variables: # mode: shell-script # sh-indentation: 2 # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" # time-stamp-end: "$" # End: cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/missing0000775000076400007640000002517010224574110012677 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # Common stub for a few missing GNU programs while installing. scriptversion=2005-02-08.22 # Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 # Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Originally by Fran,cois Pinard , 1996. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA # 02111-1307, USA. # As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you # distribute this file as part of a program that contains a # configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under # the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. if test $# -eq 0; then echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information" exit 1 fi run=: # In the cases where this matters, `missing' is being run in the # srcdir already. if test -f configure.ac; then configure_ac=configure.ac else configure_ac=configure.in fi msg="missing on your system" case "$1" in --run) # Try to run requested program, and just exit if it succeeds. run= shift "$@" && exit 0 # Exit code 63 means version mismatch. This often happens # when the user try to use an ancient version of a tool on # a file that requires a minimum version. In this case we # we should proceed has if the program had been absent, or # if --run hadn't been passed. if test $? = 63; then run=: msg="probably too old" fi ;; -h|--h|--he|--hel|--help) echo "\ $0 [OPTION]... PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]... Handle \`PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...' for when PROGRAM is missing, or return an error status if there is no known handling for PROGRAM. Options: -h, --help display this help and exit -v, --version output version information and exit --run try to run the given command, and emulate it if it fails Supported PROGRAM values: aclocal touch file \`aclocal.m4' autoconf touch file \`configure' autoheader touch file \`config.h.in' automake touch all \`Makefile.in' files bison create \`y.tab.[ch]', if possible, from existing .[ch] flex create \`lex.yy.c', if possible, from existing .c help2man touch the output file lex create \`lex.yy.c', if possible, from existing .c makeinfo touch the output file tar try tar, gnutar, gtar, then tar without non-portable flags yacc create \`y.tab.[ch]', if possible, from existing .[ch] Send bug reports to ." exit $? ;; -v|--v|--ve|--ver|--vers|--versi|--versio|--version) echo "missing $scriptversion (GNU Automake)" exit $? ;; -*) echo 1>&2 "$0: Unknown \`$1' option" echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information" exit 1 ;; esac # Now exit if we have it, but it failed. Also exit now if we # don't have it and --version was passed (most likely to detect # the program). case "$1" in lex|yacc) # Not GNU programs, they don't have --version. ;; tar) if test -n "$run"; then echo 1>&2 "ERROR: \`tar' requires --run" exit 1 elif test "x$2" = "x--version" || test "x$2" = "x--help"; then exit 1 fi ;; *) if test -z "$run" && ($1 --version) > /dev/null 2>&1; then # We have it, but it failed. exit 1 elif test "x$2" = "x--version" || test "x$2" = "x--help"; then # Could not run --version or --help. This is probably someone # running `$TOOL --version' or `$TOOL --help' to check whether # $TOOL exists and not knowing $TOOL uses missing. exit 1 fi ;; esac # If it does not exist, or fails to run (possibly an outdated version), # try to emulate it. case "$1" in aclocal*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified \`acinclude.m4' or \`${configure_ac}'. You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." touch aclocal.m4 ;; autoconf) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified \`${configure_ac}'. You might want to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." touch configure ;; autoheader) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified \`acconfig.h' or \`${configure_ac}'. You might want to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." files=`sed -n 's/^[ ]*A[CM]_CONFIG_HEADER(\([^)]*\)).*/\1/p' ${configure_ac}` test -z "$files" && files="config.h" touch_files= for f in $files; do case "$f" in *:*) touch_files="$touch_files "`echo "$f" | sed -e 's/^[^:]*://' -e 's/:.*//'`;; *) touch_files="$touch_files $f.in";; esac done touch $touch_files ;; automake*) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified \`Makefile.am', \`acinclude.m4' or \`${configure_ac}'. You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages. Grab them from any GNU archive site." find . -type f -name Makefile.am -print | sed 's/\.am$/.in/' | while read f; do touch "$f"; done ;; autom4te) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is needed, but is $msg. You might have modified some files without having the proper tools for further handling them. You can get \`$1' as part of \`Autoconf' from any GNU archive site." file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*--output[ =]*\([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'` test -z "$file" && file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o[ ]*\([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'` if test -f "$file"; then touch $file else test -z "$file" || exec >$file echo "#! /bin/sh" echo "# Created by GNU Automake missing as a replacement of" echo "# $ $@" echo "exit 0" chmod +x $file exit 1 fi ;; bison|yacc) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' $msg. You should only need it if you modified a \`.y' file. You may need the \`Bison' package in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get \`Bison' from any GNU archive site." rm -f y.tab.c y.tab.h if [ $# -ne 1 ]; then eval LASTARG="\${$#}" case "$LASTARG" in *.y) SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/y$/c/'` if [ -f "$SRCFILE" ]; then cp "$SRCFILE" y.tab.c fi SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/y$/h/'` if [ -f "$SRCFILE" ]; then cp "$SRCFILE" y.tab.h fi ;; esac fi if [ ! -f y.tab.h ]; then echo >y.tab.h fi if [ ! -f y.tab.c ]; then echo 'main() { return 0; }' >y.tab.c fi ;; lex|flex) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified a \`.l' file. You may need the \`Flex' package in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get \`Flex' from any GNU archive site." rm -f lex.yy.c if [ $# -ne 1 ]; then eval LASTARG="\${$#}" case "$LASTARG" in *.l) SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/l$/c/'` if [ -f "$SRCFILE" ]; then cp "$SRCFILE" lex.yy.c fi ;; esac fi if [ ! -f lex.yy.c ]; then echo 'main() { return 0; }' >lex.yy.c fi ;; help2man) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified a dependency of a manual page. You may need the \`Help2man' package in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get \`Help2man' from any GNU archive site." file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o \([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'` if test -z "$file"; then file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*--output=\([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'` fi if [ -f "$file" ]; then touch $file else test -z "$file" || exec >$file echo ".ab help2man is required to generate this page" exit 1 fi ;; makeinfo) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is $msg. You should only need it if you modified a \`.texi' or \`.texinfo' file, or any other file indirectly affecting the aspect of the manual. The spurious call might also be the consequence of using a buggy \`make' (AIX, DU, IRIX). You might want to install the \`Texinfo' package or the \`GNU make' package. Grab either from any GNU archive site." # The file to touch is that specified with -o ... file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o \([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'` if test -z "$file"; then # ... or it is the one specified with @setfilename ... infile=`echo "$*" | sed 's/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/'` file=`sed -n '/^@setfilename/ { s/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/; p; q; }' $infile` # ... or it is derived from the source name (dir/f.texi becomes f.info) test -z "$file" && file=`echo "$infile" | sed 's,.*/,,;s,.[^.]*$,,'`.info fi touch $file ;; tar) shift # We have already tried tar in the generic part. # Look for gnutar/gtar before invocation to avoid ugly error # messages. if (gnutar --version > /dev/null 2>&1); then gnutar "$@" && exit 0 fi if (gtar --version > /dev/null 2>&1); then gtar "$@" && exit 0 fi firstarg="$1" if shift; then case "$firstarg" in *o*) firstarg=`echo "$firstarg" | sed s/o//` tar "$firstarg" "$@" && exit 0 ;; esac case "$firstarg" in *h*) firstarg=`echo "$firstarg" | sed s/h//` tar "$firstarg" "$@" && exit 0 ;; esac fi echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: I can't seem to be able to run \`tar' with the given arguments. You may want to install GNU tar or Free paxutils, or check the command line arguments." exit 1 ;; *) echo 1>&2 "\ WARNING: \`$1' is needed, and is $msg. You might have modified some files without having the proper tools for further handling them. Check the \`README' file, it often tells you about the needed prerequisites for installing this package. You may also peek at any GNU archive site, in case some other package would contain this missing \`$1' program." exit 1 ;; esac exit 0 # Local variables: # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" # time-stamp-end: "$" # End: cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/texinfo.tex0000664000076400007640000067303510224574110013507 00000000000000% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. % % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi % \def\texinfoversion{2005-01-30.17} % % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software % Foundation, Inc. % % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at % your option) any later version. % % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU % General Public License for more details. % % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. % % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) % % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug % reports; you can get the latest version from: % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. % % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. % % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: % tex foo.texi % texindex foo.?? % tex foo.texi % tex foo.texi % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. % % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the % full Texinfo distribution. % % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} % If in a .fmt file, print the version number % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because % they might have appeared in the input file name. \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} \message{Basics,} \chardef\other=12 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. \let\+ = \relax % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. \let\ptexb=\b \let\ptexbullet=\bullet \let\ptexc=\c \let\ptexcomma=\, \let\ptexdot=\. \let\ptexdots=\dots \let\ptexend=\end \let\ptexequiv=\equiv \let\ptexexclam=\! \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote \let\ptexgtr=> \let\ptexhat=^ \let\ptexi=\i \let\ptexindent=\indent \let\ptexinsert=\insert \let\ptexlbrace=\{ \let\ptexless=< \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent \let\ptexplus=+ \let\ptexrbrace=\} \let\ptexslash=\/ \let\ptexstar=\* \let\ptext=\t % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it % starts a new line in the output. \newlinechar = `^^J % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. % \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. \else \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} \fi % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi % \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi % \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi % In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is % in some cases the escape char. \chardef\colonChar = `\: \chardef\commaChar = `\, \chardef\dotChar = `\. \chardef\exclamChar= `\! \chardef\questChar = `\? \chardef\semiChar = `\; \chardef\underChar = `\_ \chardef\spaceChar = `\ % \chardef\spacecat = 10 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat} % Ignore a token. % \def\gobble#1{} % The following is used inside several \edef's. \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} % Hyphenation fixes. \hyphenation{ Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces spell-ing spell-ings stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space wide-spread wrap-around } % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. \newdimen\bindingoffset \newdimen\normaloffset \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight % For a final copy, take out the rectangles % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). % \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). % \def\|{% % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. \leavevmode % % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. \vadjust{% % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. \vskip-\baselineskip % % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. \llap{% % % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt % % This is the space between the bar and the text. \hskip 12pt }% }% } % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. % \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% \def\loggingall{% \tracingstats2 \tracingpages1 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingoutput1 \tracingmacros2 \tracingrestores1 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging \tracingscantokens1 \tracingifs1 \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2 \tracingassigns1 \fi \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex \errorcontextlines16 }% % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. % \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} % For @cropmarks command. % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. % \newif\ifcropmarks \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue % % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 % \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in % Main output routine. \chardef\PAGE = 255 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} \newbox\headlinebox \newbox\footlinebox % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. \def\onepageout#1{% \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi % \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi % % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% % {% % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends % before the \shipout runs. % \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. \shipout\vbox{% % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi % \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup \hsize = \outerhsize \vskip-\topandbottommargin \vtop to0pt{% \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% \nointerlineskip \line{% \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% \hfill \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% }% \vss}% \vskip\topandbottommargin \line\bgroup \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi \vbox\bgroup \fi % \unvbox\headlinebox \pagebody{#1}% \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. \vskip 2\baselineskip \unvbox\footlinebox \fi % \ifcropmarks \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick \vbox to0pt{\vss \line{% \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% \hfill \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% }% \nointerlineskip \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% }% \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause \fi }% end of \shipout\vbox }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive \advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi } \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} {\catcode`\@ =11 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} } % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) % \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} \def\nstop{\vbox {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} \def\nsbot{\vbox {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. % \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} \def\parseargusing#1#2{% \def\next{#2}% \begingroup \obeylines \spaceisspace #1% \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. } {\obeylines % \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% }% } % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} % Each occurence of `\^^M' or `\^^M' is replaced by a single space. % % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., % @end itemize @c foo % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed % by \finishparsearg. % \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% \def\temp{#3}% \ifx\temp\empty % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run; % thus we reuse \temp. \let\temp\finishparsearg \else \let\temp\argcheckspaces \fi % Put the space token in: \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm } % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, % just before passing the control to \next. % (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger % that a pair of braces would be stripped. % % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. % \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}} % \parseargdef\foo{...} % is roughly equivalent to % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} % \def\Xfoo#1{...} % % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 \def\parseargdef#1{% \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% } \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% \def#2{\parsearg#1}% \def#1##1% } % Several utility definitions with active space: { \obeyspaces \gdef\obeyedspace{ } % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input % should produce a line of output anyway. % \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} } \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: % % \envdef\foo{...} % \def\Efoo{...} % % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. % % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they % are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this % special case.) % At runtime, environments start with this: \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} % initialize \let\thisenv\empty % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} % Check whether we're in the right environment: \def\checkenv#1{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\thisenv\temp \else \badenverr \fi } % Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: \def\badenverr{% \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, not \inenvironment\thisenv}% } \def\inenvironment#1{% \ifx#1\empty out of any environment% \else in environment \expandafter\string#1% \fi } % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv % \parseargdef\end{% \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname \else % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname \csname E#1\endcsname \endgroup \fi } \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} %% Simple single-character @ commands % @@ prints an @ % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). \def\@{{\tt\char64}} % This is turned off because it was never documented % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' %% but suppressing ligatures. %\def\`{{`}} %\def\'{{'}} % Used to generate quoted braces. \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} \let\{=\mylbrace \let\}=\myrbrace \begingroup % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, % and @{ and @} for the aux file. \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% !endgroup % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. \let\comma = , % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. \let\, = \c \let\dotaccent = \. \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} \let\tieaccent = \t \let\ubaraccent = \b \let\udotaccent = \d % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. \def\questiondown{?`} \def\exclamdown{!`} \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. \def\imacro{i} \def\jmacro{j} \def\dotless#1{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% \fi\fi } % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) % \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and % \scriptscriptstyle). % \def\LaTeX{% L\kern-.36em {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% \kern-.15em \TeX } % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. {\catcode`@ = 11 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble % if the definition is written into an index file. \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } } % @: forces normal size whitespace following. \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } % @* forces a line break. \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} % @/ allows a line break. \let\/=\allowbreak % @. is an end-of-sentence period. \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } % @? is an end-of-sentence query. \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and % the text is small, which looks bad. % % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). % \newbox\groupbox \def\vfilllimit{0.7} % \envdef\group{% \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% \fi \startsavinginserts % \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. \comment } % % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space % above. But it's pretty close. \def\Egroup{% % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth \egroup % End the \vtop. % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big % group, force a page break. \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight \page \fi \fi \box\groupbox \prevdepth = \dimen1 \checkinserts } % % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. % \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% where each line of input produces a line of output.} % @need space-in-mils % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in % Old definition--didn't work. %\parseargdef\need{\par % %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally %% if the depth of the box does not fit. %{\baselineskip=0pt% %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak %\prevdepth=-1000pt %}} \parseargdef\need{% % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a % paragraph. \par % % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. \dimen0 = #1\mil \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 % % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. % And a page break here is fine. \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% % % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. % % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. \penalty9999 % % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. \kern -#1\mil % % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. \nobreak \fi } % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). \let\br = \par % @page forces the start of a new page. % \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} % @exdent text.... % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. % That's how much \exdent should take out. \newskip\exdentamount % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. % \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} % \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% \nobreak \kern-\strutdepth \vtop to \strutdepth{% \baselineskip=\strutdepth \vss % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. \ifx#1l% \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% \else \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% \fi \null }% }} \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} % % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; % else use TEXT for both). % \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts \def\righttext{#2}% \else \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text \def\righttext{#1}% \fi % \ifodd\pageno \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin \else \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% \fi \temp } % @include file insert text of that file as input. % \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} \def\includezzz#1{% \pushthisfilestack \def\thisfile{#1}% {% \makevalueexpandable \def\temp{\input #1 }% \expandafter }\temp \popthisfilestack } \def\filenamecatcodes{% \catcode`\\=\other \catcode`~=\other \catcode`^=\other \catcode`_=\other \catcode`|=\other \catcode`<=\other \catcode`>=\other \catcode`+=\other \catcode`-=\other } \def\pushthisfilestack{% \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm } \def\pushthisfilestackX{% \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm } \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% } \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: the stack of filenames is empty.}} \def\thisfile{} % @center line % outputs that line, centered. % \parseargdef\center{% \ifhmode \let\next\centerH \else \let\next\centerV \fi \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% } \def\centerH#1{% {% \hfil\break \advance\hsize by -\leftskip \advance\hsize by -\rightskip \line{#1}% \break }% } \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} % @comment ...line which is ignored... % @c is the same as @comment % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% \commentxxx} {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} \let\c=\comment % @paragraphindent NCHARS % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. % \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords \def\noneword{none} % \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\asisword \else \ifx\temp\noneword \defaultparindent = 0pt \else \defaultparindent = #1em \fi \fi \parindent = \defaultparindent } % @exampleindent NCHARS % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. \parseargdef\exampleindent{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\asisword \else \ifx\temp\noneword \lispnarrowing = 0pt \else \lispnarrowing = #1em \fi \fi } % @firstparagraphindent WORD % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such % paragraphs. % % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. % By default, we suppress indentation. % \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} \def\insertword{insert} % \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\noneword \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent \else\ifx\temp\insertword \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax \else \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% \fi\fi } % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. % % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next % paragraph. % \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% \gdef\indent{% \restorefirstparagraphindent \indent }% \gdef\noindent{% \restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent }% \global\everypar = {% \kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent }% } \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% \global \let \indent = \ptexindent \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent \global \everypar = {}% } % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. % \def\asis#1{#1} % @math outputs its argument in math mode. % % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, % which is what @var uses. { \catcode\underChar = \active \gdef\mathunderscore{% \catcode\underChar=\active \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% } } % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not % otherwise define @\. % % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} % \def\math{% \tex \mathunderscore \let\\ = \mathbackslash \mathactive $\finishmath } \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). % { \catcode`^ = \active \catcode`< = \active \catcode`> = \active \catcode`+ = \active \gdef\mathactive{% \let^ = \ptexhat \let< = \ptexless \let> = \ptexgtr \let+ = \ptexplus } } % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} \def\minus{$-$} % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter % font as three actual period characters. % \def\dots{% \leavevmode \hbox to 1.5em{% \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil .\hfil.\hfil.% \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil }% } % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. % \def\enddots{% \dots \spacefactor=3000 } % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up % Texinfo's parsing. % \let\comma = , % @refill is a no-op. \let\refill=\relax % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). % \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. \let\novalidate = \linksfalse % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. \def\setfilename{% \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. \iflinks \tryauxfile % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. \openindices \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. % % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. \openin 1 texinfo.cnf \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi \closein 1 % \comment % Ignore the actual filename. } % Called from \setfilename. % \def\openindices{% \newindex{cp}% \newcodeindex{fn}% \newcodeindex{vr}% \newcodeindex{tp}% \newcodeindex{ky}% \newcodeindex{pg}% } % @bye. \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} \message{pdf,} % adobe `portable' document format \newcount\tempnum \newcount\lnkcount \newtoks\filename \newcount\filenamelength \newcount\pgn \newtoks\toksA \newtoks\toksB \newtoks\toksC \newtoks\toksD \newbox\boxA \newcount\countA \newif\ifpdf \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, % borrowed from ifpdf.sty. \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined \else \ifx\pdfoutput\relax \else \ifcase\pdfoutput \else \pdftrue \fi \fi \fi % \ifpdf \input pdfcolor \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% \def\imagewidth{#2}% \def\imageheight{#3}% % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \immediate\pdfimage \else \immediate\pdfximage \fi \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 #1.pdf% \else {#1.pdf}% \fi \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage \fi} \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code in a section title % aren't expanded. \atdummies \normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz% }} \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} \let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light? \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines % come from Petr Olsak \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax \advance\tempnum by 1 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} % % #1 is the section text. #2 is the pdf expression for the number % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node % text, which might be empty if this toc entry had no % corresponding node. #4 is the page number. % \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the % page number. We could generate a destination for the section % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't % seem worthwhile, since most documents are normally structured. \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}\fi % \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{#1}% } % \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% \begingroup % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace % % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% \def\thischapnum{##2}% \def\thissecnum{0}% \def\thissubsecnum{0}% }% \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% \def\thissecnum{##2}% \def\thissubsecnum{0}% }% \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% }% \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% }% \def\thischapnum{0}% \def\thissecnum{0}% \def\thissubsecnum{0}% % % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et % al. a second time, below. \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% \input \jobname.toc % % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. % % We use the node names as the destinations. \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% % % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. % % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. \indexnofonts \turnoffactive \input \jobname.toc \endgroup } % \def\makelinks #1,{% \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}% \ifx\params\E \let\nextmakelinks=\relax \else \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi \picknum{#1}% \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}% \linkcolor #1% \advance\lnkcount by 1% \endlink \fi \nextmakelinks } \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1} \def\pn#1{% \def\p{#1}% \ifx\p\lbrace \let\nextpn=\ppn \else \let\nextpn=\ppnn \def\first{#1} \fi \nextpn } \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble} \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first} \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,} \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% \advance\filenamelength by 1 \fi \fi \nextsp} \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink \else \let \startlink \pdfstartlink \fi \def\pdfurl#1{% \begingroup \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}% \makevalueexpandable \leavevmode\Red \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% \endgroup} \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} \def\maketoks{% \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax \ifx\first0\adn0 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 \else \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else \let\next=\maketoks \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi \fi \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi \next} \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} \def\pdflink#1{% \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} \linkcolor #1\endlink} \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} \else \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble \let\pdfurl = \gobble \let\endlink = \relax \let\linkcolor = \relax \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput \message{fonts,} % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in % italics, not bold italics. % \def\setfontstyle#1{% \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font } % Select #1 fonts with the current style. % \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. % So we set up a \sf. \newfam\sffam \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. % We don't need math for this font style. \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} % Default leading. \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. % \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} % \def\setleading#1{% \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip \normalbaselines \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip }% } % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} % Use cm as the default font prefix. % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix % before you read in texinfo.tex. \ifx\fontprefix\undefined \def\fontprefix{cm} \fi % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. \def\rmshape{r} \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold \def\bfshape{b} \def\bxshape{bx} \def\ttshape{tt} \def\ttbshape{tt} \def\ttslshape{sltt} \def\itshape{ti} \def\itbshape{bxti} \def\slshape{sl} \def\slbshape{bxsl} \def\sfshape{ss} \def\sfbshape{ss} \def\scshape{csc} \def\scbshape{csc} % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). \def\textnominalsize{11pt} \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep % A few fonts for @defun names and args. \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} \font\smalli=cmmi9 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000} \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000} \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800} \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000} \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000} \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000} \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800} \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800} \font\smalleri=cmmi8 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} \let\titlebf=\titlerm \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 \def\authorrm{\secrm} \def\authortt{\sectt} % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} \let\chapbf=\chaprm \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 % Section fonts (14.4pt). \def\secnominalsize{14pt} \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} \let\secbf\secrm \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} \let\ssecbf\ssecrm \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315} \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000} \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000} \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000} \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000} \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000} \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000} \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000} \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000} \font\reducedi=cmmi10 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). % \def\resetmathfonts{% \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf } % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. % % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. % % This all needs generalizing, badly. % \def\textfonts{% \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl \def\curfontsize{text}% \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} \def\titlefonts{% \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl \def\curfontsize{title}% \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} \def\chapfonts{% \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl \def\curfontsize{chap}% \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} \def\secfonts{% \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl \def\curfontsize{sec}% \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} \def\subsecfonts{% \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl \def\curfontsize{ssec}% \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts \def\reducedfonts{% \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl \def\curfontsize{reduced}% \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} \def\smallfonts{% \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl \def\curfontsize{small}% \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} \def\smallerfonts{% \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl \def\curfontsize{smaller}% \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample % can fit this many characters: % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. % % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 % % I wish the USA used A4 paper. % --karl, 24jan03. % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. % \textfonts \rm % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. \def\angleleft{$\langle$} \def\angleright{$\rangle$} % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 % Fonts for short table of contents. \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} % no cmb12 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000} %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction % unless the following character is such as not to need one. \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. % @var is set to this for defun arguments. \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} % like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want % ttsl for book titles, do we? \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} \let\i=\smartitalic \let\slanted=\smartslanted \let\var=\smartslanted \let\dfn=\smartslanted \let\emph=\smartitalic % @b, explicit bold. \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} \let\strong=\b % @sansserif, explicit sans. \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. % \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. % \catcode`@=11 \def\frenchspacing{% \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m } \catcode`@=\other \def\t#1{% {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% \null } \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} \font\keysy=cmsy9 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} % The old definition, with no lozenge: %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} % @file, @option are the same as @samp. \let\file=\samp \let\option=\samp % @code is a modification of @t, % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. \def\tclose#1{% {% % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font % % Switch to typewriter. \tt % % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% % % Turn off hyphenation. \nohyphenation % \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1% }% \null } % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. % -- rms. { \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active % \global\def\code{\begingroup \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder \codex } } \def\realdash{-} \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} \def\codeunder{% % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. \ifusingtt{\ifmmode \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. \else\normalunderscore \fi \discretionary{}{}{}}% {\_}% } \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, % then @kbd has no effect. % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% \def\arg{#1}% \ifx\arg\worddistinct \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% \else\ifx\arg\wordexample \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% \else\ifx\arg\wordcode \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% \else \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}% \fi\fi\fi } \def\worddistinct{distinct} \def\wordexample{example} \def\wordcode{code} % Default is `distinct.' \kbdinputstyle distinct \def\xkey{\key} \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. \let\indicateurl=\code \let\env=\code \let\command=\code % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in % a hypertex \special here. % \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup \unsepspaces \pdfurl{#1}% \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that \else \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \ifpdf \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it \else \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url \fi \else \code{#1}% only url given, so show it \fi \fi \endlink \endgroup} % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. % \let\url=\uref % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. % %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} \ifpdf \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup \unsepspaces \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi \endlink \endgroup} \else \let\email=\uref \fi % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have % this property, we can check that font parameter. % \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. % \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for % all-uppercase. % \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% \def\temp{#2}% \ifx\temp\empty \else \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% \fi } % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. % \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% {\frenchspacing #1}% \def\temp{#2}% \ifx\temp\empty \else \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% \fi } % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. % \def\pounds{{\it\$}} % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. % % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular % font height. % % feymr - regular % feymo - slanted % feybr - bold % feybo - bold slanted % % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. % Hmm. % % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? % Hope not. % % \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} \def\eurofont{% % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the % font installed. % % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale % that to the current nominal size. % % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. % \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% % \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename % bold: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize \else % regular: \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize \fi \thiseurofont } % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. % \def\registeredsymbol{% $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% }$% } % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 % so we'll define it if necessary. % \ifx\Orb\undefined \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} \fi \message{page headings,} \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. \newif\ifseenauthor \newif\iffinishedtitlepage % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. % \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} \envdef\titlepage{% % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. \begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts % Leave some space at the very top of the page. \vglue\titlepagetopglue % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. \finishedtitlepagetrue % % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. \let\oldpage = \page \def\page{% \iffinishedtitlepage\else \finishtitlepage \fi \let\page = \oldpage \page \null }% } \def\Etitlepage{% \iffinishedtitlepage\else \finishtitlepage \fi % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. \oldpage \endgroup % % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. \HEADINGSon % % If they want short, they certainly want long too. \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage \shortcontents \contents \global\let\shortcontents = \relax \global\let\contents = \relax \fi % \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage \contents \global\let\contents = \relax \global\let\shortcontents = \relax \fi } \def\finishtitlepage{% \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize \vskip\titlepagebottomglue \finishedtitlepagetrue } %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines \let\tt=\authortt} \parseargdef\title{% \checkenv\titlepage \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} % print a rule at the page bottom also. \finishedtitlepagefalse \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt } \parseargdef\subtitle{% \checkenv\titlepage {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% } % @author should come last, but may come many times. % It can also be used inside @quotation. % \parseargdef\author{% \def\temp{\quotation}% \ifx\thisenv\temp \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. \else \checkenv\titlepage \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% \fi } %%% Set up page headings and footings. \let\thispage=\folio \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages % Now make TeX use those variables \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} \let\HEADINGShook=\relax % Commands to set those variables. % For example, this is what @headings on does % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle % @evenfooting @thisfile|| % @oddfooting ||@thisfile \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% % % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip } \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. % @headings off turns them off. % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. % By default, they are off at the start of a document, % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} \def\HEADINGSoff{% \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} \HEADINGSoff % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top % edge of all pages. \def\HEADINGSdouble{% \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage } \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, % page number on top right. \def\HEADINGSsingle{% \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager } \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage } \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager } % Subroutines used in generating headings % This produces Day Month Year style of output. % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). \ifx\today\undefined \def\today{% \number\day\space \ifcase\month \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec \fi \space\number\year} \fi % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. % It generates no output of its own. \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} \message{tables,} % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). % default indentation of table text \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in % margin between end of table item and start of table text. \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin \newdimen\itemmax % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with % these defs. % They also define \itemindex % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % \advance\hsize by -\rightskip \advance\hsize by -\tableindent \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% \itemindex{#1}% \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. % % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax % % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, % but leave it ragged-right. \begingroup \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent \advance\hsize by\tableindent \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil \leavevmode\unhbox0\par \endgroup % % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. \nobreak \vskip-\parskip % % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. % \penalty 10001 \endgroup \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse \else % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. \noindent % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and % eventually be printed. \nobreak\kern-\tableindent \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \unhbox0 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 \endgroup \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue \fi } \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} % @table, @ftable, @vtable. \envdef\table{% \let\itemindex\gobble \tablecheck{table}% } \envdef\ftable{% \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% \tablecheck{ftable}% } \envdef\vtable{% \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% \tablecheck{vtable}% } \def\tablecheck#1{% \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active \endgroup \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% \else \let\next\tablex \fi \next } \def\tablex#1{% \def\itemindicate{#1}% \parsearg\tabley } \def\tabley#1{% {% \makevalueexpandable \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% \expandafter }\temp \endtablez } \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% \aboveenvbreak \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi \itemmax=\tableindent \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin \advance \leftskip by \tableindent \exdentamount=\tableindent \parindent = 0pt \parskip = \smallskipamount \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi \let\item = \internalBitem \let\itemx = \internalBitemx } \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} \let\Eftable\Etable \let\Evtable\Etable \let\Eitemize\Etable \let\Eenumerate\Etable % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize \newcount \itemno \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} \def\doitemize#1{% \aboveenvbreak \itemmax=\itemindent \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin \advance\leftskip by \itemindent \exdentamount=\itemindent \parindent=0pt \parskip=\smallskipamount \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi \def\itemcontents{#1}% % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi \let\item=\itemizeitem } % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. % \def\itemizeitem{% \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break {% % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least % that's the theory. \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi \noindent \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. \flushcr } % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. % \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No % argument is the same as `1'. % \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. \def\thearg{#1}% \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi % % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark \ifx\rest\empty % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and % not equal to itself. % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. % % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from % continuing to look for a . % \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) \else % It's a letter. \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter \else \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter \fi \fi \else % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. \numericenumerate \fi } % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is % given in \thearg. % \def\numericenumerate{% \itemno = \thearg \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% } % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. \def\lowercaseenumerate{% \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg \startenumeration{% % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. \ifnum\itemno=0 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger alphabet}% \fi \char\lccode\itemno }% } % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. \def\uppercaseenumerate{% \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg \startenumeration{% % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. \ifnum\itemno=0 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger alphabet} \fi \char\uccode\itemno }% } % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. % \def\startenumeration#1{% \advance\itemno by -1 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr } % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg % to @enumerate. % \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} % @multitable macros % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 % % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. % To make preamble: % % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 % @item ... % % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many % columns as desired. % Or use a template: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} % @item ... % using the widest term desired in each column. % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt % if they are. % Sample multitable: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col % @item % first col stuff % @tab % second col stuff % @tab % third col % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. % % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. % @end multitable % Default dimensions may be reset by user. % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline % to baseline. % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. % \newskip\multitableparskip \newskip\multitableparindent \newdimen\multitablecolspace \newskip\multitablelinespace \multitableparskip=0pt \multitableparindent=6pt \multitablecolspace=12pt \multitablelinespace=0pt % Macros used to set up halign preamble: % \let\endsetuptable\relax \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} \let\columnfractions\relax \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} \newif\ifsetpercent % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. % \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% \global\advance\colcount by 1 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% \setuptable } \newcount\colcount \def\setuptable#1{% \def\firstarg{#1}% \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable \let\go = \relax \else \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions \global\setpercenttrue \else \ifsetpercent \let\go\pickupwholefraction \else \global\advance\colcount by 1 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% \fi \fi \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% \else \let\go = \setuptable \fi% \fi \go } % multitable-only commands. % % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group % of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. \def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% % % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: % \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. % \envdef\multitable{% \vskip\parskip \startsavinginserts % % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. \def\item{\crcr}% % \tolerance=9500 \hbadness=9500 \setmultitablespacing \parskip=\multitableparskip \parindent=\multitableparindent \overfullrule=0pt \global\colcount=0 % \everycr = {% \noalign{% \global\everytab={}% \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. % Check for saved footnotes, etc. \checkinserts % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. %\filbreak % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. }% }% % \parsearg\domultitable } \def\domultitable#1{% % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable % % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will % be used as many times as user calls for columns. % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and % continue for many paragraphs if desired. \halign\bgroup &% \global\advance\colcount by 1 \multistrut \vtop{% % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname % % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after % the first one. % % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace % to the width of each template entry. % % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. % % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. \rightskip=0pt \ifnum\colcount=1 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. \advance\hsize by\leftskip \else \ifsetpercent \else % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace \fi % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: \leftskip=\multitablecolspace \fi % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. % For example: % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 % @item @code{#} % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively % marking characters. \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut }\cr } \def\Emultitable{% \crcr \egroup % end the \halign \global\setpercentfalse } \def\setmultitablespacing{% \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing % % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 \fi %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of %% table. If not, do nothing. %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller %% than skip between lines in the table. \fi% \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller %% than skip between lines in the table. \fi} \message{conditionals,} % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't % attempt to close an environment group. % \def\makecond#1{% \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 } \makecond{iftex} \makecond{ifnotdocbook} \makecond{ifnothtml} \makecond{ifnotinfo} \makecond{ifnotplaintext} \makecond{ifnotxml} % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. % \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} \def\html{\doignore{html}} \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. % % A count to remember the depth of nesting. \newcount\doignorecount \def\doignore#1{\begingroup % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: \catcode`\@ = \other \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other % % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. \spaceisspace % % Count number of #1's that we've seen. \doignorecount = 0 % % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. \dodoignore{#1}% } { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. \obeylines % % \gdef\dodoignore#1{% % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. % % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line % by itself. \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% % % And now expand that command. \obeylines % \doignoretext ^^M% }% } \def\doignoreyyy#1{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. \let\next\doignoretextzzz \else % Found a nested condition, ... \advance\doignorecount by 1 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). \fi \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. } % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". % \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. \let\next\enddoignore \else % Still inside a nested condition. \advance\doignorecount by -1 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. \fi \next } % Finish off ignored text. \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces} % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. % % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we % didn't need it. % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. % \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% {% \makevalueexpandable \def\temp{#2}% \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% \ifx\temp\empty \next{}% \else \setzzz#2\endsetzzz \fi }% } % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. % \parseargdef\clear{% {% \makevalueexpandable \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax }% } % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} { \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active % \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% \let\value = \expandablevalue % We don't want these characters active, ... \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. % So \let them to their normal equivalents. \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore } } % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). % \def\expandablevalue#1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax {[No value for ``#1'']}% \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% \else \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi } % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined % with @set. % % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. % \makecond{ifset} \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} \def\doifset#1#2{% {% \makevalueexpandable \let\next=\empty \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax #1% If not set, redefine \next. \fi \expandafter }\next } \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. % % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. % \makecond{ifclear} \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. \let\dircategory=\comment % @defininfoenclose. \let\definfoenclose=\comment \message{indexing,} % Index generation facilities % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. % It automatically defines \fooindex such that % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long % for the sake of vms. % \def\newindex#1{% \iflinks \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file \fi \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index \noexpand\doindex{#1}} } % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} % \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. % \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} % \def\newcodeindex#1{% \iflinks \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 \fi \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% } % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. % % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo % inside @code. % \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), % #3 the target index (bar). \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up % closing the target index. \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 \fi % redefine \fooindfile: \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp % redefine \fooindex: \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% } % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, % and it is "foo", the name of the index. % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. % \def\indexdummies{% \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. \let\{ = \mylbrace \let\} = \myrbrace % % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus % effectively preventing its expansion. This is used only for control % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word % from whatever follows. % % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the % space. % % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). % \def\definedummyword##1{% \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}% }% \def\definedummyletter##1{% \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}% }% \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter % % Do the redefinitions. \commondummies } % For the aux file, @ is the escape character. So we want to redefine % everything using @ instead of \realbackslash. When everything uses % @, this will be simpler. % \def\atdummies{% \def\@{@@}% \def\ {@ }% \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd \let\} = \rbraceatcmd % % (See comments in \indexdummies.) \def\definedummyword##1{% \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}% }% \def\definedummyletter##1{% \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}% }% \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter % % Do the redefinitions. \commondummies } % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. \definedummyword and % \definedummyletter must be defined first. % \def\commondummies{% % \normalturnoffactive % \commondummiesnofonts % \definedummyletter{_}% % % Non-English letters. \definedummyword{AA}% \definedummyword{AE}% \definedummyword{L}% \definedummyword{OE}% \definedummyword{O}% \definedummyword{aa}% \definedummyword{ae}% \definedummyword{l}% \definedummyword{oe}% \definedummyword{o}% \definedummyword{ss}% \definedummyword{exclamdown}% \definedummyword{questiondown}% \definedummyword{ordf}% \definedummyword{ordm}% % % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. \definedummyword{bf}% \definedummyword{gtr}% \definedummyword{hat}% \definedummyword{less}% \definedummyword{sf}% \definedummyword{sl}% \definedummyword{tclose}% \definedummyword{tt}% % \definedummyword{LaTeX}% \definedummyword{TeX}% % % Assorted special characters. \definedummyword{bullet}% \definedummyword{comma}% \definedummyword{copyright}% \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}% \definedummyword{dots}% \definedummyword{enddots}% \definedummyword{equiv}% \definedummyword{error}% \definedummyword{euro}% \definedummyword{expansion}% \definedummyword{minus}% \definedummyword{pounds}% \definedummyword{point}% \definedummyword{print}% \definedummyword{result}% % % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any % (non-fully-expandable) commands. \makevalueexpandable % % Normal spaces, not active ones. \unsepspaces % % No macro expansion. \turnoffmacros } % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. % % Better have this without active chars. { \catcode`\~=\other \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{% % Control letters and accents. \definedummyletter{!}% \definedummyaccent{"}% \definedummyaccent{'}% \definedummyletter{*}% \definedummyaccent{,}% \definedummyletter{.}% \definedummyletter{/}% \definedummyletter{:}% \definedummyaccent{=}% \definedummyletter{?}% \definedummyaccent{^}% \definedummyaccent{`}% \definedummyaccent{~}% \definedummyword{u}% \definedummyword{v}% \definedummyword{H}% \definedummyword{dotaccent}% \definedummyword{ringaccent}% \definedummyword{tieaccent}% \definedummyword{ubaraccent}% \definedummyword{udotaccent}% \definedummyword{dotless}% % % Texinfo font commands. \definedummyword{b}% \definedummyword{i}% \definedummyword{r}% \definedummyword{sc}% \definedummyword{t}% % % Commands that take arguments. \definedummyword{acronym}% \definedummyword{cite}% \definedummyword{code}% \definedummyword{command}% \definedummyword{dfn}% \definedummyword{emph}% \definedummyword{env}% \definedummyword{file}% \definedummyword{kbd}% \definedummyword{key}% \definedummyword{math}% \definedummyword{option}% \definedummyword{samp}% \definedummyword{strong}% \definedummyword{tie}% \definedummyword{uref}% \definedummyword{url}% \definedummyword{var}% \definedummyword{verb}% \definedummyword{w}% } } % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string % would be for a given command (usually its argument). % \def\indexnofonts{% % Accent commands should become @asis. \def\definedummyaccent##1{% \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis }% % We can just ignore other control letters. \def\definedummyletter##1{% \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{}% }% % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent % \commondummiesnofonts % % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. %\let\tt=\asis % \def\ { }% \def\@{@}% % how to handle braces? \def\_{\normalunderscore}% % % Non-English letters. \def\AA{AA}% \def\AE{AE}% \def\L{L}% \def\OE{OE}% \def\O{O}% \def\aa{aa}% \def\ae{ae}% \def\l{l}% \def\oe{oe}% \def\o{o}% \def\ss{ss}% \def\exclamdown{!}% \def\questiondown{?}% \def\ordf{a}% \def\ordm{o}% % \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% \def\TeX{TeX}% % % Assorted special characters. % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) \def\bullet{bullet}% \def\comma{,}% \def\copyright{copyright}% \def\registeredsymbol{R}% \def\dots{...}% \def\enddots{...}% \def\equiv{==}% \def\error{error}% \def\euro{euro}% \def\expansion{==>}% \def\minus{-}% \def\pounds{pounds}% \def\point{.}% \def\print{-|}% \def\result{=>}% % % Don't write macro names. \emptyusermacros } \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception % is with most defuns, which call us directly). % \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% \iflinks {% % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). \toks0 = {#2}% % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. \def\thirdarg{#3}% \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% \fi % \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% % \ifvmode \dosubindsanitize \else \dosubindwrite \fi }% \fi } % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: % \def\dosubindwrite{% % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% \fi % % Remember, we are within a group. \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage \escapechar=`\\ \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. % % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to % get the string to sort by. {\indexnofonts \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% }% % % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and % the original text, including any font commands. We write % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s % sorted result. \edef\temp{% \write\writeto{% \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% }% \temp } % Take care of unwanted page breaks: % % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences % like this: % @end defun % @tindex whatever % @defun ... % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of % the previous defun. % % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. % % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. % % But wait, there is a catch there: % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual % representation of the skip. % % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). % \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} % % ..., ready, GO: % \def\dosubindsanitize{% % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. \skip0 = \lastskip \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% \count255 = \lastpenalty % % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro \else \vskip-\skip0 \fi % \dosubindwrite % \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: % % @deffn deffn-whatever % @vindex index-whatever % Description. % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit % and the "Description." paragraph. \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi \else % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi } % The index entry written in the file actually looks like % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} % or % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files % containing these kinds of lines: % \initial {c} % before the first topic whose initial is c % \entry {topic}{pagelist} % for a topic that is used without subtopics % \primary {topic} % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} % for each subtopic. % Define the user-accessible indexing commands % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. \def\findex {\fnindex} \def\kindex {\kyindex} \def\cindex {\cpindex} \def\vindex {\vrindex} \def\tindex {\tpindex} \def\pindex {\pgindex} \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} {\obeylines % \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). % \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% % \smallfonts \rm \tolerance = 9500 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. % % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains % \initial {@} % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). \catcode`\@ = 11 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s \ifeof 1 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure % there is some text. \putwordIndexNonexistent \else % % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so % it can discover if there is anything in it. \read 1 to \temp \ifeof 1 \putwordIndexIsEmpty \else % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change % to make right now. \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% \catcode`\\ = 0 \escapechar = `\\ \begindoublecolumns \input \jobname.#1s \enddoublecolumns \fi \fi \closein 1 \endgroup} % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. % Change them to control the appearance of the index. \def\initial#1{{% % Some minor font changes for the special characters. \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt % % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. \removelastskip % % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. \nobreak \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip \penalty 0 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip % % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch % we need before each entry, but it's better. % % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip \leftline{\secbf #1}% % Do our best not to break after the initial. \nobreak \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip }} % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. % % A straightforward implementation would start like this: % \def\entry#1#2{... % But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. % % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. % --kasal, 21nov03 \def\entry{% \begingroup % % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't % affect previous text. \par % % Do not fill out the last line with white space. \parfillskip = 0in % % No extra space above this paragraph. \parskip = 0in % % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. \finalhyphendemerits = 0 % % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. % % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. \hangindent = 2em % % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line % with blank space. \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil % % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing % columns. \vskip 0pt plus1pt % % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): \afterassignment\doentry \let\temp = } \def\doentry{% \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. \noindent \aftergroup\finishentry % And now comes the text of the entry. } \def\finishentry#1{% % #1 is the page number. % % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be % cursed by a Unix daemon. \def\tempa{{\rm }}% \def\tempb{#1}% \edef\tempc{\tempa}% \edef\tempd{\tempb}% \ifx\tempc\tempd \ % \else % % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) \hfil\penalty50 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. % % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull % \hbox ensues. \ifpdf \pdfgettoks#1.% \ \the\toksA \else \ #1% \fi \fi \par \endgroup } % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm \def\secondary#1#2{{% \parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in \hangindent=1in \hangafter=1 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill \ifpdf \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. \else #2 \fi \par }} % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. \catcode`\@=11 \newbox\partialpage \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns % Grab any single-column material above us. \output = {% % % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. \ifvoid\partialpage \else \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% \fi % \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% % Unvbox the main output page. \unvbox\PAGE \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip }% }% \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage % % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. \output = {\doublecolumnout}% % % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. % % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) % as it did when we hard-coded it. % % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) % been clobbered. % \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize % % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) \vsize = 2\vsize } % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except % the last. % \def\doublecolumnout{% \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the % previous page. \dimen@ = \vsize \divide\dimen@ by 2 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage % % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \onepageout\pagesofar \unvbox255 \penalty\outputpenalty } % % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. \def\pagesofar{% \unvbox\partialpage % \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% } % % All done with double columns. \def\enddoublecolumns{% \output = {% % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the % current page, no automatic page break. \balancecolumns % % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, % though, there will be another page break right after this \output % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes % the output somewhat more palatable.) \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% }% \eject \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns % % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). \pagegoal = \vsize } % % Called at the end of the double column material. \def\balancecolumns{% \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. \dimen@ = \ht0 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% \splittopskip = \topskip % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. {% \vbadness = 10000 \loop \global\setbox3 = \copy0 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt \repeat }% %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% % \pagesofar } \catcode`\@ = \other \message{sectioning,} % Chapters, sections, etc. % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 \newcount\chapno \newcount\secno \secno=0 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ % % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. % \def\appendixletter{% \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. \else\char\the\appendixno \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. % However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks. \def\thischapter{} \def\thissection{} \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name % we only have subsub. \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 % % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel % % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. \def\chapheadtype{N} % Choose a heading macro % #1 is heading type % #2 is heading level % #3 is text for heading \def\genhead#1#2#3{% % Compute the abs. sec. level: \absseclevel=#2 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 \absseclevel = 0 \else \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 \absseclevel = 3 \fi \fi % The heading type: \def\headtype{#1}% \if \headtype U% \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel \fi \else % Check for appendix sections: \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% \else \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% \fi\fi \fi % Check for numbered within unnumbered: \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel \def\headtype{U}% \else \chardef\unmlevel = 3 \fi \fi % Now print the heading: \if \headtype U% \ifcase\absseclevel \unnumberedzzz{#3}% \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% \fi \else \if \headtype A% \ifcase\absseclevel \appendixzzz{#3}% \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% \fi \else \ifcase\absseclevel \chapterzzz{#3}% \or \seczzz{#3}% \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% \fi \fi \fi \suppressfirstparagraphindent } % an interface: \def\numhead{\genhead N} \def\apphead{\genhead A} \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. % % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty % \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz \def\chapterzzz#1{% % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such % as an @include file. \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\chapno by 1 % % Used for \float. \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% \resetallfloatnos % \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% % % Write the actual heading. \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% % % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. \global\let\section = \numberedsec \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec } \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz \def\appendixzzz#1{% \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% \resetallfloatnos % \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% \message{\appendixnum}% % \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% % \global\let\section = \appendixsec \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec } \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 % % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty \resetallfloatnos % % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant % to be executed, not expanded). % % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use % \the to achieve this: TeX expands \the only once, % simply yielding the contents of . (We also do this for % the toc entries.) \toks0 = {#1}% \message{(\the\toks0)}% % \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% % \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec } % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters \unnmhead0{#1}% \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax } % @top is like @unnumbered. \let\top\unnumbered % Sections. \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz \def\seczzz#1{% \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% } \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% } \let\appendixsec\appendixsection \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% } % Subsections. \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% } \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% } \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% } % Subsubsections. \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% } \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% } \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% } % These macros control what the section commands do, according % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. \let\section = \numberedsec \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit % overlong headings to fold. % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. \def\majorheading{% {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% \parsearg\chapheadingzzz } \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}% \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax \suppressfirstparagraphindent } % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} \suppressfirstparagraphindent} \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} \suppressfirstparagraphindent} \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} \suppressfirstparagraphindent} % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) \newskip\chapheadingskip \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} \def\CHAPPAGoff{% \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} \def\CHAPPAGon{% \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} \def\CHAPPAGodd{% \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} \CHAPPAGon % Chapter opening. % % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. % % To test against our argument. \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} % \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% \pchapsepmacro {% \chapfonts \rm % % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. \gdef\thissection{#1}% \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% % % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. \def\temptype{#2}% \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{}% \def\toctype{unnchap}% \gdef\thischapter{#1}% \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry \def\toctype{omit}% \gdef\thischapter{}% \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% \def\toctype{app}% % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't % use \thissection because that changes with each section. % \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% \else \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% \def\toctype{numchap}% \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% \fi\fi\fi % % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% % % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not % being visible, for instance under high magnification. \donoderef{#2}% % % Typeset the actual heading. \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe \unhbox0 #1\par}% }% \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title \nobreak } % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax \def\centerparameters{% \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip \leftskip = \rightskip \parfillskip = 0pt } % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. % \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} % \def\unnchfopen #1{% \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak } \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% \par\penalty 5000 % } \def\centerchfopen #1{% \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak } \def\CHAPFopen{% \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. % \newskip\secheadingskip \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} % Subsection titles. \newskip\subsecheadingskip \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} % Subsubsection titles. \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} % Print any size, any type, section title. % % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the % section number. % \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% {% % Switch to the right set of fonts. \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm % % Insert space above the heading. \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname % % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. \def\sectionlevel{#2}% \def\temptype{#3}% % \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{}% \def\toctype{unn}% \gdef\thissection{#1}% \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, % and don't redefine \thissection. \setbox0 = \hbox{}% \def\toctype{omit}% \let\sectionlevel=\empty \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% \def\toctype{app}% \gdef\thissection{#1}% \else \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% \def\toctype{num}% \gdef\thissection{#1}% \fi\fi\fi % % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chfplain. \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% % % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). % Again, see comments in \chfplain. \donoderef{#3}% % % Output the actual section heading. \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number \unhbox0 #1}% }% % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. % Don't allow stretch, though. \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname % % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it % was followed by glue. \nobreak % % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a % discardable item.) \vskip-\parskip % % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: % % @section sec-whatever % @deffn def-whatever \penalty 10001 } \message{toc,} % Table of contents. \newwrite\tocfile % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. % Called from @chapter, etc. % % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the % destination to jump to. % % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the % table of contents chapter openings themselves. % \newif\iftocfileopened \def\omitkeyword{omit}% % \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% \edef\writetoctype{#1}% \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else \iftocfileopened\else \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc \global\tocfileopenedtrue \fi % \iflinks \toks0 = {#2}% \toks2 = \expandafter{\lastnode}% \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}{#3}% {\the\toks2}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \temp \fi \fi % % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named % `1', and two named `2'. \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi } \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in \newcount\savepageno \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. % \def\startcontents#1{% % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. % From: Torbjorn Granlund \contentsalignmacro \immediate\closeout\tocfile % % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. % It is abundantly clear what they are. \def\thischapter{}% \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% % \savepageno = \pageno \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97. %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. % % Roman numerals for page numbers. \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi } % Normal (long) toc. \def\contents{% \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% \openin 1 \jobname.toc \ifeof 1 \else \input \jobname.toc \fi \vfill \eject \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect \ifeof 1 \else \pdfmakeoutlines \fi \closein 1 \endgroup \lastnegativepageno = \pageno \global\pageno = \savepageno } % And just the chapters. \def\summarycontents{% \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% % \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry \let\appentry = \shortchapentry \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. \secfonts \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt \rm \hyphenpenalty = 10000 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry \openin 1 \jobname.toc \ifeof 1 \else \input \jobname.toc \fi \closein 1 \vfill \eject \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect \endgroup \lastnegativepageno = \pageno \global\pageno = \savepageno } \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. % \def\shortchaplabel#1{% % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. % But use \hss just in case. % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) % % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters % there are before deciding ... \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% } % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. % The first argument is the chapter or section name. % The last argument is the page number. % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... % Chapters, in the main contents. \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} % % Chapters, in the short toc. % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% } % Appendices, in the main contents. % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. % \def\appendixbox#1{% % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} % \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} % Unnumbered chapters. \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} % Sections. \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} % Subsections. \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} % And subsubsections. \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. % Same as \defaultparindent. \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the % page number. % % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. \def\dochapentry#1#2{% \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip \begingroup \chapentryfonts \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip } \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup} \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup} \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% \endgroup} % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. \let\tocentry = \entry % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} \message{environments,} % @foo ... @end foo. % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. % % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. % \def\point{$\star$} \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} % The @error{} command. % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. % \newbox\errorbox % {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} % \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. \vbox{% \hrule height\dimen2 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. \hrule height\dimen2} \hfil} % \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. \envdef\tex{% \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie \catcode `\%=14 \catcode `\+=\other \catcode `\"=\other \catcode `\|=\other \catcode `\<=\other \catcode `\>=\other \escapechar=`\\ % \let\b=\ptexb \let\bullet=\ptexbullet \let\c=\ptexc \let\,=\ptexcomma \let\.=\ptexdot \let\dots=\ptexdots \let\equiv=\ptexequiv \let\!=\ptexexclam \let\i=\ptexi \let\indent=\ptexindent \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent \let\{=\ptexlbrace \let\+=\tabalign \let\}=\ptexrbrace \let\/=\ptexslash \let\*=\ptexstar \let\t=\ptext % \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% \def\@{@}% } % There is no need to define \Etex. % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't % have any width. \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} % This space is always present above and below environments. \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. % \def\aboveenvbreak{{% % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and % \sectionheading, q.v. \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \advance\envskipamount by \parskip \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount \removelastskip % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak % or better ... \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi \vskip\envskipamount \fi \fi }} \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. \let\nonarrowing=\relax % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around % environment contents. \font\circle=lcircle10 \newdimen\circthick \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle % \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr \hskip\rskip}} \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr \hskip\rskip}} % \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip \envdef\cartouche{% \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. \startsavinginserts \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip \advance\cartinner by-\rskip \cartouter=\hsize \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either % side, and for 6pt waste from % each corner char, and rule thickness \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. \let\nonarrowing=\comment \vbox\bgroup \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt \carttop \hbox\bgroup \hskip\lskip \vrule\kern3pt \vbox\bgroup \kern3pt \hsize=\cartinner \baselineskip=\normbskip \lineskip=\normlskip \parskip=\normpskip \vskip -\parskip \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. } \def\Ecartouche{% \ifhmode\par\fi \kern3pt \egroup \kern3pt\vrule \hskip\rskip \egroup \cartbot \egroup \checkinserts } % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, % inside a group. \def\nonfillstart{% \aboveenvbreak \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output \parskip = 0pt \parindent = 0pt \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing % at next level down. \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing \fi \let\exdent=\nofillexdent } % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. % This affects the following displayed environments: % @example, @display, @format, @lisp % \def\smallword{small} \def\nosmallword{nosmall} \let\SETdispenvsize\relax \def\setnormaldispenv{% \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword \smallexamplefonts \rm \fi } \def\setsmalldispenv{% \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword \else \smallexamplefonts \rm \fi } % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. % Let's do it by one command: \def\makedispenv #1#2{ \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak } % Define two synonyms: \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ \makedispenv{#1}{#3} \makedispenv{#2}{#3} } % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. % % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. % \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% \nonfillstart \tt \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. \gobble % eat return } % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. % \makedispenv {display}{% \nonfillstart \gobble } % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. % \makedispenv{format}{% \let\nonarrowing = t% \nonfillstart \gobble } % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. \envdef\flushleft{% \let\nonarrowing = t% \nonfillstart \gobble } \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak % @flushright. % \envdef\flushright{% \let\nonarrowing = t% \nonfillstart \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill \gobble } \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. % \envdef\quotation{% {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip \parindent=0pt % % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing \let\nonarrowing = \relax \fi \parsearg\quotationlabel } % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're % doing normal filling. % \def\Equotation{% \par \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else % indent a bit. \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% \fi {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% } % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. \def\quotationlabel#1{% \def\temp{#1}% \ifx\temp\empty \else {\bf #1: }% \fi } % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{...} % If we want to allow any as delimiter, % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org % % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. % % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a % verbatim line. \def\dospecials{% \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% } % % [Knuth] p. 380 \def\uncatcodespecials{% \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} % % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font \begingroup \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} \endgroup % % Setup for the @verb command. % % Eight spaces for a tab \begingroup \catcode`\^^I=\active \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} \endgroup % \def\setupverb{% \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% \catcode`\`=\active \tabeightspaces % Respect line breaks, % print special symbols as themselves, and % make each space count % must do in this order: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces } % Setup for the @verbatim environment % % Real tab expansion \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount % \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} \begingroup \catcode`\^^I=\active \gdef\tabexpand{% \catcode`\^^I=\active \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab \divide\dimen0 by\tabw \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox }% } \endgroup \def\setupverbatim{% \nonfillstart \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim \tt \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% \catcode`\`=\active \tabexpand % Respect line breaks, % print special symbols as themselves, and % make each space count % must do in this order: \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces \everypar{\starttabbox}% } % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: % % \def\doverb'{'#1'}'{#1} % % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} \begingroup \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] \endgroup % \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} % % % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: % % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} % % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. % % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] % \begingroup \catcode`\ =\active \obeylines % % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank % line in the output. \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. \endgroup % \envdef\verbatim{% \setupverbatim\doverbatim } \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. % \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} % \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% {% \makevalueexpandable \setupverbatim \input #1 \afterenvbreak }% } % @copying ... @end copying. % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. % % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as % possible is very desirable. % \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} % \def\insertcopying{% \begingroup \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page \scanexp\copyingtext \endgroup } \message{defuns,} % @defun etc. \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt % Start the processing of @deffn: \def\startdefun{% \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \medbreak \else % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, % which is there to keep the function description together with its % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow % a break between a section heading and a defun. % \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi % % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. % But do insert the glue. \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint \fi % \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent } \def\dodefunx#1{% % First, check whether we are in the right environment: \checkenv#1% % % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. % It's not a great place, though. \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi % % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% } \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} % \def\printdefunline#1#2{% \begingroup % call \deffnheader: #1#2 \endheader % common ending: \interlinepenalty = 10000 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil \endgraf \nobreak\vskip -\parskip \penalty 10002 % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. \checkparencounts \endgroup } \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; % the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. % \def\makedefun#1{% \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% \temp } % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader % % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. % \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% \envdef#1{% \startdefun \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% }% \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% \def#3% } %%% Untyped functions: % @deffn category name args \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} % @deffn category class name args \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} % \defopon {category on}class name args \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args % \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% } %%% Typed functions: % @deftypefn category type name args \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} % @deftypeop category class type name args \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args % \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% } %%% Typed variables: % @deftypevr category type var args \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} % @deftypecv category class type var args \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args % \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% } %%% Untyped variables: % @defvr category var args \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } % @defcv category class var args \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} % \defcvof {category of}class var args \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } %%% Type: % @deftp category name args \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% } % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). % #1 is the category, such as "Function". % #2 is the return type, if any. % #3 is the function name. % % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. % \def\defname#1#2#3{% % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent % % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line % just below it. \def\temp{#1}% \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} % % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip % The continuations: \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 % % Put the type name to the right margin. \noindent \hbox to 0pt{% \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize % \hsize has to be shortened this way: \kern\leftskip % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. }% % % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent {% % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no % one has made identifiers using them :). \df \tt \def\temp{#2}% return value type \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi #3% output function name }% {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm % \boldbrax % arguments will be output next, if any. } % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. % \def\defunargs#1{% % use sl by default (not ttsl), % tt for the names. \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 % % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. \let\var=\ttslanted #1% \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 } % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. % \def\activeparens{% \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active \catcode`\&=\active } % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. { \activeparens \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack \global\let& = \& \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} } \newcount\parencount % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards \newif\ifampseen \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} \def\parenfont{% \ifampseen % At the first level, print parens in roman, % otherwise use the default font. \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi \else % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . \sf \fi } \def\infirstlevel#1{% \ifampseen \ifnum\parencount=1 #1% \fi \fi } \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} \def\opnr{% \global\advance\parencount by 1 {\parenfont(}% \infirstlevel \bfafterword } \def\clnr{% {\parenfont)}% \infirstlevel \sl \global\advance\parencount by -1 } \newcount\brackcount \def\lbrb{% \global\advance\brackcount by 1 {\bf[}% } \def\rbrb{% {\bf]}% \global\advance\brackcount by -1 } \def\checkparencounts{% \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi } \def\badparencount{% \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}% \global\parencount=0 } \def\badbrackcount{% \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}% \global\brackcount=0 } \message{macros,} % @macro. % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined \newwrite\macscribble \def\scantokens#1{% \toks0={#1}% \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% \immediate\closeout\macscribble \input \jobname.tmp } \fi \def\scanmacro#1{% \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ % ... and \example \spaceisspace % % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. % % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX % --kasal, 29nov03 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% \endgroup } \def\scanexp#1{% \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% \temp } \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters \newtoks\macname % Macro name \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? \def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form % \do\macro1\do\macro2... % Utility routines. % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname % (except of course we have to play expansion games). % \def\cslet#1#2{% \expandafter\let \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname \csname#2\endcsname } % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). {\catcode`\@=11 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} \def\unbrace#1{#1} \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} } % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% } % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. \def\scanctxt{% \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\+=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\^=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\~=\other } \def\scanargctxt{% \scanctxt \catcode`\\=\other \catcode`\^^M=\other } \def\macrobodyctxt{% \scanctxt \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other \catcode`\^^M=\other \usembodybackslash } \def\macroargctxt{% \scanctxt \catcode`\\=\other } % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N % where N is the macro parameter number. % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} } \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} \def\macroxxx#1{% \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments \paramno=0% \else \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% \fi \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% \else \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% % Add the macroname to \macrolist \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}% \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}% \fi \begingroup \macrobodyctxt \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody \else \expandafter\parsemacbody \fi} \parseargdef\unmacro{% \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: \begingroup \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax \let\do\unmacrodo \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% \endgroup \else \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% \fi } % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. % \def\unmacrodo#1{% \ifx#1\relax % remove this \else \noexpand\do \noexpand #1% \fi } % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a % is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine % it to # just before using the token list produced. % % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before % the macro is used. \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% \if#1;\let\next=\relax \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx \advance\paramno by 1% \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% \fi\next} % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. % Much magic with \expandafter here. % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. \def\defmacro{% \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars \ifrecursive \ifcase\paramno % 0 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% \or % 1 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt \noexpand\braceorline \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% \else % many \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% \expandafter\expandafter \expandafter\xdef \expandafter\expandafter \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% \fi \else \ifcase\paramno % 0 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% \or % 1 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt \noexpand\braceorline \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% \egroup \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% \else % many \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% \expandafter\expandafter \expandafter\xdef \expandafter\expandafter \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname \paramlist{% \egroup \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% \fi \fi} \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} \def\braceorlinexxx{% \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else \expandafter\parsearg \fi \next} % We want to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not % expanded by \write. \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}% \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} % For \indexnofonts, we need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the % arguments (if present). Of course this is not nearly correct, but it % is the best we can do for now. makeinfo does not expand macros in the % argument to @deffn, which ends up writing an index entry, and texindex % isn't prepared for an index sort entry that starts with \. % % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that % goes to end-of-line is not handled. % \def\emptyusermacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\noexpand\asis}% \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} % @alias. % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% {% \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% }% \next } \message{cross references,} \newwrite\auxfile \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. % @inforef is relatively simple. \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: % @node foo , bar , ... % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. % \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} % % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} \let\nwnode=\node \let\lastnode=\empty % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). % \def\donoderef#1{% \ifx\lastnode\empty\else \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% \global\let\lastnode=\empty \fi } % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. % \newcount\savesfregister % \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an % anchor), which consists of three parts: % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection, % or the anchor name. % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or % empty for anchors. % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. % % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. % \def\setref#1#2{% \pdfmkdest{#1}% \iflinks {% \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef }% \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}% \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout }% \fi } % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. % \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup \unsepspaces \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt % No printed node name was explicitly given. \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax % Use the node name inside the square brackets. \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% \else % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% \else \ifhavexrefs % We know the real title if we have the xref values. \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% \else % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% \fi% \fi \fi \fi % % Make link in pdf output. \ifpdf \leavevmode \getfilename{#4}% {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash \ifnum\filenamelength>0 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}% \else \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}% \fi }% \linkcolor \fi % % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. {% % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to % include an _ in the xref name, etc. \indexnofonts \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle \csname XR#1-title\endcsname }% \iffloat\Xthisreftitle % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt \refx{#1-snt}% \else \printedrefname \fi % % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append % "in MANUALNAME". \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% \fi \else % node/anchor (non-float) references. % % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% \else % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi }% % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname % % But we always want a comma and a space: ,\space % % output the `page 3'. \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% \fi \fi \endlink \endgroup} % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly % one that Bob is working on :). % \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} % Things referred to by \setref. % \def\Ynothing{} \def\Yomitfromtoc{} \def\Ynumbered{% \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno \else \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno \fi\fi\fi } \def\Yappendix{% \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno \else \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno \fi\fi\fi } % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. % \def\refx#1#2{% {% \indexnofonts \otherbackslash \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX \csname XR#1\endcsname }% \ifx\thisrefX\relax % If not defined, say something at least. \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright \iflinks \ifhavexrefs \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% \else \ifwarnedxrefs\else \global\warnedxrefstrue \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% \fi \fi \fi \else % It's defined, so just use it. \thisrefX \fi #2% Output the suffix in any case. } % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. % \def\xrdef#1#2{% \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value. % % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname % % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do \else % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% \fi % % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, % for later use in \listoffloats. \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}% \fi } % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. % \def\tryauxfile{% \openin 1 \jobname.aux \ifeof 1 \else \readauxfile \global\havexrefstrue \fi \closein 1 } \def\readauxfile{\begingroup \catcode`\^^@=\other \catcode`\^^A=\other \catcode`\^^B=\other \catcode`\^^C=\other \catcode`\^^D=\other \catcode`\^^E=\other \catcode`\^^F=\other \catcode`\^^G=\other \catcode`\^^H=\other \catcode`\^^K=\other \catcode`\^^L=\other \catcode`\^^N=\other \catcode`\^^P=\other \catcode`\^^Q=\other \catcode`\^^R=\other \catcode`\^^S=\other \catcode`\^^T=\other \catcode`\^^U=\other \catcode`\^^V=\other \catcode`\^^W=\other \catcode`\^^X=\other \catcode`\^^Z=\other \catcode`\^^[=\other \catcode`\^^\=\other \catcode`\^^]=\other \catcode`\^^^=\other \catcode`\^^_=\other % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. % % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. % \catcode`\^=\other % % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\[=\other \catcode`\]=\other \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode`\$=\other \catcode`\#=\other \catcode`\&=\other \catcode`\%=\other \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off % % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for % now. --karl, 15jan04. \catcode`\\=\other % % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. {% \count 1=128 \def\loop{% \catcode\count 1=\other \advance\count 1 by 1 \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi }% }% % % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=0 % \input \jobname.aux \endgroup} \message{insertions,} % including footnotes. \newcount \footnoteno % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. \let\footnotestyle=\comment {\catcode `\@=11 % % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. \gdef\footnote{% \let\indent=\ptexindent \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% % % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. \let\@sf\empty \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi % % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. \unskip \thisfootno\@sf \dofootnote }% % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. % % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. % \gdef\dofootnote{% \insert\footins\bgroup % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. % So reset some parameters. \hsize=\pagewidth \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \parindent\defaultparindent % \smallfonts \rm % % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). \let\noindent = \relax % % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. \everypar = {\hang}% \textindent{\thisfootno}% % % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. \footstrut \futurelet\next\fo@t } }%end \catcode `\@=11 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion % would be lost. % Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled % out prematurely. % \def\startsavinginserts{% \ifx \insert\ptexinsert \let\insert\saveinsert \else \let\checkinserts\relax \fi } % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. % \def\saveinsert#1{% \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% \afterassignment\next % swallow the left brace \let\temp = } \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} \def\placesaveins#1{% \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname {\box#1}% } % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: { \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} } % initialization: \def\newsaveins #1{% \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% \next } \def\newsaveinsX #1{% \csname newbox\endcsname #1% \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts \checksaveins #1}% } % initialize: \let\checkinserts\empty \newsaveins\footins \newsaveins\margin % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. % % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get % undone and the next image would fail. \openin 1 = epsf.tex \ifeof 1 \else % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% \input epsf.tex \fi \closein 1 % % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. \newif\ifwarnednoepsf \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} % \def\image#1{% \ifx\epsfbox\undefined \ifwarnednoepsf \else \errhelp = \noepsfhelp \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% \global\warnednoepsftrue \fi \else \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish \fi } % % Arguments to @image: % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. \newif\ifimagevmode \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names % If the image is by itself, center it. \ifvmode \imagevmodetrue \nobreak\bigskip % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space % above and below. \nobreak\vskip\parskip \nobreak \line\bgroup\hss \fi % % Output the image. \ifpdf \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% \else % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi \epsfbox{#1.eps}% \fi % \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image \endgroup} % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. % \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. % % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to % be referable. % % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). % % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each % chapter-level command. \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty % \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% \let\thiscaption=\empty \let\thisshortcaption=\empty % % don't lose footnotes inside @float. % % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 % \startsavinginserts % % We can't be used inside a paragraph. \par % \vtop\bgroup \def\floattype{#1}% \def\floatlabel{#2}% \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. % \ifx\floattype\empty \let\safefloattype=\empty \else {% % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. \indexnofonts \turnoffactive \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% }% \fi % % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) % \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname \global\advance\floatno by 1 % {% % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float % labels (which have a completely different output format) from % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the % lists of floats. % \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% }% \fi % % start with \parskip glue, I guess. \vskip\parskip % % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. \restorefirstparagraphindent } % we have these possibilities: % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap % @float Foo & no caption: Foo % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap % @float & no caption: % \def\Efloat{% \let\floatident = \empty % % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi % % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% \fi % the number. \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% \fi % % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. \let\captionline = \floatident % \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else \ifx\floatident\empty \else \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between \fi % % caption text. \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% \fi % % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. \ifx\captionline\empty \else \vskip.5\parskip \captionline % % Space below caption. \vskip\parskip \fi % % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. {% \atdummies \turnoffactive \otherbackslash % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. \scanexp{% \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty \thiscaption \else \thisshortcaption \fi }% }% \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% }% \fi \egroup % end of \vtop % % place the captured inserts % % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 % \checkinserts } % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. % \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% } % @caption, @shortcaption % \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. \def\getfloatno#1{% \ifx#1\relax % Haven't seen this figure type before. \csname newcount\endcsname #1% % % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% \fi \let\floatno#1% } % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we % first read the @float command. % \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can % distinguish floats from other xref types. \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic % \thissection value which we \setref above. % \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} % % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. % \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% \def\temp{#1}% \def\iffloattype{#2}% \ifx\temp\floatmagic } % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. % \parseargdef\listoffloats{% \def\floattype{#1}% floattype {% % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. \indexnofonts \turnoffactive \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% }% % % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax \ifhavexrefs % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% \fi \else \begingroup \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc \let\do=\listoffloatsdo \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \endgroup \fi } % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. % % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since % they won't appear in the aux file). % \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link % in pdf output. \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% % % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% \writeentry }} \message{localization,} % and i18n. % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything % properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation. % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. % \parseargdef\documentlanguage{% \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. % Read the file if it exists. \openin 1 txi-#1.tex \ifeof 1 \errhelp = \nolanghelp \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% \else \input txi-#1.tex \fi \closein 1 \endgroup } \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory should work if nowhere else does.} % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most % likely, but for now just recognize it. \let\documentencoding = \comment % Page size parameters. % \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. \vbadness = 10000 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. \hbadness = 2000 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. \widowpenalty=10000 \clubpenalty=10000 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. % \def\setemergencystretch{% \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% \else \emergencystretch = .15\hsize \fi } % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset; % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8) % physical page width. % % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. % \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% \voffset = #3\relax \topskip = #6\relax \splittopskip = \topskip % \vsize = #1\relax \advance\vsize by \topskip \outervsize = \vsize \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin \pageheight = \vsize % \hsize = #2\relax \outerhsize = \hsize \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in \pagewidth = \hsize % \normaloffset = #4\relax \bindingoffset = #5\relax % \ifpdf \pdfpageheight #7\relax \pdfpagewidth #8\relax \fi % \setleading{\textleading} % \parindent = \defaultparindent \setemergencystretch } % @letterpaper (the default). \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt \textleading = 13.2pt % % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}% {\voffset}{.25in}% {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% {11in}{8.5in}% }} % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format. \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt \textleading = 12pt % \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% {\voffset}{.25in}% {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% {9.25in}{7in}% % \lispnarrowing = 0.3in \tolerance = 700 \hfuzz = 1pt \contentsrightmargin = 0pt \defbodyindent = .5cm }} % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt \textleading = 13.2pt % % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in % your texinfo source file like this: % @tex % \global\normaloffset = -6mm % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm % @end tex \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm} {\voffset}{\hoffset}% {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% {297mm}{210mm}% % \tolerance = 700 \hfuzz = 1pt \contentsrightmargin = 0pt \defbodyindent = 5mm }} % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt \textleading = 12.5pt % \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% {\voffset}{\hoffset}% {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% {210mm}{148mm}% % \lispnarrowing = 0.2in \tolerance = 800 \hfuzz = 1.2pt \contentsrightmargin = 0pt \defbodyindent = 2mm \tableindent = 12mm }} % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 \afourpaper \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% {\voffset}{4.6mm}% {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% {297mm}{210mm}% % % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. \globaldefs = 0 }} % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 \afourpaper \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% {297mm}{210mm}% \globaldefs = 0 }} % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. % \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi \globaldefs = 1 % \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt \setleading{\textleading}% % \dimen0 = #1 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset % \dimen2 = \hsize \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset % \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% }} % Set default to letter. % \letterpaper \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\^=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode`\+=\other \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} \def\normaltilde{~} \def\normalcaret{^} \def\normalunderscore{_} \def\normalverticalbar{|} \def\normalless{<} \def\normalgreater{>} \def\normalplus{+} \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, % where something hairier probably needs to be done. % % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. % \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway % this is not a problem. \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} % Turn off all special characters except @ % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. \catcode`\"=\active \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} \let"=\activedoublequote \catcode`\~=\active \def~{{\tt\char126}} \chardef\hat=`\^ \catcode`\^=\active \def^{{\tt \hat}} \catcode`\_=\active \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} % Subroutine for the previous macro. \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } \catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} \chardef \less=`\< \catcode`\<=\active \def<{{\tt \less}} \chardef \gtr=`\> \catcode`\>=\active \def>{{\tt \gtr}} \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} \catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} \catcode`\@=0 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, % as in \char`\\. \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with % catcode other. {\catcode`\\=\active @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} } % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other. {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}} \catcode`\\=\active % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters % even after parsing them. @def@turnoffactive{% @let"=@normaldoublequote @let\=@realbackslash @let~=@normaltilde @let^=@normalcaret @let_=@normalunderscore @let|=@normalverticalbar @let<=@normalless @let>=@normalgreater @let+=@normalplus @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix @unsepspaces } % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of % the literal character `\'. (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in % effect.) % @def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash} % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. @otherifyactive % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing % a backslash. % @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} @global@let\ = @eatinput % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. % @gdef@fixbackslash{% @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active } % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. @escapechar = `@@ % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. @catcode`@& = @other @catcode`@# = @other @catcode`@% = @other @c Local variables: @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" @c time-stamp-end: "}" @c End: @c vim:sw=2: @ignore arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 @end ignore cvs-1.12.13/build-aux/ylwrap0000775000076400007640000001405310224574110012542 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # ylwrap - wrapper for lex/yacc invocations. scriptversion=2005-02-02.22 # Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 # Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # Written by Tom Tromey . # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. # As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you # distribute this file as part of a program that contains a # configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under # the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. # This file is maintained in Automake, please report # bugs to or send patches to # . case "$1" in '') echo "$0: No files given. Try \`$0 --help' for more information." 1>&2 exit 1 ;; --basedir) basedir=$2 shift 2 ;; -h|--h*) cat <<\EOF Usage: ylwrap [--help|--version] INPUT [OUTPUT DESIRED]... -- PROGRAM [ARGS]... Wrapper for lex/yacc invocations, renaming files as desired. INPUT is the input file OUTPUT is one file PROG generates DESIRED is the file we actually want instead of OUTPUT PROGRAM is program to run ARGS are passed to PROG Any number of OUTPUT,DESIRED pairs may be used. Report bugs to . EOF exit $? ;; -v|--v*) echo "ylwrap $scriptversion" exit $? ;; esac # The input. input="$1" shift case "$input" in [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) # Absolute path; do nothing. ;; *) # Relative path. Make it absolute. input="`pwd`/$input" ;; esac pairlist= while test "$#" -ne 0; do if test "$1" = "--"; then shift break fi pairlist="$pairlist $1" shift done # The program to run. prog="$1" shift # Make any relative path in $prog absolute. case "$prog" in [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) ;; *[\\/]*) prog="`pwd`/$prog" ;; esac # FIXME: add hostname here for parallel makes that run commands on # other machines. But that might take us over the 14-char limit. dirname=ylwrap$$ trap "cd `pwd`; rm -rf $dirname > /dev/null 2>&1" 1 2 3 15 mkdir $dirname || exit 1 cd $dirname case $# in 0) $prog "$input" ;; *) $prog "$@" "$input" ;; esac ret=$? if test $ret -eq 0; then set X $pairlist shift first=yes # Since DOS filename conventions don't allow two dots, # the DOS version of Bison writes out y_tab.c instead of y.tab.c # and y_tab.h instead of y.tab.h. Test to see if this is the case. y_tab_nodot="no" if test -f y_tab.c || test -f y_tab.h; then y_tab_nodot="yes" fi # The directory holding the input. input_dir=`echo "$input" | sed -e 's,\([\\/]\)[^\\/]*$,\1,'` # Quote $INPUT_DIR so we can use it in a regexp. # FIXME: really we should care about more than `.' and `\'. input_rx=`echo "$input_dir" | sed 's,\\\\,\\\\\\\\,g;s,\\.,\\\\.,g'` while test "$#" -ne 0; do from="$1" # Handle y_tab.c and y_tab.h output by DOS if test $y_tab_nodot = "yes"; then if test $from = "y.tab.c"; then from="y_tab.c" else if test $from = "y.tab.h"; then from="y_tab.h" fi fi fi if test -f "$from"; then # If $2 is an absolute path name, then just use that, # otherwise prepend `../'. case "$2" in [\\/]* | ?:[\\/]*) target="$2";; *) target="../$2";; esac # We do not want to overwrite a header file if it hasn't # changed. This avoid useless recompilations. However the # parser itself (the first file) should always be updated, # because it is the destination of the .y.c rule in the # Makefile. Divert the output of all other files to a temporary # file so we can compare them to existing versions. if test $first = no; then realtarget="$target" target="tmp-`echo $target | sed s/.*[\\/]//g`" fi # Edit out `#line' or `#' directives. # # We don't want the resulting debug information to point at # an absolute srcdir; it is better for it to just mention the # .y file with no path. # # We want to use the real output file name, not yy.lex.c for # instance. # # We want the include guards to be adjusted too. FROM=`echo "$from" | sed \ -e 'y/abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ/'\ -e 's/[^ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ]/_/g'` TARGET=`echo "$2" | sed \ -e 'y/abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ/'\ -e 's/[^ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ]/_/g'` sed -e "/^#/!b" -e "s,$input_rx,," -e "s,$from,$2," \ -e "s,$FROM,$TARGET," "$from" >"$target" || ret=$? # Check whether header files must be updated. if test $first = no; then if test -f "$realtarget" && cmp -s "$realtarget" "$target"; then echo "$2" is unchanged rm -f "$target" else echo updating "$2" mv -f "$target" "$realtarget" fi fi else # A missing file is only an error for the first file. This # is a blatant hack to let us support using "yacc -d". If -d # is not specified, we don't want an error when the header # file is "missing". if test $first = yes; then ret=1 fi fi shift shift first=no done else ret=$? fi # Remove the directory. cd .. rm -rf $dirname exit $ret # Local Variables: # mode: shell-script # sh-indentation: 2 # eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) # time-stamp-start: "scriptversion=" # time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" # time-stamp-end: "$" # End: cvs-1.12.13/contrib/0000777000076400007640000000000010320232615011121 500000000000000cvs-1.12.13/contrib/README0000644000076400007640000001347210317774775011754 00000000000000This "contrib" directory is a place holder for code/scripts sent to me by contributors around the world. This README file will be kept up-to-date from release to release. BUT, we must point out that these contributions are really, REALLY UNSUPPORTED. In fact, we probably don't even know what some of them really do. We certainly do not guarantee to have tried them, or ported them to work with this CVS distribution. If you have questions, your best bet is to contact the original author, but you should not necessarily expect a reply, since the author may not be available at the address given. USE AT YOUR OWN RISK -- and all that stuff. "Unsupported" also means that no one has volunteered to accept and check in changes to this directory. So submissions for new scripts to add here are unlikely to be accepted. Suggested changes to the existing scripts here conceivably might, but that isn't clear either, unless of course they come from the original author of the script. If you have some software that works with CVS that you wish to offer it is suggested that you make it available by FTP or HTTP and then announce it on the info-cvs mailing list. An attempt at a table of Contents for this directory: README This file. clmerge A perl script to handle merge conflicts in GNU style ChangeLog files . Contributed by Tom Tromey . cln_hist A perl script to compress your $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/history file, as it can grow quite large after extended use. Contributed by David G. Grubbs commit_prep A perl script, to be combined with log_accum.pl, to log_accum provide for a way to combine the individual log messages of a multi-directory "commit" into a single log message, and mail the result somewhere. Can also do other checks for $Id and that you are committing the correct revision of the file. Read the comments carefully. Contributed by David Hampton . cvs2vendor A shell script to move changes from a repository that was started without a vendor branch to one that has a vendor branch. Contributed by Greg A. Woods . cvs_acls A perl script that implements Access Control Lists cvs_acls.html by using the "commitinfo" hook provided with the "cvs commit" command. Contributed by David G. Grubbs . Enhanced by Peter Connolly . cvshelp.man An introductory manual page written by Lowell Skoog . It is most likely out-of-date relative to CVS 1.3, but still may be useful. debug_check_log A shell script to help analyze sanity check failures. Contributed by Derek R. Price . descend A shell script that can be used to recursively descend.man descend through a directory. In CVS 1.2, this was very useful, since many of the commands were not recursive. In CVS 1.3 (and later), however, most of the commands are recursive. However, this may still come in handy. Contributed by Lowell Skoog dirfns A shar file which contains some code that might help your system support opendir/readdir/closedir, if it does not already. Copied from the C-News distribution. intro.doc A user's view of what you need to know to get started with CVS. Contributed by . log A perl script suitable for including in your $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/loginfo file for logging commit changes. Includes the RCS revision of the change as part of the log. Contributed by Kevin Samborn . log_accum See commit_prep. mfpipe Another perl script for logging. Allows you to pipe the log message to a file and/or send mail to some alias. Contributed by John Clyne . pvcs2rcs A perl script to convert a PVCS tree to an RCS tree. rcs-5.7-commitid.patch Patch to RCS 5.7 sources of 1995-06-16 to support the newphrase 'commitid' used by CVS and CVSNT. rcs-5.7-sameuserlocks.patch Patch to RCS 5.7 sources from 2003-10-24 submitted to both help-rcs@gnu.org and Redhat. Included in many Redhat GNU/Linux distribution RPM files. A new -S switch to the co command will disallow the user to check out the same file twice. rcs-5.7-security.patch Patch to RCS 5.7 sources from 2001-01-05 included in many GNU/Linux distributions as applied by Preston Brown tmpfile security patch from Olaf Kirch . rcs-to-cvs Script to import sources that may have been under RCS control already. Contributed by Per Cederqvist . rcs2log A shell script to create a ChangeLog-format file given only a set of RCS files. Contributed by Paul Eggert . rcs2sccs A shell script to convert simple RCS files into SCCS files, originally gleaned off the network somewhere (originally by "kenc") and modified by Jerry Jelinek and Brian Berliner to increase robustness and add support for one-level of branches. rcslock A perl script that can be added to your commitinfo file that tries to determine if your RCS file is currently locked by someone else, as might be the case for a binary file. Contributed by John Rouillard . sandbox_status sandbox_status.man Identifies files added, changed, or removed in a checked out CVS tree; also notices unknown files. Contributed by Lowell Skoog sccs2rcs A C-shell script that can convert (some) SCCS files into RCS files, retaining the info contained in the SCCS file (like dates, author, and log message). Contributed by Ken Cox . verify_repo A perl script to check an entire repository for corruption. Contributed by Donald Sharp . cvs-1.12.13/contrib/Makefile.am0000644000076400007640000000601310316533006013074 00000000000000## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in # Makefile for GNU CVS contributed sources. # Do not use this makefile directly, but only from `../Makefile'. # # Copyright (C) 1986-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # Portions Copyright (C) 1998-2005 Derek Price, Ximbiot , # and others. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. SUBDIRS = pam contribdir = $(pkgdatadir)/contrib contrib_SCRIPTS = \ clmerge \ cln_hist \ commit_prep \ cvs2vendor \ cvs_acls \ debug_check_log \ log \ log_accum \ mfpipe \ newcvsroot \ pvcs2rcs \ rcs-to-cvs \ rcs2log \ rcslock \ sandbox_status \ sccs2rcs \ validate_repo contrib_DATA = \ README \ intro.doc \ rcs-5.7-commitid.patch contrib_MANS = \ rcs2log.1 \ sandbox_status.man bin_LINKS = \ rcs2log EXTRA_DIST = \ .cvsignore \ $(contrib_DATA) \ $(contrib_MANS) \ cvs2vendor.sh \ sandbox_status.sh \ cvshelp.man \ cvs_acls.html \ debug_check_log.sh \ descend.sh \ descend.man \ dirfns.shar \ newcvsroot.sh \ rcs-5.7-commitid.patch \ rcs-to-cvs.sh \ rcs2log.sh \ rcs2sccs.sh CLEANFILES = $(bin_LINKS) $(contrib_SCRIPTS) # we'd rather have a link here rather than two copies of a script install-data-local: : FIXME - this path should be determined dynamically from bindir : and contribdir @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(bindir) @list='$(bin_LINKS)'; for p in $$list; do \ echo "test ! -f $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`"; \ echo " && cd $(DESTDIR)$(bindir) && $(LN_S) ../share/$(PACKAGE)/contrib/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'` ."; \ (test ! -f $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'` \ && cd $(DESTDIR)$(bindir) && $(LN_S) ../share/$(PACKAGE)/contrib/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'` .) \ || (echo "Link creation failed" && if test -f $$p; then \ echo " $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`"; \ $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`; \ else if test -f $(srcdir)/$$p; then \ echo " $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $(srcdir)/$$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`"; \ $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $(srcdir)/$$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`; \ else :; fi; fi); \ done uninstall-local: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) list='$(bin_LINKS)'; for p in $$list; do \ rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`; \ done SUFFIXES = .sh .sh: rm -f $@ cp $< $@ chmod +x $@ # for backwards compatibility with the old makefiles realclean: maintainer-clean .PHONY: realclean cvs-1.12.13/contrib/Makefile.in0000664000076400007640000006167610320231773013130 00000000000000# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.9.6 from Makefile.am. # @configure_input@ # Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, # 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without # even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A # PARTICULAR PURPOSE. @SET_MAKE@ # Makefile for GNU CVS contributed sources. # Do not use this makefile directly, but only from `../Makefile'. # # Copyright (C) 1986-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # Portions Copyright (C) 1998-2005 Derek Price, Ximbiot , # and others. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ top_builddir = .. am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd INSTALL = @INSTALL@ install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) transform = $(program_transform_name) NORMAL_INSTALL = : PRE_INSTALL = : POST_INSTALL = : NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : PRE_UNINSTALL = : POST_UNINSTALL = : build_triplet = @build@ host_triplet = @host@ subdir = contrib DIST_COMMON = README $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/Makefile.in \ $(srcdir)/clmerge.in $(srcdir)/cln_hist.in \ $(srcdir)/commit_prep.in $(srcdir)/cvs_acls.in \ $(srcdir)/log.in $(srcdir)/log_accum.in $(srcdir)/mfpipe.in \ $(srcdir)/pvcs2rcs.in $(srcdir)/rcs2log.sh \ $(srcdir)/rcslock.in $(srcdir)/sccs2rcs.in \ $(srcdir)/validate_repo.in ChangeLog ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/acx_extract_cpp_defn.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/acx_with_external_zlib.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/acx_with_gssapi.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/alloca.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/allocsa.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/asx_version_compare.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/atexit.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/bison.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/canon-host.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/canonicalize.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/chdir-long.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/clock_time.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/closeout.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/codeset.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/cvs_func_printf_ptr.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/d-ino.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/d-type.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/dirname.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/dos.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/dup2.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/eealloc.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/eoverflow.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/error.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/exitfail.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/extensions.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/filenamecat.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/fnmatch.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/fpending.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ftruncate.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/getaddrinfo.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/getcwd-path-max.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/getcwd.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/getdate.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/getdelim.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/gethostname.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/getline.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/getlogin_r.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/getndelim2.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/getnline.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/getopt.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/getpagesize.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/getpass.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettext.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettime.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/gettimeofday.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/glob.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/gnulib-comp.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/intmax_t.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/inttypes.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/inttypes_h.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-ld.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-link.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lib-prefix.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/longdouble.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/longlong.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/lstat.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/mbchar.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/mbiter.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/mbrtowc.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/mbstate_t.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/md5.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/memchr.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/memmove.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/mempcpy.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/memrchr.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/minmax.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/mkdir-slash.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/mkstemp.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/mktime.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/mmap-anon.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/nanosleep.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/nls.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/onceonly_2_57.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/openat.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/pagealign_alloc.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/pathmax.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/po.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/progtest.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/quotearg.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/readlink.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/regex.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/rename.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/restrict.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/rpmatch.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/save-cwd.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/setenv.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/signed.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/size_max.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/sockpfaf.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/ssize_t.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/stat-macros.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/stdbool.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/stdint.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/stdint_h.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/strcase.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/strdup.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/strerror.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/strftime.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/strstr.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/strtol.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/strtoul.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/sunos57-select.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/time_r.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/timespec.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/tm_gmtoff.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/tzset.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/uint32_t.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/uintmax_t.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ulonglong.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/unistd-safer.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/unlocked-io.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/vasnprintf.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/vasprintf.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/wchar_t.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/wint_t.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/xalloc.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/xgetcwd.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/xreadlink.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/m4/xsize.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/yesno.m4 \ $(top_srcdir)/configure.in am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ $(ACLOCAL_M4) mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = validate_repo clmerge cln_hist commit_prep \ cvs_acls log log_accum mfpipe pvcs2rcs rcs2log rcslock \ sccs2rcs am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)" contribSCRIPT_INSTALL = $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) SCRIPTS = $(contrib_SCRIPTS) SOURCES = DIST_SOURCES = RECURSIVE_TARGETS = all-recursive check-recursive dvi-recursive \ html-recursive info-recursive install-data-recursive \ install-exec-recursive install-info-recursive \ install-recursive installcheck-recursive installdirs-recursive \ pdf-recursive ps-recursive uninstall-info-recursive \ uninstall-recursive am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ *) f=$$p;; \ esac; am__strip_dir = `echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; contribDATA_INSTALL = $(INSTALL_DATA) DATA = $(contrib_DATA) ETAGS = etags CTAGS = ctags DIST_SUBDIRS = $(SUBDIRS) DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ ALLOCA = @ALLOCA@ ALLOCA_H = @ALLOCA_H@ AMDEP_FALSE = @AMDEP_FALSE@ AMDEP_TRUE = @AMDEP_TRUE@ AMTAR = @AMTAR@ AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ AWK = @AWK@ CC = @CC@ CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ CPP = @CPP@ CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ CSH = @CSH@ CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ DEFS = @DEFS@ DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ EDITOR = @EDITOR@ EGREP = @EGREP@ EOVERFLOW = @EOVERFLOW@ EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ FNMATCH_H = @FNMATCH_H@ GETOPT_H = @GETOPT_H@ GLOB_H = @GLOB_H@ GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ HAVE_LONG_64BIT = @HAVE_LONG_64BIT@ HAVE_LONG_LONG_64BIT = @HAVE_LONG_LONG_64BIT@ HAVE__BOOL = @HAVE__BOOL@ INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ INTLLIBS = @INTLLIBS@ INTL_MACOSX_LIBS = @INTL_MACOSX_LIBS@ KRB4 = @KRB4@ LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@ LIBINTL = @LIBINTL@ LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ LIBS = @LIBS@ LIB_CLOCK_GETTIME = @LIB_CLOCK_GETTIME@ LIB_NANOSLEEP = @LIB_NANOSLEEP@ LN_S = @LN_S@ LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@ LTLIBINTL = @LTLIBINTL@ LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ MAINT = @MAINT@ MAINTAINER_MODE_FALSE = @MAINTAINER_MODE_FALSE@ MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE = @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ MAKE_TARGETS_IN_VPATH_FALSE = @MAKE_TARGETS_IN_VPATH_FALSE@ MAKE_TARGETS_IN_VPATH_TRUE = @MAKE_TARGETS_IN_VPATH_TRUE@ MKINSTALLDIRS = @MKINSTALLDIRS@ MKTEMP = @MKTEMP@ MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ MSGMERGE = @MSGMERGE@ OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ PERL = @PERL@ POSUB = @POSUB@ PR = @PR@ PS2PDF = @PS2PDF@ RANLIB = @RANLIB@ ROFF = @ROFF@ RSH_DFLT = @RSH_DFLT@ SENDMAIL = @SENDMAIL@ SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ SHELL = @SHELL@ STDBOOL_H = @STDBOOL_H@ STDINT_H = @STDINT_H@ STRIP = @STRIP@ TEXI2DVI = @TEXI2DVI@ USE_NLS = @USE_NLS@ VERSION = @VERSION@ XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ YACC = @YACC@ YFLAGS = @YFLAGS@ ZLIB_CPPFLAGS = @ZLIB_CPPFLAGS@ ZLIB_LIBS = @ZLIB_LIBS@ ZLIB_SUBDIRS = @ZLIB_SUBDIRS@ ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ ac_ct_RANLIB = @ac_ct_RANLIB@ ac_ct_STRIP = @ac_ct_STRIP@ ac_prefix_program = @ac_prefix_program@ am__fastdepCC_FALSE = @am__fastdepCC_FALSE@ am__fastdepCC_TRUE = @am__fastdepCC_TRUE@ am__include = @am__include@ am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ am__quote = @am__quote@ am__tar = @am__tar@ am__untar = @am__untar@ bindir = @bindir@ build = @build@ build_alias = @build_alias@ build_cpu = @build_cpu@ build_os = @build_os@ build_vendor = @build_vendor@ cvs_client_objects = @cvs_client_objects@ datadir = @datadir@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ host = @host@ host_alias = @host_alias@ host_cpu = @host_cpu@ host_os = @host_os@ host_vendor = @host_vendor@ includedir = @includedir@ infodir = @infodir@ install_sh = @install_sh@ libdir = @libdir@ libexecdir = @libexecdir@ localstatedir = @localstatedir@ mandir = @mandir@ mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ prefix = @prefix@ program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ sbindir = @sbindir@ sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ target_alias = @target_alias@ with_default_rsh = @with_default_rsh@ SUBDIRS = pam contribdir = $(pkgdatadir)/contrib contrib_SCRIPTS = \ clmerge \ cln_hist \ commit_prep \ cvs2vendor \ cvs_acls \ debug_check_log \ log \ log_accum \ mfpipe \ newcvsroot \ pvcs2rcs \ rcs-to-cvs \ rcs2log \ rcslock \ sandbox_status \ sccs2rcs \ validate_repo contrib_DATA = \ README \ intro.doc \ rcs-5.7-commitid.patch contrib_MANS = \ rcs2log.1 \ sandbox_status.man bin_LINKS = \ rcs2log EXTRA_DIST = \ .cvsignore \ $(contrib_DATA) \ $(contrib_MANS) \ cvs2vendor.sh \ sandbox_status.sh \ cvshelp.man \ cvs_acls.html \ debug_check_log.sh \ descend.sh \ descend.man \ dirfns.shar \ newcvsroot.sh \ rcs-5.7-commitid.patch \ rcs-to-cvs.sh \ rcs2log.sh \ rcs2sccs.sh CLEANFILES = $(bin_LINKS) $(contrib_SCRIPTS) SUFFIXES = .sh all: all-recursive .SUFFIXES: .SUFFIXES: .sh $(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__configure_deps) @for dep in $?; do \ case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ *$$dep*) \ cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh \ && exit 0; \ exit 1;; \ esac; \ done; \ echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu contrib/Makefile'; \ cd $(top_srcdir) && \ $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu contrib/Makefile .PRECIOUS: Makefile Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status @case '$?' in \ *config.status*) \ cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ *) \ echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe)'; \ cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe);; \ esac; $(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh $(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps) cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh $(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh validate_repo: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/validate_repo.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ clmerge: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/clmerge.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ cln_hist: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/cln_hist.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ commit_prep: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/commit_prep.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ cvs_acls: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/cvs_acls.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ log: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/log.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ log_accum: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/log_accum.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ mfpipe: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/mfpipe.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ pvcs2rcs: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/pvcs2rcs.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ rcs2log: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/rcs2log.sh cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ rcslock: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/rcslock.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ sccs2rcs: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/sccs2rcs.in cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ install-contribSCRIPTS: $(contrib_SCRIPTS) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(contribdir)" || $(mkdir_p) "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)" @list='$(contrib_SCRIPTS)'; for p in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ if test -f $$d$$p; then \ f=`echo "$$p" | sed 's|^.*/||;$(transform)'`; \ echo " $(contribSCRIPT_INSTALL) '$$d$$p' '$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)/$$f'"; \ $(contribSCRIPT_INSTALL) "$$d$$p" "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)/$$f"; \ else :; fi; \ done uninstall-contribSCRIPTS: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(contrib_SCRIPTS)'; for p in $$list; do \ f=`echo "$$p" | sed 's|^.*/||;$(transform)'`; \ echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)/$$f'"; \ rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)/$$f"; \ done uninstall-info-am: install-contribDATA: $(contrib_DATA) @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) test -z "$(contribdir)" || $(mkdir_p) "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)" @list='$(contrib_DATA)'; for p in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ f=$(am__strip_dir) \ echo " $(contribDATA_INSTALL) '$$d$$p' '$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)/$$f'"; \ $(contribDATA_INSTALL) "$$d$$p" "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)/$$f"; \ done uninstall-contribDATA: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) @list='$(contrib_DATA)'; for p in $$list; do \ f=$(am__strip_dir) \ echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)/$$f'"; \ rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)/$$f"; \ done # This directory's subdirectories are mostly independent; you can cd # into them and run `make' without going through this Makefile. # To change the values of `make' variables: instead of editing Makefiles, # (1) if the variable is set in `config.status', edit `config.status' # (which will cause the Makefiles to be regenerated when you run `make'); # (2) otherwise, pass the desired values on the `make' command line. $(RECURSIVE_TARGETS): @failcom='exit 1'; \ for f in x $$MAKEFLAGS; do \ case $$f in \ *=* | --[!k]*);; \ *k*) failcom='fail=yes';; \ esac; \ done; \ dot_seen=no; \ target=`echo $@ | sed s/-recursive//`; \ list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ echo "Making $$target in $$subdir"; \ if test "$$subdir" = "."; then \ dot_seen=yes; \ local_target="$$target-am"; \ else \ local_target="$$target"; \ fi; \ (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) $$local_target) \ || eval $$failcom; \ done; \ if test "$$dot_seen" = "no"; then \ $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) "$$target-am" || exit 1; \ fi; test -z "$$fail" mostlyclean-recursive clean-recursive distclean-recursive \ maintainer-clean-recursive: @failcom='exit 1'; \ for f in x $$MAKEFLAGS; do \ case $$f in \ *=* | --[!k]*);; \ *k*) failcom='fail=yes';; \ esac; \ done; \ dot_seen=no; \ case "$@" in \ distclean-* | maintainer-clean-*) list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)' ;; \ *) list='$(SUBDIRS)' ;; \ esac; \ rev=''; for subdir in $$list; do \ if test "$$subdir" = "."; then :; else \ rev="$$subdir $$rev"; \ fi; \ done; \ rev="$$rev ."; \ target=`echo $@ | sed s/-recursive//`; \ for subdir in $$rev; do \ echo "Making $$target in $$subdir"; \ if test "$$subdir" = "."; then \ local_target="$$target-am"; \ else \ local_target="$$target"; \ fi; \ (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) $$local_target) \ || eval $$failcom; \ done && test -z "$$fail" tags-recursive: list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ test "$$subdir" = . || (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) tags); \ done ctags-recursive: list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ test "$$subdir" = . || (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) ctags); \ done ID: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(LISP) $(TAGS_FILES) list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(LISP) $(TAGS_FILES)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ done | \ $(AWK) ' { files[$$0] = 1; } \ END { for (i in files) print i; }'`; \ mkid -fID $$unique tags: TAGS TAGS: tags-recursive $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) \ $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) tags=; \ here=`pwd`; \ if ($(ETAGS) --etags-include --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \ include_option=--etags-include; \ empty_fix=.; \ else \ include_option=--include; \ empty_fix=; \ fi; \ list='$(SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ test ! -f $$subdir/TAGS || \ tags="$$tags $$include_option=$$here/$$subdir/TAGS"; \ fi; \ done; \ list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(LISP) $(TAGS_FILES)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ done | \ $(AWK) ' { files[$$0] = 1; } \ END { for (i in files) print i; }'`; \ if test -z "$(ETAGS_ARGS)$$tags$$unique"; then :; else \ test -n "$$unique" || unique=$$empty_fix; \ $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(AM_ETAGSFLAGS) $(ETAGS_ARGS) \ $$tags $$unique; \ fi ctags: CTAGS CTAGS: ctags-recursive $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_DEPENDENCIES) \ $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) tags=; \ here=`pwd`; \ list='$(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(LISP) $(TAGS_FILES)'; \ unique=`for i in $$list; do \ if test -f "$$i"; then echo $$i; else echo $(srcdir)/$$i; fi; \ done | \ $(AWK) ' { files[$$0] = 1; } \ END { for (i in files) print i; }'`; \ test -z "$(CTAGS_ARGS)$$tags$$unique" \ || $(CTAGS) $(CTAGSFLAGS) $(AM_CTAGSFLAGS) $(CTAGS_ARGS) \ $$tags $$unique GTAGS: here=`$(am__cd) $(top_builddir) && pwd` \ && cd $(top_srcdir) \ && gtags -i $(GTAGS_ARGS) $$here distclean-tags: -rm -f TAGS ID GTAGS GRTAGS GSYMS GPATH tags distdir: $(DISTFILES) @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \ topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \ list='$(DISTFILES)'; for file in $$list; do \ case $$file in \ $(srcdir)/*) file=`echo "$$file" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ $(top_srcdir)/*) file=`echo "$$file" | sed "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|"`;; \ esac; \ if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ dir=`echo "$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ if test "$$dir" != "$$file" && test "$$dir" != "."; then \ dir="/$$dir"; \ $(mkdir_p) "$(distdir)$$dir"; \ else \ dir=''; \ fi; \ if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ cp -pR $(srcdir)/$$file $(distdir)$$dir || exit 1; \ fi; \ cp -pR $$d/$$file $(distdir)$$dir || exit 1; \ else \ test -f $(distdir)/$$file \ || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file \ || exit 1; \ fi; \ done list='$(DIST_SUBDIRS)'; for subdir in $$list; do \ if test "$$subdir" = .; then :; else \ test -d "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ || $(mkdir_p) "$(distdir)/$$subdir" \ || exit 1; \ distdir=`$(am__cd) $(distdir) && pwd`; \ top_distdir=`$(am__cd) $(top_distdir) && pwd`; \ (cd $$subdir && \ $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \ top_distdir="$$top_distdir" \ distdir="$$distdir/$$subdir" \ distdir) \ || exit 1; \ fi; \ done check-am: all-am check: check-recursive all-am: Makefile $(SCRIPTS) $(DATA) installdirs: installdirs-recursive installdirs-am: for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(contribdir)"; do \ test -z "$$dir" || $(mkdir_p) "$$dir"; \ done install: install-recursive install-exec: install-exec-recursive install-data: install-data-recursive uninstall: uninstall-recursive install-am: all-am @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am installcheck: installcheck-recursive install-strip: $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ `test -z '$(STRIP)' || \ echo "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'"` install mostlyclean-generic: clean-generic: -test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES) distclean-generic: -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) maintainer-clean-generic: @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." clean: clean-recursive clean-am: clean-generic mostlyclean-am distclean: distclean-recursive -rm -f Makefile distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic distclean-tags dvi: dvi-recursive dvi-am: html: html-recursive info: info-recursive info-am: install-data-am: install-contribDATA install-contribSCRIPTS \ install-data-local install-exec-am: install-info: install-info-recursive install-man: installcheck-am: maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-recursive -rm -f Makefile maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean: mostlyclean-recursive mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic pdf: pdf-recursive pdf-am: ps: ps-recursive ps-am: uninstall-am: uninstall-contribDATA uninstall-contribSCRIPTS \ uninstall-info-am uninstall-local uninstall-info: uninstall-info-recursive .PHONY: $(RECURSIVE_TARGETS) CTAGS GTAGS all all-am check check-am \ clean clean-generic clean-recursive ctags ctags-recursive \ distclean distclean-generic distclean-recursive distclean-tags \ distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am install \ install-am install-contribDATA install-contribSCRIPTS \ install-data install-data-am install-data-local install-exec \ install-exec-am install-info install-info-am install-man \ install-strip installcheck installcheck-am installdirs \ installdirs-am maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic \ maintainer-clean-recursive mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic \ mostlyclean-recursive pdf pdf-am ps ps-am tags tags-recursive \ uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-contribDATA \ uninstall-contribSCRIPTS uninstall-info-am uninstall-local # we'd rather have a link here rather than two copies of a script install-data-local: : FIXME - this path should be determined dynamically from bindir : and contribdir @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) $(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(bindir) @list='$(bin_LINKS)'; for p in $$list; do \ echo "test ! -f $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`"; \ echo " && cd $(DESTDIR)$(bindir) && $(LN_S) ../share/$(PACKAGE)/contrib/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'` ."; \ (test ! -f $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'` \ && cd $(DESTDIR)$(bindir) && $(LN_S) ../share/$(PACKAGE)/contrib/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'` .) \ || (echo "Link creation failed" && if test -f $$p; then \ echo " $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`"; \ $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`; \ else if test -f $(srcdir)/$$p; then \ echo " $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $(srcdir)/$$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`"; \ $(INSTALL_SCRIPT) $(srcdir)/$$p $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`; \ else :; fi; fi); \ done uninstall-local: @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) list='$(bin_LINKS)'; for p in $$list; do \ rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(bindir)/`echo $$p|sed '$(transform)'`; \ done .sh: rm -f $@ cp $< $@ chmod +x $@ # for backwards compatibility with the old makefiles realclean: maintainer-clean .PHONY: realclean # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: cvs-1.12.13/contrib/clmerge.in0000755000076400007640000000744510264747747013050 00000000000000#! @PERL@ # Copyright (C) 1995-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # Merge conflicted ChangeLogs # tromey Mon Aug 15 1994 # Usage is: # # cl-merge [-i] file ... # # With -i, it works in place (backups put in a ~ file). Otherwise the # merged ChangeLog is printed to stdout. # Please report any bugs to me. I wrote this yesterday, so there are no # guarantees about its performance. I recommend checking its output # carefully. If you do send a bug report, please include the failing # ChangeLog, so I can include it in my test suite. # # Tom # --- # tromey@busco.lanl.gov Member, League for Programming Freedom # Sadism and farce are always inexplicably linked. # -- Alexander Theroux # Month->number mapping. Used for sorting. %months = ('Jan', 0, 'Feb', 1, 'Mar', 2, 'Apr', 3, 'May', 4, 'Jun', 5, 'Jul', 6, 'Aug', 7, 'Sep', 8, 'Oct', 9, 'Nov', 10, 'Dec', 11); # If '-i' is given, do it in-place. if ($ARGV[0] eq '-i') { shift (@ARGV); $^I = '~'; } $lastkey = ''; $lastval = ''; $conf = 0; %conflist = (); $tjd = 0; # Simple state machine. The states: # # 0 Not in conflict. Just copy input to output. # 1 Beginning an entry. Next non-blank line is key. # 2 In entry. Entry beginner transitions to state 1. while (<>) { if (/^<<<>>>/) { # End of conflict. Output. # Copy last key into array. if ($lastkey ne '') { $conflist{$lastkey} = $lastval; $lastkey = ''; $lastval = ''; } foreach (reverse sort clcmp keys %conflist) { print STDERR "doing $_" if $tjd; print $_; print $conflist{$_}; } $lastkey = ''; $lastval = ''; $conf = 0; %conflist = (); } elsif ($conf == 1) { # Beginning an entry. Skip empty lines. Error if not a real # beginner. if (/^$/) { # Empty line; just skip at this point. } elsif (/^[MTWFS]/) { # Looks like the name of a day; assume opener and move to # "in entry" state. $lastkey = $_; $conf = 2; print STDERR "found $_" if $tjd; } else { die ("conflict crosses entry boundaries: $_"); } } elsif ($conf == 2) { # In entry. Copy into variable until we see beginner line. if (/^[MTWFS]/) { # Entry beginner line. # Copy last key into array. if ($lastkey ne '') { $conflist{$lastkey} = $lastval; $lastkey = ''; $lastval = ''; } $lastkey = $_; print STDERR "found $_" if $tjd; $lastval = ''; } else { $lastval .= $_; } } else { # Just copy. print; } } # Compare ChangeLog time strings like <=>. # # 0 1 2 3 # Thu Aug 11 13:22:42 1994 Tom Tromey (tromey@creche.colorado.edu) # 0123456789012345678901234567890 # sub clcmp { # First check year. $r = substr ($a, 20, 4) <=> substr ($b, 20, 4); # Now check month. $r = $months{substr ($a, 4, 3)} <=> $months{substr ($b, 4, 3)} if !$r; # Now check day. $r = substr ($a, 8, 2) <=> substr ($b, 8, 2) if !$r; # Now check time (3 parts). $r = substr ($a, 11, 2) <=> substr ($b, 11, 2) if !$r; $r = substr ($a, 14, 2) <=> substr ($b, 14, 2) if !$r; $r = substr ($a, 17, 2) <=> substr ($b, 17, 2) if !$r; $r; } cvs-1.12.13/contrib/cln_hist.in0000755000076400007640000000463210264747747013230 00000000000000#! @PERL@ # -*-Perl-*- # Copyright (C) 1995-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # Contributed by David G. Grubbs # # Clean up the history file. 10 Record types: MAR OFT WUCG # # WUCG records are thrown out. # MAR records are retained. # T records: retain only last tag with same combined tag/module. # # Two passes: Walk through the first time and remember the # 1. Last Tag record with same "tag" and "module" names. # 2. Last O record with unique user/module/directory, unless followed # by a matching F record. # $r = $ENV{"CVSROOT"}; $c = "$r/CVSROOT"; $h = "$c/history"; eval "print STDERR \$die='Unknown parameter $1\n' if !defined \$$1; \$$1=\$';" while ($ARGV[0] =~ /^(\w+)=/ && shift(@ARGV)); exit 255 if $die; # process any variable=value switches %tags = (); %outs = (); # # Move history file to safe place and re-initialize a new one. # rename($h, "$h.bak"); open(XX, ">$h"); close(XX); # # Pass1 -- remember last tag and checkout. # open(HIST, "$h.bak"); while () { next if /^[MARWUCG]/; # Save whole line keyed by tag|module if (/^T/) { @tmp = split(/\|/, $_); $tags{$tmp[4] . '|' . $tmp[5]} = $_; } # Save whole line if (/^[OF]/) { @tmp = split(/\|/, $_); $outs{$tmp[1] . '|' . $tmp[2] . '|' . $tmp[5]} = $_; } } # # Pass2 -- print out what we want to save. # open(SAVE, ">$h.work"); open(HIST, "$h.bak"); while () { next if /^[FWUCG]/; # If whole line matches saved (i.e. "last") one, print it. if (/^T/) { @tmp = split(/\|/, $_); next if $tags{$tmp[4] . '|' . $tmp[5]} ne $_; } # Save whole line if (/^O/) { @tmp = split(/\|/, $_); next if $outs{$tmp[1] . '|' . $tmp[2] . '|' . $tmp[5]} ne $_; } print SAVE $_; } # # Put back the saved stuff # system "cat $h >> $h.work"; if (-s $h) { rename ($h, "$h.interim"); print "history.interim has non-zero size.\n"; } else { unlink($h); } rename ("$h.work", $h); exit(0); cvs-1.12.13/contrib/commit_prep.in0000755000076400007640000000615710305571537013733 00000000000000#! @PERL@ -T # -*-Perl-*- # Copyright (C) 1994-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # # THIS SCRIPT IS PROBABLY BROKEN. REMOVING THE -T SWITCH ON THE #! LINE ABOVE # WOULD FIX IT, BUT THIS IS INSECURE. WE RECOMMEND FIXING THE ERRORS WHICH THE # -T SWITCH WILL CAUSE PERL TO REPORT BEFORE RUNNING THIS SCRIPT FROM A CVS # SERVER TRIGGER. PLEASE SEND PATCHES CONTAINING THE CHANGES YOU FIND # NECESSARY TO RUN THIS SCRIPT WITH THE TAINT-CHECKING ENABLED BACK TO THE # <@PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@> MAILING LIST. # # For more on general Perl security and taint-checking, please try running the # `perldoc perlsec' command. # ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # Perl filter to handle pre-commit checking of files. This program # records the last directory where commits will be taking place for # use by the log_accum.pl script. # # IMPORTANT: this script interacts with log_accum, they have to agree # on the tmpfile name to use. See $LAST_FILE below. # # Contributed by David Hampton # Stripped to minimum by Roy Fielding # ############################################################ $TMPDIR = $ENV{'TMPDIR'} || '/tmp'; $FILE_PREFIX = '#cvs.'; # If see a "-u $USER" argument, then destructively remove it from the # argument list, so $ARGV[0] will be the repository dir again, as it # used to be before we added the -u flag. if ($ARGV[0] eq '-u') { shift @ARGV; $CVS_USERNAME = shift (@ARGV); } # This needs to match the corresponding var in log_accum.pl, including # the appending of the pgrp and username suffixes (see uses of this # var farther down). $LAST_FILE = "$TMPDIR/${FILE_PREFIX}lastdir"; sub write_line { my ($filename, $line) = @_; # A check of some kind is needed here, but the rules aren't apparent # at the moment: # foreach($filename, $line){ # $_ =~ m#^([-\@\w.\#]+)$#; # $_ = $1; # } open(FILE, ">$filename") || die("Cannot open $filename: $!\n"); print(FILE $line, "\n"); close(FILE); } # # Record this directory as the last one checked. This will be used # by the log_accumulate script to determine when it is processing # the final directory of a multi-directory commit. # $id = getpgrp(); &write_line("$LAST_FILE.$id.$CVS_USERNAME", $ARGV[0]); exit(0); cvs-1.12.13/contrib/cvs_acls.in0000755000076400007640000011222210305603311013163 00000000000000#! @PERL@ -T # -*-Perl-*- # Copyright (C) 1994-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # # THIS SCRIPT IS PROBABLY BROKEN. REMOVING THE -T SWITCH ON THE #! LINE ABOVE # WOULD FIX IT, BUT THIS IS INSECURE. WE RECOMMEND FIXING THE ERRORS WHICH THE # -T SWITCH WILL CAUSE PERL TO REPORT BEFORE RUNNING THIS SCRIPT FROM A CVS # SERVER TRIGGER. PLEASE SEND PATCHES CONTAINING THE CHANGES YOU FIND # NECESSARY TO RUN THIS SCRIPT WITH THE TAINT-CHECKING ENABLED BACK TO THE # <@PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@> MAILING LIST. # # For more on general Perl security and taint-checking, please try running the # `perldoc perlsec' command. # ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### =head1 Name cvs_acls - Access Control List for CVS =head1 Synopsis In 'commitinfo': repository/path/to/restrict $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/cvs_acls [-d][-u $USER][-f ] where: -d turns on debug information -u passes the client-side userId to the cvs_acls script -f specifies an alternate filename for the restrict_log file In 'cvsacl': {allow.*,deny.*} [|user,user,... [|repos,repos,... [|branch,branch,...]]] where: allow|deny - allow: commits are allowed; deny: prohibited user - userId to be allowed or restricted repos - file or directory to be allowed or restricted branch - branch to be allowed or restricted See below for examples. =head1 Licensing cvs_acls - provides access control list functionality for CVS Copyright (c) 2004 by Peter Connolly All rights reserved. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA =head1 Description This script--cvs_acls--is invoked once for each directory within a "cvs commit". The set of files being committed for that directory as well as the directory itself, are passed to this script. This script checks its 'cvsacl' file to see if any of the files being committed are on the 'cvsacl' file's restricted list. If any of the files are restricted, then the cvs_acls script passes back an exit code of 1 which disallows the commits for that directory. Messages are returned to the committer indicating the file(s) that he/she are not allowed to committ. Additionally, a site-specific set of messages (e.g., contact information) can be included in these messages. When a commit is prohibited, log messages are written to a restrict_log file in $CVSROOT/CVSROOT. This default file can be redirected to another destination. The script is triggered from the 'commitinfo' file in $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/. =head1 Enhancements This section lists the bug fixes and enhancements added to cvs_acls that make up the current cvs_acls. =head2 Fixed Bugs This version attempts to get rid the following bugs from the original version of cvs_acls: =over 2 =item * Multiple entries on an 'cvsacl' line will be matched individually, instead of requiring that all commit files *exactly* match all 'cvsacl' entries. Commiting a file not in the 'cvsacl' list would allow *all* files (including a restricted file) to be committed. [IMO, this basically made the original script unuseable for our situation since any arbitrary combination of committed files could avoid matching the 'cvsacl's entries.] =item * Handle specific filename restrictions. cvs_acls didn't restrict individual files specified in 'cvsacl'. =item * Correctly handle multiple, specific filename restrictions =item * Prohibit mix of dirs and files on a single 'cvsacl' line [To simplify the logic and because this would be normal usage.] =item * Correctly handle a mixture of branch restrictions within one work directory =item * $CVSROOT existence is checked too late =item * Correctly handle the CVSROOT=:local:/... option (useful for interactive testing) =item * Replacing shoddy "$universal_off" logic (Thanks to Karl-Konig Konigsson for pointing this out.) =back =head2 Enhancements =over 2 =item * Checks modules in the 'cvsacl' file for valid files and directories =item * Accurately report restricted entries and their matching patterns =item * Simplified and commented overly complex PERL REGEXPs for readability and maintainability =item * Skip the rest of processing if a mismatch on portion of the 'cvsacl' line =item * Get rid of opaque "karma" messages in favor of user-friendly messages that describe which user, file(s) and branch(es) were disallowed. =item * Add optional 'restrict_msg' file for additional, site-specific restriction messages. =item * Take a "-u" parameter for $USER from commit_prep so that the script can do restrictions based on the client-side userId rather than the server-side userId (usually 'cvs'). (See discussion below on "Admin Setup" for more on this point.) =item * Added a lot more debug trace =item * Tested these restrictions with concurrent use of pserver and SSH access to model our transition from pserver to ext access. =item * Added logging of restricted commit attempts. Restricted commits can be sent to a default file: $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/restrictlog or to one passed to the script via the -f command parameter. =back =head2 ToDoS =over 2 =item * Need to deal with pserver/SSH transition with conflicting umasks? =item * Use a CPAN module to handle command parameters. =item * Use a CPAN module to clone data structures. =back =head1 Version Information This is not offered as a fix to the original 'cvs_acls' script since it differs substantially in goals and methods from the original and there are probably a significant number of people out there that still require the original version's functionality. The 'cvsacl' file flags of 'allow' and 'deny' were intentionally changed to 'allow' and 'deny' because there are enough differences between the original script's behavior and this one's that we wanted to make sure that users will rethink their 'cvsacl' file formats before plugging in this newer script. Please note that there has been very limited cross-platform testing of this script!!! (We did not have the time or resources to do exhaustive cross-platform testing.) It was developed and tested under Red Hat Linux 9.0 using PERL 5.8.0. Additionally, it was built and tested under Red Hat Linux 7.3 using PERL 5.6.1. $Id: cvs_acls.in,v 1.11 2005/09/01 13:48:57 dprice Exp $ This version is based on the 1.11.13 version of cvs_acls peter.connolly@cnet.com (Peter Connolly) Access control lists for CVS. dgg@ksr.com (David G. Grubbs) Branch specific controls added by voisine@bytemobile.com (Aaron Voisine) =head1 Installation To use this program, do the following four things: 0. Install PERL, version 5.6.1 or 5.8.0. 1. Admin Setup: There are two choices here. a) The first option is to use the $ENV{"USER"}, server-side userId (from the third column of your pserver 'passwd' file) as the basis for your restrictions. In this case, you will (at a minimum) want to set up a new "cvsadmin" userId and group on the pserver machine. CVS administrators will then set up their 'passwd' file entries to run either as "cvs" (for regular users) or as "cvsadmin" (for power users). Correspondingly, your 'cvsacl' file will only list 'cvs' and 'cvsadmin' as the userIds in the second column. Commentary: A potential weakness of this is that the xinetd cvspserver process will need to run as 'root' in order to switch between the 'cvs' and the 'cvsadmin' userIds. Some sysadmins don't like situations like this and may want to chroot the process. Talk to them about this point... b) The second option is to use the client-side userId as the basis for your restrictions. In this case, all the xinetd cvspserver processes can run as userId 'cvs' and no 'root' userId is required. If you have a 'passwd' file that lists 'cvs' as the effective run-time userId for all your users, then no changes to this file are needed. Your 'cvsacl' file will use the individual, client-side userIds in its 2nd column. As long as the userIds in pserver's 'passwd' file match those userIds that your Linux server know about, this approach is ideal if you are planning to move from pserver to SSH access at some later point in time. Just by switching the CVSROOT var from CVSROOT=:pserver:... to CVSROOT=:ext:..., users can switch over to SSH access without any other administrative changes. When all users have switched over to SSH, the inherently insecure xinetd cvspserver process can be disabled. [http://ximbiot.com/cvs/manual/cvs-1.11.17/cvs_2.html#SEC32] :TODO: The only potential glitch with the SSH approach is the possibility that each user can have differing umasks that might interfere with one another, especially during a transition from pserver to SSH. As noted in the ToDo section, this needs a good strategy and set of tests for that yet... 2. Put two lines, as the *only* non-comment lines, in your commitinfo file: ALL $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/commit_prep ALL $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/cvs_acls [-d][-u $USER ][-f ] where "-d" turns on debug trace "-u $USER" passes the client-side userId to cvs_acls "-f overrides the default filename used to log restricted commit attempts. (These are handled in the processArgs() subroutine.) If you are using client-side userIds to restrict access to your repository, make sure that they are in this order since the commit_prep script is required in order to pass the $USER parameter. A final note about the repository matching pattern. The example above uses "ALL" but note that this means that the cvs_acls script will run for each and every commit in your repository. Obviously, in a large repository this adds up to a lot of overhead that may not be necesary. A better strategy is to use a repository pattern that is more specific to the areas that you wish to secure. 3. Install this file as $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/cvs_acls and make it executable. 4. Create a file named CVSROOT/cvsacl and optionally add it to CVSROOT/checkoutlist and check it in. See the CVS manual's administrative files section about checkoutlist. Typically: $ cvs checkout CVSROOT $ cd CVSROOT [ create the cvsacl file, include 'commitinfo' line ] [ add cvsacl to checkoutlist ] $ cvs add cvsacl $ cvs commit -m 'Added cvsacl for use with cvs_acls.' cvsacl checkoutlist Note: The format of the 'cvsacl' file is described in detail immediately below but here is an important set up point: Make sure to include a line like the following: deny||CVSROOT/commitinfo CVSROOT/cvsacl allow|cvsadmin|CVSROOT/commitinfo CVSROOT/cvsacl that restricts access to commitinfo and cvsacl since this would be one of the easiest "end runs" around this ACL approach. ('commitinfo' has the line that executes the cvs_acls script and, of course, all the restrictions are in 'cvsacl'.) 5. (Optional) Create a 'restrict_msg' file in the $CVSROOT/CVSROOT directory. Whenever there is a restricted file or dir message, cvs_acls will look for this file and, if it exists, print its contents as part of the commit-denial message. This gives you a chance to print any site-specific information (e.g., who to call, what procedures to look up,...) whenever a commit is denied. =head1 Format of the cvsacl file The 'cvsacl' file determines whether you may commit files. It contains lines read from top to bottom, keeping track of whether a given user, repository and branch combination is "allowed" or "denied." The script will assume "allowed" on all repository paths until 'allow' and 'deny' rules change that default. The normal pattern is to specify an 'deny' rule to turn off access to ALL users, then follow it with a matching 'allow' rule that will turn on access for a select set of users. In the case of multiple rules for the same user, repository and branch, the last one takes precedence. Blank lines and lines with only comments are ignored. Any other lines not beginning with "allow" or "deny" are logged to the restrict_log file. Lines beginning with "allow" or "deny" are assumed to be '|'-separated triples: (All spaces and tabs are ignored in a line.) {allow.*,deny.*} [|user,user,... [|repos,repos,... [|branch,branch,...]]] 1. String starting with "allow" or "deny". 2. Optional, comma-separated list of usernames. 3. Optional, comma-separated list of repository pathnames. These are pathnames relative to $CVSROOT. They can be directories or filenames. A directory name allows or restricts access to all files and directories below it. One line can have either directories or filenames but not both. 4. Optional, comma-separated list of branch tags. If not specified, all branches are assumed. Use HEAD to reference the main branch. Example: (Note: No in-line comments.) # ----- Make whole repository unavailable. deny # ----- Except for user "dgg". allow|dgg # ----- Except when "fred" or "john" commit to the # module whose repository is "bin/ls" allow|fred, john|bin/ls # ----- Except when "ed" commits to the "stable" # branch of the "bin/ls" repository allow|ed|/bin/ls|stable =head1 Program Logic CVS passes to @ARGV an absolute directory pathname (the repository appended to your $CVSROOT variable), followed by a list of filenames within that directory that are to be committed. The script walks through the 'cvsacl' file looking for matches on the username, repository and branch. A username match is simply the user's name appearing in the second column of the cvsacl line in a space-or-comma separate list. If blank, then any user will match. A repository match: =over 2 =item * Each entry in the modules section of the current 'cvsacl' line is examined to see if it is a dir or a file. The line must have either files or dirs, but not both. (To simplify the logic.) =item * If neither, then assume the 'cvsacl' file was set up in error and skip that 'allow' line. =item * If a dir, then each dir pattern is matched separately against the beginning of each of the committed files in @ARGV. =item * If a file, then each file pattern is matched exactly against each of the files to be committed in @ARGV. =item * Repository and branch must BOTH match together. This is to cover the use case where a user has multiple branches checked out in a single work directory. Commit files can be from different branches. A branch match is either: =over 4 =item * When no branches are listed in the fourth column. ("Match any.") =item * All elements from the fourth column are matched against each of the tag names for $ARGV[1..$#ARGV] found in the %branches file. =back =item * 'allow' match remove that match from the tally map. =item * Restricted ('deny') matches are saved in the %repository_matches table. =item * If there is a match on user, repository and branch: If repository, branch and user match if 'deny' add %repository_matches entries to %restricted_entries else if 'allow' remove %repository_matches entries from %restricted_entries =item * At the end of all the 'cvsacl' line checks, check to see if there are any entries in the %restricted_entries. If so, then deny the commit. =back =head2 Pseudocode read CVS/Entries file and create branch{file}->{branch} hash table + for each 'allow' and 'deny' line in the 'cvsacl' file: | user match? | - Yes: set $user_match = 1; | repository and branch match? | - Yes: add to %repository_matches; | did user, repository match? | - Yes: if 'deny' then | add %repository_matches -> %restricted_entries | if 'allow' then | remove %repository_matches <- %restricted_entries + end for loop any saved restrictions? no: exit, set exit code allowing commits and exit yes: report restrictions, set exit code prohibiting commits and exit =head2 Sanity Check 1) file allow trumps a dir deny deny||java/lib allow||java/lib/README 2) dir allow can undo a file deny deny||java/lib/README allow||java/lib 3) file deny trumps a dir allow allow||java/lib deny||java/lib/README 4) dir deny trumps a file allow allow||java/lib/README deny||java/lib ... so last match always takes precedence =cut $debug = 0; # Set to 1 for debug messages %repository_matches = (); # hash of match file and pattern from 'cvsacl' # repository_matches --> [branch, matching-pattern] # (Used during module/branch matching loop) %restricted_entries = (); # hash table of restricted commit files (from @ARGV) # restricted_entries --> branch # (If user/module/branch all match on an 'deny' # line, then entries added to this map.) %branch; # hash table of key: commit file; value: branch # Built from ".../CVS/Entries" file of directory # currently being examined # ---------------------------------------------------------------- get CVSROOT $cvsroot = $ENV{'CVSROOT'}; die "Must set CVSROOT\n" if !$cvsroot; if ($cvsroot =~ /:([\/\w]*)$/) { # Filter ":pserver:", ":local:"-type prefixes $cvsroot = $1; } # ------------------------------------------------------------- set file paths $entries = "CVS/Entries"; # client-side file??? $cvsaclfile = $cvsroot . "/CVSROOT/cvsacl"; $restrictfile = $cvsroot . "/CVSROOT/restrict_msg"; $restrictlog = $cvsroot . "/CVSROOT/restrict_log"; # --------------------------------------------------------------- process args $user_name = processArgs(\@ARGV); print("$$ \@ARGV after processArgs is: @ARGV.\n") if $debug; print("$$ ========== Begin $PROGRAM_NAME for \"$ARGV[0]\" repository. ========== \n") if $debug; # --------------------------------------------------------------- filter @ARGV eval "print STDERR \$die='Unknown parameter $1\n' if !defined \$$1; \$$1=\$';" while ($ARGV[0] =~ /^(\w+)=/ && shift(@ARGV)); exit 255 if $die; # process any variable=value switches print("$$ \@ARGV after shift processing contains:",join("\, ",@ARGV),".\n") if $debug; # ---------------------------------------------------------------- get cvsroot ($repository = shift) =~ s:^$cvsroot/::; grep($_ = $repository . '/' . $_, @ARGV); print("$$ \$cvsroot is: $cvsroot.\n") if $debug; print "$$ Repos: $repository\n","$$ ==== ",join("\n$$ ==== ",@ARGV),"\n" if $debug; $exit_val = 0; # presume good exit value for commit # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # ---------------------------------- create hash table $branch{file -> branch} # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Here's a typical Entries file: # # /checkoutlist/1.4/Wed Feb 4 23:51:23 2004// # /cvsacl/1.3/Tue Feb 24 23:05:43 2004// # ... # /verifymsg/1.1/Fri Mar 16 19:56:24 2001// # D/backup//// # D/temp//// open(ENTRIES, $entries) || die("Cannot open $entries.\n"); print("$$ File / Branch\n") if $debug; my $i = 0; while() { chop; next if /^\s*$/; # Skip blank lines $i = $i + 1; if (m| / # 1st slash ([\w.-]*) # file name -> $1 / # 2nd slash .* # revision number / # 3rd slash .* # date and time / # 4th slash .* # keyword / # 5th slash T? # 'T' constant (\w*) # branch -> #2 |x) { $branch{$repository . '/' . $1} = ($2) ? $2 : "HEAD"; print "$$ CVS Entry $i: $1/$2\n" if $debug; } } close(ENTRIES); # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # ------------------------------------- evaluate each active line from 'cvsacl' # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- open (CVSACL, $cvsaclfile) || exit(0); # It is ok for cvsacl file not to exist while () { chop; next if /^\s*\#/; # skip comments next if /^\s*$/; # skip blank lines # --------------------------------------------- parse current 'cvsacl' line print("$$ ==========\n$$ Processing \'cvsacl\' line: $_.\n") if $debug; ($cvsacl_flag, $cvsacl_userIds, $cvsacl_modules, $cvsacl_branches) = split(/[\s,]*\|[\s,]*/, $_); # ------------------------------ Validate 'allow' or 'deny' line prefix if ($cvsacl_flag !~ /^allow/ && $cvsacl_flag !~ /^deny/) { print ("Bad cvsacl line: $_\n") if $debug; $log_text = sprintf "Bad cvsacl line: %s", $_; write_restrictlog_record($log_text); next; } # -------------------------------------------------- init loop match flags $user_match = 0; %repository_matches = (); # ------------------------------------------------------------------------ # ---------------------------------------------------------- user matching # ------------------------------------------------------------------------ # $user_name considered "in user list" if actually in list or is NULL $user_match = (!$cvsacl_userIds || grep ($_ eq $user_name, split(/[\s,]+/,$cvsacl_userIds))); print "$$ \$user_name: $user_name \$user_match match flag is: $user_match.\n" if $debug; if (!$user_match) { next; # no match, skip to next 'cvsacl' line } # ------------------------------------------------------------------------ # ---------------------------------------------------- repository matching # ------------------------------------------------------------------------ if (!$cvsacl_modules) { # blank module list = all modules if (!$cvsacl_branches) { # blank branch list = all branches print("$$ Adding all modules to \%repository_matches; null " . "\$cvsacl_modules and \$cvsacl_branches.\n") if $debug; for $commit_object (@ARGV) { $repository_matches{$commit_object} = [$branch{$commit_object}, $cvsacl_modules]; print("$$ \$repository_matches{$commit_object} = " . "[$branch{$commit_object}, $cvsacl_modules].\n") if $debug; } } else { # need to check for repository match @branch_list = split (/[\s,]+/,$cvsacl_branches); print("$$ Branches from \'cvsacl\' record: ", join(", ",@branch_list),".\n") if $debug; for $commit_object (@ARGV) { if (grep($branch{$commit_object}, @branch_list)) { $repository_matches{$commit_object} = [$branch{$commit_object}, $cvsacl_modules]; print("$$ \$repository_matches{$commit_object} = " . "[$branch{$commit_object}, $cvsacl_modules].\n") if $debug; } } } } else { # ----------------------------------- check every argument combination # parse 'cvsacl' modules to array my @module_list = split(/[\s,]+/,$cvsacl_modules); # ------------- Check all modules in list for either file or directory my $fileType = ""; if (($fileType = checkFileness(@module_list)) eq "") { next; # skip bad file types } # ---------- Check each combination of 'cvsacl' modules vs. @ARGV files print("$$ Checking matches for \@module_list: ", join("\, ",@module_list), ".\n") if $debug; # loop thru all command-line commit objects for $commit_object (@ARGV) { # loop thru all modules on 'cvsacl' line for $cvsacl_module (@module_list) { print("$$ Is \'cvsacl\': $cvsacl_modules pattern in: \@ARGV " . "\$commit_object: $commit_object?\n") if $debug; # Do match of beginning of $commit_object checkModuleMatch($fileType, $commit_object, $cvsacl_module); } # end for commit objects } # end for cvsacl modules } # end if print("$$ Matches for: \%repository_matches: ", join("\, ", (keys %repository_matches)), ".\n") if $debug; # ------------------------------------------------------------------------ # ----------------------------------------------------- setting exit value # ------------------------------------------------------------------------ if ($user_match && %repository_matches) { print("$$ An \"$cvsacl_flag\" match on User(s): $cvsacl_userIds; Module(s):" . " $cvsacl_modules; Branch(es): $cvsacl_branches.\n") if $debug; if ($cvsacl_flag eq "deny") { # Add all matches to the hash of restricted modules foreach $commitFile (keys %repository_matches) { print("$$ Adding \%repository_matches entry: $commitFile.\n") if $debug; $restricted_entries{$commitFile} = $repository_matches{$commitFile}[0]; } } else { # Remove all matches from the restricted modules hash foreach $commitFile (keys %repository_matches) { print("$$ Removing \%repository_matches entry: $commitFile.\n") if $debug; delete $restricted_entries{$commitFile}; } } } print "$$ ==== End of processing for \'cvsacl\' line: $_.\n" if $debug; } close(CVSACL); # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # --------------------------------------- determine final 'commit' disposition # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- if (%restricted_entries) { # any restricted entries? $exit_val = 1; # don't commit print("**** Access denied: Insufficient authority for user: '$user_name\' " . "to commit to \'$repository\'.\n**** Contact CVS Administrators if " . "you require update access to these directories or files.\n"); print("**** file(s)/dir(s) restricted were:\n\t", join("\n\t",keys %restricted_entries), "\n"); printOptionalRestrictionMessage(); write_restrictlog(); } elsif (!$exit_val && $debug) { print "**** Access allowed: Sufficient authority for commit.\n"; } print "$$ ==== \$exit_val = $exit_val\n" if $debug; exit($exit_val); # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # -------------------------------------------------------------- end of "main" # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # -------------------------------------------------------- process script args # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- sub processArgs { # This subroutine is passed a reference to @ARGV. # If @ARGV contains a "-u" entry, use that as the effective userId. In this # case, the userId is the client-side userId that has been passed to this # script by the commit_prep script. (This is why the commit_prep script must # be placed *before* the cvs_acls script in the commitinfo admin file.) # Otherwise, pull the userId from the server-side environment. my $userId = ""; my ($argv) = shift; # pick up ref to @ARGV my @argvClone = (); # immutable copy for foreach loop for ($i=0; $i<(scalar @{$argv}); $i++) { $argvClone[$i]=$argv->[$i]; } print("$$ \@_ to processArgs is: @_.\n") if $debug; # Parse command line arguments (file list is seen as one arg) foreach $arg (@argvClone) { print("$$ \$arg for processArgs loop is: $arg.\n") if $debug; # Set $debug flag? if ($arg eq '-d') { shift @ARGV; $debug = 1; print("$$ \$debug flag set on.\n") if $debug; print STDERR "Debug turned on...\n"; } # Passing in a client-side userId? elsif ($arg eq '-u') { shift @ARGV; $userId = shift @ARGV; print("$$ client-side \$userId set to: $userId.\n") if $debug; } # An override for the default restrictlog file? elsif ($arg eq '-f') { shift @ARGV; $restrictlog = shift @ARGV; } else { next; } } # No client-side userId passed? then get from server env if (!$userId) { $userId = $ENV{"USER"} if !($userId = $ENV{"LOGNAME"}); print("$$ server-side \$userId set to: $userId.\n") if $debug; } print("$$ processArgs returning \$userId: $userId.\n") if $debug; return $userId; } # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # --------------------- Check all modules in list for either file or directory # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- sub checkFileness { # Module patterns on the 'cvsacl' record can be files or directories. # If it's a directory, we pattern-match the directory name from 'cvsacl' # against the left side of the committed filename to see if the file is in # that hierarchy. By contrast, files use an explicit match. If the entries # are neither files nor directories, then the cvsacl file has been set up # incorrectly; we return a "" and the caller skips that line as invalid. # # This function determines whether the entries on the 'cvsacl' record are all # directories or all files; it cannot be a mixture. This restriction put in # to simplify the logic (without taking away much functionality). my @module_list = @_; print("$$ Checking \"fileness\" or \"dir-ness\" for \@module_list entries.\n") if $debug; print("$$ Entries are: ", join("\, ",@module_list), ".\n") if $debug; my $filetype = ""; for $cvsacl_module (@module_list) { my $reposDirName = $cvsroot . '/' . $cvsacl_module; my $reposFileName = $reposDirName . "\,v"; print("$$ In checkFileness: \$reposDirName: $reposDirName; \$reposFileName: $reposFileName.\n") if $debug; if (((-d $reposDirName) && ($filetype eq "file")) || ((-f $reposFileName) && ($filetype eq "dir"))) { print("Can\'t mix files and directories on single \'cvsacl\' file record; skipping entry.\n"); print(" Please contact a CVS administrator.\n"); $filetype = ""; last; } elsif (-d $reposDirName) { $filetype = "dir"; print("$$ $reposDirName is a directory.\n") if $debug; } elsif (-f $reposFileName) { $filetype = "file"; print("$$ $reposFileName is a regular file.\n") if $debug; } else { print("***** Item to commit was neither a regular file nor a directory.\n"); print("***** Current \'cvsacl\' line ignored.\n"); print("***** Possible problem with \'cvsacl\' admin file. Please contact a CVS administrator.\n"); $filetype = ""; $text = sprintf("Module entry on cvsacl line: %s is not a valid file or directory.\n", $cvsacl_module); write_restrictlog_record($text); last; } # end if } # end for print("$$ checkFileness will return \$filetype: $filetype.\n") if $debug; return $filetype; } # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # ----------------------------------------------------- check for module match # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- sub checkModuleMatch { # This subroutine checks for a match between the directory or file pattern # specified in the 'cvsacl' file (i.e., $cvsacl_modules) versus the commit file # objects passed into the script via @ARGV (i.e., $commit_object). # The directory pattern only has to match the beginning portion of the commit # file's name for a match since all files under that directory are considered # a match. File patterns must exactly match. # Since (theoretically, if not normally in practice) a working directory can # contain a mixture of files from different branches, this routine checks to # see if there is also a match on branch before considering the file # comparison a match. my $match_flag = ""; print("$$ \@_ in checkModuleMatch is: @_.\n") if $debug; my ($type,$commit_object,$cvsacl_module) = @_; if ($type eq "file") { # Do exact file match of $commit_object if ($commit_object eq $cvsacl_module) { $match_flag = "file"; } # Do dir match at beginning of $commit_object } elsif ($commit_object =~ /^$cvsacl_module\//) { $match_flag = "dir"; } if ($match_flag) { print("$$ \$repository: $repository matches \$commit_object: $commit_object.\n") if $debug; if (!$cvsacl_branches) { # empty branch pattern matches all print("$$ blank \'cvsacl\' branch matches all commit files.\n") if $debug; $repository_matches{$commit_object} = [$branch{$commit_object}, $cvsacl_module]; print("$$ \$repository_matches{$commit_object} = [$branch{$commit_object}, $cvsacl_module].\n") if $debug; } else { # otherwise check branch hash table @branch_list = split (/[\s,]+/,$cvsacl_branches); print("$$ Branches from \'cvsacl\' record: ", join(", ",@branch_list),".\n") if $debug; if (grep(/$branch{$commit_object}/, @branch_list)) { $repository_matches{$commit_object} = [$branch{$commit_object}, $cvsacl_module]; print("$$ \$repository_matches{$commit_object} = [$branch{$commit_object}, " . "$cvsacl_module].\n") if $debug; } } } } # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # ------------------------------------------------------- check for file match # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- sub printOptionalRestrictionMessage { # This subroutine optionally prints site-specific file restriction information # whenever a restriction condition is met. If the file 'restrict_msg' does # not exist, the routine immediately exits. If there is a 'restrict_msg' file # then all the contents are printed at the end of the standard restriction # message. # As seen from examining the definition of $restrictfile, the default filename # is: $CVSROOT/CVSROOT/restrict_msg. open (RESTRICT, $restrictfile) || return; # It is ok for cvsacl file not to exist while () { chop; # print out each line print("**** $_\n"); } } # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # ---------------------------------------------------------- write log message # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- sub write_restrictlog { # This subroutine iterates through the list of restricted entries and logs # each one to the error logfile. # write each line in @text out separately foreach $commitfile (keys %restricted_entries) { $log_text = sprintf "Commit attempt by: %s for: %s on branch: %s", $user_name, $commitfile, $branch{$commitfile}; write_restrictlog_record($log_text); } } # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- # ---------------------------------------------------------- write log message # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- sub write_restrictlog_record { # This subroutine receives a scalar string and writes it out to the # $restrictlog file as a separate line. Each line is prepended with the date # and time in the format: "2004/01/30 12:00:00 ". $text = shift; # return quietly if there is a problem opening the log file. open(FILE, ">>$restrictlog") || return; (@time) = localtime(); # write each line in @text out separately $log_record = sprintf "%04d/%02d/%02d %02d:%02d:%02d %s.\n", $time[5]+1900, $time[4]+1, $time[3], $time[2], $time[1], $time[0], $text; print FILE $log_record; print("$$ restrict_log record being written: $log_record to $restrictlog.\n") if $debug; close(FILE); } cvs-1.12.13/contrib/log.in0000755000076400007640000001444210305571537012172 00000000000000#! @PERL@ -T # -*-Perl-*- # Copyright (C) 1994-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # # THIS SCRIPT IS PROBABLY BROKEN. REMOVING THE -T SWITCH ON THE #! LINE ABOVE # WOULD FIX IT, BUT THIS IS INSECURE. WE RECOMMEND FIXING THE ERRORS WHICH THE # -T SWITCH WILL CAUSE PERL TO REPORT BEFORE RUNNING THIS SCRIPT FROM A CVS # SERVER TRIGGER. PLEASE SEND PATCHES CONTAINING THE CHANGES YOU FIND # NECESSARY TO RUN THIS SCRIPT WITH THE TAINT-CHECKING ENABLED BACK TO THE # <@PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@> MAILING LIST. # # For more on general Perl security and taint-checking, please try running the # `perldoc perlsec' command. # ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # XXX: FIXME: handle multiple '-f logfile' arguments # # XXX -- I HATE Perl! This *will* be re-written in shell/awk/sed soon! # # Usage: log.pl [-u user] [[-m mailto] ...] [-s] [-V] -f logfile 'dirname file ...' # # -u user - $USER passed from loginfo # -m mailto - for each user to receive cvs log reports # (multiple -m's permitted) # -s - to prevent "cvs status -v" messages # -V - without '-s', don't pass '-v' to cvs status # -f logfile - for the logfile to append to (mandatory, # but only one logfile can be specified). # here is what the output looks like: # # From: woods@kuma.domain.top # Subject: CVS update: testmodule # # Date: Wednesday November 23, 1994 @ 14:15 # Author: woods # # Update of /local/src-CVS/testmodule # In directory kuma:/home/kuma/woods/work.d/testmodule # # Modified Files: # test3 # Added Files: # test6 # Removed Files: # test4 # Log Message: # - wow, what a test # # (and for each file the "cvs status -v" output is appended unless -s is used) # # ================================================================== # File: test3 Status: Up-to-date # # Working revision: 1.41 Wed Nov 23 14:15:59 1994 # Repository revision: 1.41 /local/src-CVS/cvs/testmodule/test3,v # Sticky Options: -ko # # Existing Tags: # local-v2 (revision: 1.7) # local-v1 (revision: 1.1.1.2) # CVS-1_4A2 (revision: 1.1.1.2) # local-v0 (revision: 1.2) # CVS-1_4A1 (revision: 1.1.1.1) # CVS (branch: 1.1.1) use strict; use IO::File; my $cvsroot = $ENV{'CVSROOT'}; # turn off setgid # $) = $(; my $dostatus = 1; my $verbosestatus = 1; my $users; my $login; my $donefiles; my $logfile; my @files; # parse command line arguments # while (@ARGV) { my $arg = shift @ARGV; if ($arg eq '-m') { $users = "$users " . shift @ARGV; } elsif ($arg eq '-u') { $login = shift @ARGV; } elsif ($arg eq '-f') { ($logfile) && die "Too many '-f' args"; $logfile = shift @ARGV; } elsif ($arg eq '-s') { $dostatus = 0; } elsif ($arg eq '-V') { $verbosestatus = 0; } else { ($donefiles) && die "Too many arguments!\n"; $donefiles = 1; @files = split(/ /, $arg); } } # the first argument is the module location relative to $CVSROOT # my $modulepath = shift @files; my $mailcmd = "| Mail -s 'CVS update: $modulepath'"; # Initialise some date and time arrays # my @mos = ('January','February','March','April','May','June','July', 'August','September','October','November','December'); my @days = ('Sunday','Monday','Tuesday','Wednesday','Thursday','Friday','Saturday'); my ($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst) = localtime; $year += 1900; # get a login name for the guy doing the commit.... # if ($login eq '') { $login = getlogin || (getpwuid($<))[0] || "nobody"; } # open log file for appending # my $logfh = new IO::File ">>" . $logfile or die "Could not open(" . $logfile . "): $!\n"; # send mail, if there's anyone to send to! # my $mailfh; if ($users) { $mailcmd = "$mailcmd $users"; $mailfh = new IO::File $mailcmd or die "Could not Exec($mailcmd): $!\n"; } # print out the log Header # $logfh->print ("\n"); $logfh->print ("****************************************\n"); $logfh->print ("Date:\t$days[$wday] $mos[$mon] $mday, $year @ $hour:" . sprintf("%02d", $min) . "\n"); $logfh->print ("Author:\t$login\n\n"); if ($mailfh) { $mailfh->print ("\n"); $mailfh->print ("Date:\t$days[$wday] $mos[$mon] $mday, $year @ $hour:" . sprintf("%02d", $min) . "\n"); $mailfh->print ("Author:\t$login\n\n"); } # print the stuff from logmsg that comes in on stdin to the logfile # my $infh = new IO::File "< -"; foreach ($infh->getlines) { $logfh->print; if ($mailfh) { $mailfh->print ($_); } } undef $infh; $logfh->print ("\n"); # after log information, do an 'cvs -Qq status -v' on each file in the arguments. # if ($dostatus != 0) { while (@files) { my $file = shift @files; if ($file eq "-") { $logfh->print ("[input file was '-']\n"); if ($mailfh) { $mailfh->print ("[input file was '-']\n"); } last; } my $rcsfh = new IO::File; my $pid = $rcsfh->open ("-|"); if ( !defined $pid ) { die "fork failed: $!"; } if ($pid == 0) { my @command = ('cvs', '-nQq', 'status'); if ($verbosestatus) { push @command, '-v'; } push @command, $file; exec @command; die "cvs exec failed: $!"; } my $line; while ($line = $rcsfh->getline) { $logfh->print ($line); if ($mailfh) { $mailfh->print ($line); } } undef $rcsfh; } } $logfh->close() or die "Write to $logfile failed: $!"; if ($mailfh) { $mailfh->close; die "Pipe to $mailcmd failed" if $?; } ## must exit cleanly ## exit 0; cvs-1.12.13/contrib/log_accum.in0000755000076400007640000005553210305571537013347 00000000000000#! @PERL@ -T # -*-Perl-*- # Copyright (C) 1994-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # # THIS SCRIPT IS PROBABLY BROKEN. REMOVING THE -T SWITCH ON THE #! LINE ABOVE # WOULD FIX IT, BUT THIS IS INSECURE. WE RECOMMEND FIXING THE ERRORS WHICH THE # -T SWITCH WILL CAUSE PERL TO REPORT BEFORE RUNNING THIS SCRIPT FROM A CVS # SERVER TRIGGER. PLEASE SEND PATCHES CONTAINING THE CHANGES YOU FIND # NECESSARY TO RUN THIS SCRIPT WITH THE TAINT-CHECKING ENABLED BACK TO THE # <@PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@> MAILING LIST. # # For more on general Perl security and taint-checking, please try running the # `perldoc perlsec' command. # ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # Perl filter to handle the log messages from the checkin of files in # a directory. This script will group the lists of files by log # message, and mail a single consolidated log message at the end of # the commit. # # This file assumes a pre-commit checking program that leaves the # names of the first and last commit directories in a temporary file. # # IMPORTANT: what the above means is, this script interacts with # commit_prep, in that they have to agree on the tmpfile name to use. # See $LAST_FILE below. # # How this works: CVS triggers this script once for each directory # involved in the commit -- in other words, a single commit can invoke # this script N times. It knows when it's on the last invocation by # examining the contents of $LAST_FILE. Between invocations, it # caches information for its future incarnations in various temporary # files in /tmp, which are named according to the process group and # the committer (by themselves, neither of these are unique, but # together they almost always are, unless the same user is doing two # commits simultaneously). The final invocation is the one that # actually sends the mail -- it gathers up the cached information, # combines that with what it found out on this pass, and sends a # commit message to the appropriate mailing list. # # (Ask Karl Fogel if questions.) # # Contributed by David Hampton # Roy Fielding removed useless code and added log/mail of new files # Ken Coar added special processing (i.e., no diffs) for binary files # ############################################################ # # Configurable options # ############################################################ # # The newest versions of CVS have UseNewInfoFmtStrings=yes # to change the arguments being passed on the command line. # If you are using %1s on the command line, then set this # value to 0. # 0 = old-style %1s format. use split(' ') to separate ARGV into filesnames. # 1 = new-style %s format. Note: allows spaces in filenames. my $UseNewInfoFmtStrings = 0; # # Where do you want the RCS ID and delta info? # 0 = none, # 1 = in mail only, # 2 = in both mail and logs. # $rcsidinfo = 2; #if you are using CVS web then set this to some value... if not set it to "" # # When set properly, this will cause links to aspects of the project to # print in the commit emails. #$CVSWEB_SCHEME = "http"; #$CVSWEB_DOMAIN = "nongnu.org"; #$CVSWEB_PORT = "80"; #$CVSWEB_URI = "source/browse/"; #$SEND_URL = "true"; $SEND_DIFF = "true"; # Set this to a domain to have CVS pretend that all users who make # commits have mail accounts within that domain. #$EMULATE_LOCAL_MAIL_USER="nongnu.org"; # Set this to '-c' for context diffs; defaults to '-u' for unidiff format. $difftype = '-uN'; ############################################################ # # Constants # ############################################################ $STATE_NONE = 0; $STATE_CHANGED = 1; $STATE_ADDED = 2; $STATE_REMOVED = 3; $STATE_LOG = 4; $TMPDIR = $ENV{'TMPDIR'} || '/tmp'; $FILE_PREFIX = '#cvs.'; $LAST_FILE = "$TMPDIR/${FILE_PREFIX}lastdir"; # Created by commit_prep! $ADDED_FILE = "$TMPDIR/${FILE_PREFIX}files.added"; $REMOVED_FILE = "$TMPDIR/${FILE_PREFIX}files.removed"; $LOG_FILE = "$TMPDIR/${FILE_PREFIX}files.log"; $BRANCH_FILE = "$TMPDIR/${FILE_PREFIX}files.branch"; $MLIST_FILE = "$TMPDIR/${FILE_PREFIX}files.mlist"; $SUMMARY_FILE = "$TMPDIR/${FILE_PREFIX}files.summary"; $CVSROOT = $ENV{'CVSROOT'}; $MAIL_CMD = "| /usr/lib/sendmail -i -t"; #$MAIL_CMD = "| /var/qmail/bin/qmail-inject"; $MAIL_FROM = 'commitlogger'; #not needed if EMULATE_LOCAL_MAIL_USER $SUBJECT_PRE = 'CVS update:'; ############################################################ # # Subroutines # ############################################################ sub format_names { local($dir, @files) = @_; local(@lines); $lines[0] = sprintf(" %-08s", $dir); foreach $file (@files) { if (length($lines[$#lines]) + length($file) > 60) { $lines[++$#lines] = sprintf(" %8s", " "); } $lines[$#lines] .= " ".$file; } @lines; } sub cleanup_tmpfiles { local(@files); opendir(DIR, $TMPDIR); push(@files, grep(/^${FILE_PREFIX}.*\.${id}\.${cvs_user}$/, readdir(DIR))); closedir(DIR); foreach (@files) { unlink "$TMPDIR/$_"; } } sub write_logfile { local($filename, @lines) = @_; open(FILE, ">$filename") || die ("Cannot open log file $filename: $!\n"); print(FILE join("\n", @lines), "\n"); close(FILE); } sub append_to_file { local($filename, $dir, @files) = @_; if (@files) { local(@lines) = &format_names($dir, @files); open(FILE, ">>$filename") || die ("Cannot open file $filename: $!\n"); print(FILE join("\n", @lines), "\n"); close(FILE); } } sub write_line { local($filename, $line) = @_; open(FILE, ">$filename") || die("Cannot open file $filename: $!\n"); print(FILE $line, "\n"); close(FILE); } sub append_line { local($filename, $line) = @_; open(FILE, ">>$filename") || die("Cannot open file $filename: $!\n"); print(FILE $line, "\n"); close(FILE); } sub read_line { local($filename) = @_; local($line); open(FILE, "<$filename") || die("Cannot open file $filename: $!\n"); $line = ; close(FILE); chomp($line); $line; } sub read_line_nodie { local($filename) = @_; local($line); open(FILE, "<$filename") || return (""); $line = ; close(FILE); chomp($line); $line; } sub read_file_lines { local($filename) = @_; local(@text) = (); open(FILE, "<$filename") || return (); while () { chomp; push(@text, $_); } close(FILE); @text; } sub read_file { local($filename, $leader) = @_; local(@text) = (); open(FILE, "<$filename") || return (); while () { chomp; push(@text, sprintf(" %-10s %s", $leader, $_)); $leader = ""; } close(FILE); @text; } sub read_logfile { local($filename, $leader) = @_; local(@text) = (); open(FILE, "<$filename") || die ("Cannot open log file $filename: $!\n"); while () { chomp; push(@text, $leader.$_); } close(FILE); @text; } # # do an 'cvs -Qn status' on each file in the arguments, and extract info. # sub change_summary { local($out, @filenames) = @_; local(@revline); local($file, $rev, $rcsfile, $line, $vhost, $cvsweb_base); while (@filenames) { $file = shift @filenames; if ("$file" eq "") { next; } open(RCS, "-|") || exec "$cvsbin/cvs", '-Qn', 'status', '--', $file; $rev = ""; $delta = ""; $rcsfile = ""; while () { if (/^[ \t]*Repository revision/) { chomp; @revline = split(' ', $_); $rev = $revline[2]; $rcsfile = $revline[3]; $rcsfile =~ s,^$CVSROOT/,,; $rcsfile =~ s/,v$//; } } close(RCS); if ($rev ne '' && $rcsfile ne '') { open(RCS, "-|") || exec "$cvsbin/cvs", '-Qn', 'log', "-r$rev", '--', $file; while () { if (/^date:.*lines:([^;]+);.*/) { $delta = $1; last; } } close(RCS); } $diff = "\n\n"; $vhost = $path[0]; if ($CVSWEB_PORT eq "80") { $cvsweb_base = "$CVSWEB_SCHEME://$vhost.$CVSWEB_DOMAIN/$CVSWEB_URI"; } else { $cvsweb_base = "$CVSWEB_SCHEME://$vhost.$CVSWEB_DOMAIN:$CVSWEB_PORT/$CVSWEB_URI"; } if ($SEND_URL eq "true") { $diff .= $cvsweb_base . join("/", @path) . "/$file"; } # # If this is a binary file, don't try to report a diff; not only is # it meaningless, but it also screws up some mailers. We rely on # Perl's 'is this binary' algorithm; it's pretty good. But not # perfect. # if (($file =~ /\.(?:pdf|gif|jpg|mpg)$/i) || (-B $file)) { if ($SEND_URL eq "true") { $diff .= "?rev=$rev&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup\n\n"; } if ($SEND_DIFF eq "true") { $diff .= "\t<>\n\n"; } } else { # # Get the differences between this and the previous revision, # being aware that new files always have revision '1.1' and # new branches always end in '.n.1'. # if ($rev =~ /^(.*)\.([0-9]+)$/) { $prev = $2 - 1; $prev_rev = $1 . '.' . $prev; $prev_rev =~ s/\.[0-9]+\.0$//;# Truncate if first rev on branch if ($rev eq '1.1') { if ($SEND_URL eq "true") { $diff .= "?rev=$rev&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup\n\n"; } if ($SEND_DIFF eq "true") { open(DIFF, "-|") || exec "$cvsbin/cvs", '-Qn', 'update', '-p', '-r1.1', '--', $file; $diff .= "Index: $file\n==================================" . "=================================\n"; } } else { if ($SEND_URL eq "true") { $diff .= ".diff?r1=$prev_rev&r2=$rev\n\n"; } if ($SEND_DIFF eq "true") { $diff .= "(In the diff below, changes in quantity " . "of whitespace are not shown.)\n\n"; open(DIFF, "-|") || exec "$cvsbin/cvs", '-Qn', 'diff', "$difftype", '-b', "-r$prev_rev", "-r$rev", '--', $file; } } if ($SEND_DIFF eq "true") { while () { $diff .= $_; } close(DIFF); } $diff .= "\n\n"; } } &append_line($out, sprintf("%-9s%-12s%s%s", $rev, $delta, $rcsfile, $diff)); } } sub build_header { local($header); delete $ENV{'TZ'}; local($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year) = localtime(time); $header = sprintf(" User: %-8s\n Date: %02d/%02d/%02d %02d:%02d:%02d", $cvs_user, $year%100, $mon+1, $mday, $hour, $min, $sec); # $header = sprintf("%-8s %02d/%02d/%02d %02d:%02d:%02d", # $login, $year%100, $mon+1, $mday, # $hour, $min, $sec); } # !!! Destination Mailing-list and history file mappings here !!! #sub mlist_map #{ # local($path) = @_; # my $domain = "nongnu.org"; # # if ($path =~ /^([^\/]+)/) { # return "cvs\@$1.$domain"; # } else { # return "cvs\@$domain"; # } #} sub derive_subject_from_changes_file () { my $subj = ""; for ($i = 0; ; $i++) { open (CH, "<$CHANGED_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user") or last; while (my $change = ) { # A changes file looks like this: # # src foo.c newfile.html # www index.html project_nav.html # # Each line is " Dir File1 File2 ..." # We only care about Dir, since the subject line should # summarize. $change =~ s/^[ \t]*//; $change =~ /^([^ \t]+)[ \t]*/; my $dir = $1; # Fold to rightmost directory component $dir =~ /([^\/]+)$/; $dir = $1; if ($subj eq "") { $subj = $dir; } else { $subj .= ", $dir"; } } close (CH); } if ($subj ne "") { $subj = "MODIFIED: $subj ..."; } else { # NPM: See if there's any file-addition notifications. my $added = &read_line_nodie("$ADDED_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user"); if ($added ne "") { $subj .= "ADDED: $added "; } # print "derive_subject_from_changes_file().. added== $added \n"; ## NPM: See if there's any file-removal notications. my $removed = &read_line_nodie("$REMOVED_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user"); if ($removed ne "") { $subj .= "REMOVED: $removed "; } # print "derive_subject_from_changes_file().. removed== $removed \n"; ## NPM: See if there's any branch notifications. my $branched = &read_line_nodie("$BRANCH_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user"); if ($branched ne "") { $subj .= "BRANCHED: $branched"; } # print "derive_subject_from_changes_file().. branched== $branched \n"; ## NPM: DEFAULT: DIRECTORY CREATION (c.f. "Check for a new directory first" in main mody) if ($subj eq "") { my $subject = join("/", @path); $subj = "NEW: $subject"; } } return $subj; } sub mail_notification { local($addr_list, @text) = @_; local($mail_to); my $subj = &derive_subject_from_changes_file (); if ($EMULATE_LOCAL_MAIL_USER ne "") { $MAIL_FROM = "$cvs_user\@$EMULATE_LOCAL_MAIL_USER"; } $mail_to = join(", ", @{$addr_list}); print "Mailing the commit message to $mail_to (from $MAIL_FROM)\n"; $ENV{'MAILUSER'} = $MAIL_FROM; # Commented out on hocus, so comment it out here. -kff # $ENV{'QMAILINJECT'} = 'f'; open(MAIL, "$MAIL_CMD -f$MAIL_FROM"); print MAIL "From: $MAIL_FROM\n"; print MAIL "To: $mail_to\n"; print MAIL "Subject: $SUBJECT_PRE $subj\n\n"; print(MAIL join("\n", @text)); close(MAIL); # print "Mailing the commit message to $MAIL_TO...\n"; # # #added by jrobbins@collab.net 1999/12/15 # # attempt to get rid of anonymous # $ENV{'MAILUSER'} = 'commitlogger'; # $ENV{'QMAILINJECT'} = 'f'; # # open(MAIL, "| /var/qmail/bin/qmail-inject"); # print(MAIL "To: $MAIL_TO\n"); # print(MAIL "Subject: cvs commit: $ARGV[0]\n"); # print(MAIL join("\n", @text)); # close(MAIL); } ## process the command line arguments sent to this script ## it returns an array of files, %s, sent from the loginfo ## command sub process_argv { local(@argv) = @_; local(@files); local($arg); print "Processing log script arguments...\n"; if ($UseNewInfoFmtStrings) { while (@argv) { $arg = shift @argv; if ($arg eq '-u' && !defined($cvs_user)) { $cvs_user = shift @argv; } if ($arg eq '- New directory') { $new_directory = 1; } elsif ($arg eq '- Imported sources') { $imported_sources = 1; } else { push(@files, $arg); } } } else { while (@argv) { $arg = shift @argv; if ($arg eq '-u') { $cvs_user = shift @argv; } else { ($donefiles) && die "Too many arguments!\n"; $donefiles = 1; $ARGV[0] = $arg; if ($arg =~ s/ - New directory//) { $new_directory = 1; } elsif ($arg =~ s/ - Imported sources//) { $imported_sources = 1; } @files = split(' ', $arg); } } } return @files; } ############################################################# # # Main Body # ############################################################ # # Setup environment # umask (002); # Connect to the database $cvsbin = "/usr/bin"; # # Initialize basic variables # $id = getpgrp(); $state = $STATE_NONE; $cvs_user = $ENV{'USER'} || getlogin || (getpwuid($<))[0] || sprintf("uid#%d",$<); $new_directory = 0; # Is this a 'cvs add directory' command? $imported_sources = 0; # Is this a 'cvs import' command? @files = process_argv(@ARGV); @path = split('/', $files[0]); if ($#path == 0) { $dir = "."; } else { $dir = join('/', @path[1..$#path]); } #print("ARGV - ", join(":", @ARGV), "\n"); #print("files - ", join(":", @files), "\n"); #print("path - ", join(":", @path), "\n"); #print("dir - ", $dir, "\n"); #print("id - ", $id, "\n"); # # Map the repository directory to an email address for commitlogs to be sent # to. # #$mlist = &mlist_map($files[0]); ########################## # # Check for a new directory first. This will always appear as a # single item in the argument list, and an empty log message. # if ($new_directory) { $header = &build_header; @text = (); push(@text, $header); push(@text, ""); push(@text, " ".$files[0]." - New directory"); &mail_notification([ $mlist ], @text); exit 0; } # # Iterate over the body of the message collecting information. # while () { chomp; # Drop the newline if (/^Revision\/Branch:/) { s,^Revision/Branch:,,; push (@branch_lines, split); next; } # next if (/^[ \t]+Tag:/ && $state != $STATE_LOG); if (/^Modified Files/) { $state = $STATE_CHANGED; next; } if (/^Added Files/) { $state = $STATE_ADDED; next; } if (/^Removed Files/) { $state = $STATE_REMOVED; next; } if (/^Log Message/) { $state = $STATE_LOG; last; } s/[ \t\n]+$//; # delete trailing space push (@changed_files, split) if ($state == $STATE_CHANGED); push (@added_files, split) if ($state == $STATE_ADDED); push (@removed_files, split) if ($state == $STATE_REMOVED); } # Proces the /Log Message/ section now, if it exists. # Do this here rather than above to deal with Log messages # that include lines that confuse the state machine. if (!eof(STDIN)) { while () { next unless ($state == $STATE_LOG); # eat all STDIN if ($state == $STATE_LOG) { if (/^PR:$/i || /^Reviewed by:$/i || /^Submitted by:$/i || /^Obtained from:$/i) { next; } push (@log_lines, $_); } } } # # Strip leading and trailing blank lines from the log message. Also # compress multiple blank lines in the body of the message down to a # single blank line. # (Note, this only does the mail and changes log, not the rcs log). # while ($#log_lines > -1) { last if ($log_lines[0] ne ""); shift(@log_lines); } while ($#log_lines > -1) { last if ($log_lines[$#log_lines] ne ""); pop(@log_lines); } for ($i = $#log_lines; $i > 0; $i--) { if (($log_lines[$i - 1] eq "") && ($log_lines[$i] eq "")) { splice(@log_lines, $i, 1); } } # # Find the log file that matches this log message # for ($i = 0; ; $i++) { last if (! -e "$LOG_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user"); @text = &read_logfile("$LOG_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", ""); last if ($#text == -1); last if (join(" ", @log_lines) eq join(" ", @text)); } # # Spit out the information gathered in this pass. # &write_logfile("$LOG_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", @log_lines); &append_to_file("$BRANCH_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", $dir, @branch_lines); &append_to_file("$ADDED_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", $dir, @added_files); &append_to_file("$CHANGED_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", $dir, @changed_files); &append_to_file("$REMOVED_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", $dir, @removed_files); &append_line("$MLIST_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", $mlist); if ($rcsidinfo) { &change_summary("$SUMMARY_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", (@changed_files, @added_files)); } # # Check whether this is the last directory. If not, quit. # if (-e "$LAST_FILE.$id.$cvs_user") { $_ = &read_line("$LAST_FILE.$id.$cvs_user"); $tmpfiles = $files[0]; $tmpfiles =~ s,([^a-zA-Z0-9_/]),\\$1,g; if (! grep(/$tmpfiles$/, $_)) { print "More commits to come...\n"; exit 0 } } # # This is it. The commits are all finished. Lump everything together # into a single message, fire a copy off to the mailing list, and drop # it on the end of the Changes file. # $header = &build_header; # # Produce the final compilation of the log messages # @text = (); @mlist_list = (); push(@text, $header); push(@text, ""); for ($i = 0; ; $i++) { last if (! -e "$LOG_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user"); push(@text, &read_file("$BRANCH_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", "Branch:")); push(@text, &read_file("$CHANGED_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", "Modified:")); push(@text, &read_file("$ADDED_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", "Added:")); push(@text, &read_file("$REMOVED_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", "Removed:")); push(@text, " Log:"); push(@text, &read_logfile("$LOG_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", " ")); push(@mlist_list, &read_file_lines("$MLIST_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user")); if ($rcsidinfo == 2) { if (-e "$SUMMARY_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user") { push(@text, " "); push(@text, " Revision Changes Path"); push(@text, &read_logfile("$SUMMARY_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", " ")); } } push(@text, ""); } # # Now generate the extra info for the mail message.. # if ($rcsidinfo == 1) { $revhdr = 0; for ($i = 0; ; $i++) { last if (! -e "$LOG_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user"); if (-e "$SUMMARY_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user") { if (!$revhdr++) { push(@text, "Revision Changes Path"); } push(@text, &read_logfile("$SUMMARY_FILE.$i.$id.$cvs_user", "")); } } if ($revhdr) { push(@text, ""); # consistancy... } } %mlist_hash = (); foreach (@mlist_list) { $mlist_hash{ $_ } = 1; } # # Mail out the notification. # &mail_notification([ keys(%mlist_hash) ], @text); &cleanup_tmpfiles; exit 0; cvs-1.12.13/contrib/mfpipe.in0000755000076400007640000000654210305571537012673 00000000000000#! @PERL@ -T # -*-Perl-*- # Copyright (C) 1994-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # # THIS SCRIPT IS PROBABLY BROKEN. REMOVING THE -T SWITCH ON THE #! LINE ABOVE # WOULD FIX IT, BUT THIS IS INSECURE. WE RECOMMEND FIXING THE ERRORS WHICH THE # -T SWITCH WILL CAUSE PERL TO REPORT BEFORE RUNNING THIS SCRIPT FROM A CVS # SERVER TRIGGER. PLEASE SEND PATCHES CONTAINING THE CHANGES YOU FIND # NECESSARY TO RUN THIS SCRIPT WITH THE TAINT-CHECKING ENABLED BACK TO THE # <@PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@> MAILING LIST. # # For more on general Perl security and taint-checking, please try running the # `perldoc perlsec' command. # ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # From: clyne@niwot.scd.ucar.EDU (John Clyne) # Date: Fri, 28 Feb 92 09:54:21 MST # # BTW, i wrote a perl script that is similar to 'nfpipe' except that in # addition to logging to a file it provides a command line option for mailing # change notices to a group of users. Obviously you probably wouldn't want # to mail every change. But there may be certain directories that are commonly # accessed by a group of users who would benefit from an email notice. # Especially if they regularly beat on the same directory. Anyway if you # think anyone would be interested here it is. # # File: mfpipe # # Author: John Clyne # National Center for Atmospheric Research # PO 3000, Boulder, Colorado # # Date: Wed Feb 26 18:34:53 MST 1992 # # Description: Tee standard input to mail a list of users and to # a file. Used by CVS logging. # # Usage: mfpipe [-f file] [user@host...] # # Environment: CVSROOT # Path to CVS root. # # Files: # # # Options: -f file # Capture output to 'file' # $header = "Log Message:\n"; $mailcmd = "| mail -s 'CVS update notice'"; $whoami = `whoami`; chop $whoami; $date = `date`; chop $date; $cvsroot = $ENV{'CVSROOT'}; while (@ARGV) { $arg = shift @ARGV; if ($arg eq '-f') { $file = shift @ARGV; } else { $users = "$users $arg"; } } if ($users) { $mailcmd = "$mailcmd $users"; open(MAIL, $mailcmd) || die "Execing $mail: $!\n"; } if ($file) { $logfile = "$cvsroot/LOG/$file"; open(FILE, ">> $logfile") || die "Opening $logfile: $!\n"; } print FILE "$whoami $date--------BEGIN LOG ENTRY-------------\n" if ($logfile); while (<>) { print FILE $log if ($log && $logfile); print FILE $_ if ($logfile); print MAIL $_ if ($users); $log = "log: " if ($_ eq $header); } close FILE; die "Write failed" if $?; close MAIL; die "Mail failed" if $?; exit 0; cvs-1.12.13/contrib/pvcs2rcs.in0000644000076400007640000012555710305572157013164 00000000000000#! @PERL@ # --------------------------------- # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. ########################################################################### # FUNCTION: # To recursively walk through a PVCS archive directory tree (archives # located in VCS/ or vcs/ subdirectories) and convert them to RCS archives. # The RCS archive name is the PVCS workfile name with ",v" appended. # # SYNTAX: # pvcs_to_rcs.pl --help # # where -l indicates the operation is to be performed only in the current # directory (no recursion) # # EXAMPLE: # pvcs_to_rcs # Would walk through every VCS or vcs subdir starting at the current directory, # and produce corresponding RCS archives one level above the VCS or vcs subdir. # (VCS/../RCS/) # # NOTES: # * This script performs little error checking and logging # (i.e. USE AT YOUR OWN RISK) # * This script was last tested using ActiveState's port of Perl 5.005_02 # (internalcut #507) under Win95, though it does compile under Perl-5.00404 # for Solaris 2.4 run on a Solaris 2.6 system. The script crashed # occasionally under ActiveState's port of Perl 5.003_07 but this stopped # happening with the update so if you are having problems, try updating Perl. # Upgrading to cut #507 also seemed to coincide with a large speed # improvement, so try and keep up, hey? :) It was executed from MKS's # UNIX tools version 6.1 for Win32's sh. ALWAYS redirect your output to # a log!!! # * PVCS archives are left intact # * RCS archives are created in VCS/../RCS/ (or ./RCS using '-pflat') # * Branch labels in this script will be attached to the CVS magic # revision number. For branch a.b.c of a particular file, this means # the label will be attached to revision a.b.0.c of the converted # file. If you use the TrunkTip (1.*) label, be aware that it will convert # to RCS revision 0.1, which is useless to RCS and CVS. You'll probably # have to delete these. # * All revisions are saved with correct "metadata" (i.e. check-in date, # author, and log message). Any blank log message is replaced with # "no comment". This is because RCS does not allow non-interactive # check in of a new revision without a comment string. # * Revision numbers are incremented by 1 during the conversion (since # RCS does not allow revision 1.0). # * All converted branch numbers are even (the CVS paradigm) # * Version labels are assigned to the appropriate (incremented) revision # numbers. PVCS allows spaces and periods in version labels while RCS # does not. A global search and replace converts " " and "." to "_" # There may be other cases that ought to be added. # * Any working (checked-out) copies of PVCS archives # within the VCS/../ or vcs/../ (or possibly ./ with '-pflat') # will be deleted (or overwritten) depending on your mode of # operation since the current ./ is used in the checkout of each revision. # I suppose if development continues these files could be redirected to # temp space rather than ./ . # * Locks on PVCS archives should be removed (or the workfiles should be # checked-in) prior to conversion, although the script will blaze through # the archive nonetheless (But you would lose any checked out revision(s)) # * The -kb option is added to the RCS archive for workfiles with the following # extensions: .bin .out .btl .rom .a07 .lib .exe .tco .obj .t8u .c8u .o .lku # .a and a few others. The %bin_ext variable holds these values in regexp # form. # * the --force-binary option can be used to convert binary files which don't # have proper extensions, but I'd *probably* edit the %bin_ext variable. # * This script will abort occasionally with the error "invalid revision # number". This is known to happen when a revision comment has # /^\s*Rev/ (Perl regexp notation) in it. Fix the comment and start over. # (The directory locks and existance checking make this a fairly quick # process.) # Binary files which do not have their mode set properly are likely to look # corrupted on initial checkout and use, but using # `cvs admin -kb ' to retroactively change the RCS keyword # substitution mode of the file to binary (and refreshing the files in any # local workspaces they are checked out in: `rm ; update' # should do the trick) should end any problems with the original import. # If anyone has checked in changes since the import, those revisions may # be corrupted in the imported archive and therefore those changes (commits # of corrupted data) may need to be backed out. # * This script writes lockfiles in the RCS/ directories. It will also not # convert an archive if it finds the RCS Archive existant in the RCS/ # directory. This enables the conversion to quickly pick up where it left # off after errors or interrupts occur. If you interrupt the script make # sure you delete the last RCS Archive File which was being written. # If you recieve the "Invalid revision number" error, then the RCS archive # file for that particular PVCS file will not have been created yet. # * This script will not create lockfiles when processing single # filenames passed into the script, for hopefully obvious reasons. # (lockfiles lock directories - DRP) # * Log the output to a file. That makes it real easy to grep for errors # later. (grep for "^[ \t]*(rcs|ci):" and be aware I might have missed # a few cases (get? vcs?) !!!) *** Also note that this script will # exibit some harmless RCS errors. Namely, it will attempt to lock # branches which haven't been created yet. *** # * I tried to keep the error and warning info up to date, but it seems # to mean very little. This script almost always exits with a warning # or an error that didn't seem to cause any harm. I didn't trace it # and our imported source checks out and builds... # It is probably happening when trying to convert empty directories # or read files (possibly checked out workfiles ) which are not # pvcs_archives. # * You must use the -pflat option when processing single filenames # passed as arguments to the script. This is probably a bug. # * questions, comments, additions can be sent to info-cvs@nongnu.org ######################################################################### # # USER Configurables # # %bin_ext should be editable from the command line. # # NOTE: Each possible binary extension is listed as a Perl regexp # # The value associated with each regexp key is used to print a log # message when a binary file is found. my %bin_ext = ( '\.(?i)abs$' => "Absolute File", '\.(?i)bin$' => "Binary", '\.(?i)bit$' => "Bit File", '\.(?i)ol$' => "Compiler Output", '\.(?i)out$' => "Default Compiler Output", '\.(?i)ln$' => "Linker Output", '\.(?i)lob$' => "Lint Output", '\.(?i)zob$' => "DBCO Object", '\.(?i)mim$' => "MIME File", '\.(?i)dwi$' => "DWI File", '\.(?i)iop$' => "IOP File", '\.(?i)btl$' => "", '\.(?i)rom$' => "ROM File", '\.(?i)a07$' => "", '\.(?i)lib$' => "DOS/Wintel/Netware Compiler Library", '\.(?i)lif$' => "Netware Binary File", '\.(?i)(com|exe)$' => "DOS/Wintel Executable", '\.(?i)tco$' => "", '\.(?i)obj$' => "DOS/Wintel Compiler Object", '\.(?i)res$' => "DOS/Wintel Resource File", '\.(?i)ico$' => "DOS/Wintel Icon File", '\.(?i)nlm$' => "Netware Loadable Module", '\.(?i)t8u$' => "", '\.(?i)c8u$' => "", '\.(?i)lku$' => "", '\.(?i)pdf$' => "Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format", '\.(?i)doc$' => "MS Word Document", '\.(?i)dot$' => "MS Word Document Template", '\.(?i)pps$' => "MS PowerPoint Presentation", '\.(?i)xls$' => "MS Excel Spreadsheet", '\.(?i)(bmp|gif|jfif|jpeg|jpg|png|tif|tiff|xbm)$' => "Image", '\.(?i)(bz2|gz|tgz|zip)$' => "Compressed File", '\.(?i)dll$' => "DOS/Wintel Dynamically Linked Library", '\.(?i)class$' => "Compliled Java Class File", '\.(?i)jar$' => "Java Archive File", '\.(?i)war$' => "Java Web Archive File", '\.o$' => "UNIX Compiler Object", '\.a$' => "UNIX Compiler Library", '\.so(\.\d+\.\d+)?$' => "UNIX Shared Library" ); # The binaries this script is dependant on: my @bin_dependancies = ("vcs", "vlog", "rcs", "ci"); # Where we should put temporary files my $tmpdir = $ENV{TMPDIR} ? $ENV{TMPDIR} : "/var/tmp"; # We use these... use strict; use Cwd; use File::Basename; # For the usage message. use File::Copy; use File::Path; use IO::File; use Getopt::Long; $Getopt::Long::bundling = 1; my $program = basename $0; my $usage = "\ usage: $program -h $program [-lt] [-i vcsid] [-r flat|leaf] [-p flat|leaf] [-x rcs_extension] [-v none|locks|exists] [options] [path...] "; my $help = "\ $usage ---------------------------- ----------------------------------- -h | --Help Print this text General Settings ---------------------------- ----------------------------------- --Recurse Recurse through directories (default) -l | --NORecurse Process only . --Errorfiles Save a count of conversion errors in the RCS archive directory (default) (unimplemented) --NOErrorfiles Don't save a count of conversion errors (unimplemented) ( -m | --Mode ) Convert Convert PVCS files to RCS files (default) ( -m | --Mode ) Verify Perform verification ONLY (unimplemented) ( -v | --VERIfy ) None Always replace existing RCS files ( -v | --VERIfy ) LOCKS Same as exists unless a #conv.done file exists in the RCS directory. In that case, only the #conv.done file's existance is verified for that directory. (default) ( -v | --VERIfy ) Exists Don't replace existing RCS files ( -v | --VERIfy ) LOCKDates Verify that an existing RCS file's last modification date is older than that of the lockfile (unimplemented) ( -v | --VERIfy ) Revs Verify that the PVCS archive files and RCS archive file contain the same number of corresponding revisions. Add only new revisions to the RCS file. (unimplemented) ( -v | --VERIfy ) Full Perform --verify=Revs and confirm that the text of the revisions is identical. Add only new revisions unless an error is found. Then erase the RCS archive and recreate it. (unimplemented) -t | --Test-binaries Use 'which' to check \$PATH for the binaries required by this script (default) --NOTest-binaries Don't check for binaries --VERBose Enable verbose output --NOVerbose Disable verbose output (default) -w | --Warnings Print warning messages (default) --NOWarnings Don't print warning messages RCS Settings ---------------------------- ----------------------------------- ( -r | --RCS-Dirs ) leaf RCS files stored in ./RCS (default) ( -r | --RCS-Dirs ) flat RCS files stored in . (unimplemented) ( -x | --RCS-Extension ) Set RCS file extension (default = ',v') --Force-binary Pass '-kb' to 'rcs -i' regardless of the file extension --NOForce-binary Only use '-kb' when the file has a binary extension (default) --CVS-Branch-labels Use CVS magic branch revision numbers when attaching branch labels (default) --NOCvs-branch-labels Attach branch labels to RCS branch revision numbers (unimplemented) CVS Settings ---------------------------- ----------------------------------- ( -d | --CVS-Module-path) Import RCS files directly into this destination directory rather than converting in place PVCS Settings ---------------------------- ----------------------------------- ( -p | --Pvcs-dirs ) leaf PVCS files expected in ./VCS (default) ( -p | --Pvcs-dirs ) flat PVCS files expected in . ( -i | --VCsid ) vcsid Use vcsid instead of \$VCSID -------------------------------------------------------------------------- The optional path argument should contain the name of a file or directory to convert. If not given, it will default to '.'. -------------------------------------------------------------------------- "; # # Initialize globals # my ($errors, $warnings) = (0, 0); my ($curlevel, $maxlevel); my ($rcs_base_command, $ci_base_command); my ($donefile_name, $errorfile_name); my @rel_dirs = (); # list of relative directory names up to current dir # set up the default options my %options = ( 'recurse' => 1, 'mode' => "convert", 'errorfiles' => 1, 'rcs-dirs' => "leaf", 'rcs-extension' => ",v", 'force-binary' => 0, 'cvs-branch-labels' => 1, 'cvs-module-path' => undef, 'pvcs-dirs' => "leaf", 'verify' => "locks", 'test-binaries' => 1, 'vcsid' => $ENV{VCSID} || "", 'verbose' => 0, 'debug' => 0, 'warnings' => 1 ); # This is untested except under Solaris 2.4 or 2.6 and # may not be portable # # I think the readline lib or some such has an interface # which may enable this now. The perl installer sure looks # like it's testing this kind of thing, anyhow. sub hit_any_key { STDOUT->autoflush; system "stty", "-icanon", "min", "1"; print "Hit any key to continue..."; getc; system "stty", "icanon", "min", "0"; STDOUT->autoflush (0); print "\nI always wondered where that key was...\n"; } # print the usage sub print_usage { my $fh = shift; unless (ref $fh) { my $fdn = $fh ? $fh : "STDERR"; $fh = new IO::File; $fh->fdopen ($fdn, "w"); } $fh->print ($usage); } # print the help sub print_help { my $fh = shift; unless (ref $fh) { my $fdn = $fh ? $fh : "STDOUT"; $fh = new IO::File; $fh->fdopen ($fdn, "w"); } $fh->print ($help); } # print the help and exit $_[0] || 0 sub exit_help { print_help; exit shift || 0; } sub error_count { my $type = shift or die "$0: error - error_count usage: error_count type [, ref] [, LIST]\n"; my $error_count_ref; my $outstring; if (ref ($_[0]) && ref ($_[0]) == "SCALAR") { $error_count_ref = shift; } else { $error_count_ref = \$errors; } $$error_count_ref++; push @_, "something wrong.\n" unless ( @_ > 0 ); $outstring = sprintf "$0: $type - " . join ("", @_); $outstring .= sprintf " - $!\n" unless ($outstring =~ /\n$/); print STDERR $outstring; if ($options{errorfiles}) { my $fh = new IO::File ">>$errorfile_name" or new IO::File ">$errorfile_name"; if ($fh) { $fh->print ($$error_count_ref . "\n"); $fh->print ($outstring); $fh->close; } else { my $cd = cwd; print STDERR "$0: error - failed to open errorfile $cd/$errorfile_name - $!\n" if ($options{debug}); } } return $$error_count_ref; } # the main procedure that is run once in each directory sub execdir { my $dir = shift; my ($errors, $warnings) = (0, 0); # We return these error counters my $old_dir = cwd; local ($_, @_); my $i; # Generic counter my ($pvcsarchive, $workfile, $rcsarchive); # .??v, checked out file, and ,v files, # respectively my ($rev_count, $first_vl, $last_vl, $description, $rev_index, @rev_num, %checked_in, %author, $relative_comment_index, @comment_string, %comment); my ($num_version_labels, $label_index, @label_revision, $label, @new_label, $rcs_rev); my ($revision, %rcs_rev_num); my @remainder; my ($get_output, $rcs_output, $ci_output, $mv_output); my ($ci_command, $rcs_command, $wtr); my @hits; my ($num_fields); my $skipdirlock; # if true, don't write conv.out # used only for single file operations # at the moment my $cd; my $cvs_dir; my @filenames; # We may have recieved a single file name to process... if ( -d $dir ) { # change into the directory to be processed # open the current directory for listing # initialize the list of filenames # and set filenames equal to directory listing unless ( ( chdir $dir ) and ( opendir CURDIR, "." ) and ( @filenames = readdir CURDIR ) ) { $cd = cwd; error_count 'error', \$errors, "skipping directory $dir from $cd"; chdir $old_dir or die "Failed to restore original directory ($old_dir): ", $!, ", stopped"; return ($errors, $warnings); } # clean up by closing the directory closedir(CURDIR); if ($options{'rcs-dirs-flat'} && $options{'cvs-module-path'}) { my @cur_dir_names = split qr{[/\\]}, cwd; my $rel_cd = $cur_dir_names[-1]; push @rel_dirs, $rel_cd; $cvs_dir = "$options{'cvs-module-path'}/" . join "/", @rel_dirs; if (!-d $cvs_dir) { print "Creating directory \`$cvs_dir'\n"; if (!mkpath ($cvs_dir)) { pop @rel_dirs; error_count 'error', \$errors, "failed to make directory \`$cvs_dir' - skipping directory \`$cd'"; chdir $old_dir or die "Failed to restore original directory (\`$old_dir'): ", $!, ", stopped"; return ($errors, $warnings); # after all, we have nowhere to put # them... } } } } elsif ( -f $dir ) # we recieved a single file { push @filenames, $dir; $skipdirlock = 1; } else { $cd = cwd; error_count 'error', \$errors, "no such directory/file $dir from $cd\n"; chdir $old_dir or die "Failed to restore original directory ($old_dir): ", $!, ", stopped"; return ($errors, $warnings); } # save the current directory $cd = cwd; # increment the global $curlevel variable $curlevel = $curlevel +1; # initialize a list for any subdirectories and any files # we need to process my $vcsdir = ""; my (@subdirs, $fn, $file, @files, @pvcsarchives); # print "$cd: " . join (", ", @filenames) . "\n"; # hit_any_key; (@files, @pvcsarchives) = ( (), () ); # begin a for loop to execute on each filename in the list @filename foreach $fn (@filenames) { # if the file is a directory... if (-d $fn) { # then if we are not expecting a flat arrangement of pvcs files # and we found a vcs directory add its files to @pvcsarchives if (!$options{'pvcs-dirs-flat'} and $fn =~ /^vcs$/i) { if ($options{verify} =~ /^locks$/ ) { if ( -f $donefile_name ) { print "Verified existence of lockfile $cd/$donefile_name." . ( ($options{mode} =~ /^convert$/) ? " Skipping directory." : "" ) . "\n" if ($options{verbose}); next; } elsif ( $options{mode} =~ /^verify$/ ) { print "No lockfile found for $cd .\n"; next; } } # else add the files in the vcs dir to our list of files to process error_count 'warning', \$warnings, "Found two vcs dirs in directory $cd.\n" if ($vcsdir and $options{warnings}); $vcsdir = $fn; unless ( ( opendir VCSDIR, $vcsdir ) and ( @files = readdir VCSDIR ) ) { error_count 'error', \$errors, "skipping directory &cd/$fn"; next; } closedir VCSDIR; # and so we don't need to worry about where these # files came from later... foreach $file (@files) { push @pvcsarchives, "$vcsdir/$file" if (-f "$vcsdir/$file"); } # don't want recursion here... @pvcsarchives = grep !/^\.\.?$/, @pvcsarchives; } elsif ($fn !~ /^\.\.?$/) { next if (!$options{'rcs-dirs-flat'} and $fn =~ /^rcs$/i); # include it in @subdir if it's not a parent directory push(@subdirs,$fn); } } # else if we are processing a flat arrangement of pvcs files... elsif ($options{'pvcs-dirs-flat'} and -f $fn) { if ($options{verify} =~ /^locks$/) { if ( -f $donefile_name) { print "Found lockfile $cd/$donefile_name." . ( ($options{mode} =~ /^convert$/) ? " Skipping directory." : "" ) . "\n" if ($options{verbose}); last; } elsif ($options{mode} =~ /^verify$/) { print "No lockfile found for $cd .\n"; last; } } # else add this to the list of files to process push (@pvcsarchives, $fn); } } # print "pvcsarchives: " . join (", ", @pvcsarchives) . "\n"; # print "subdirs: " . join (", ", @subdirs) . "\n"; # hit_any_key; # for loop of subdirs foreach (@subdirs) { # run execdir on each sub dir if ($maxlevel >= $curlevel) { my ($e, $w) = execdir ($_); $errors += $e; $warnings += $w; } } # Print output header for each directory print("Directory: $cd\n"); # the @files variable should already contain the list of files # we should attempt to process if ( @pvcsarchives && ( $options{mode} =~ /^convert$/ ) ) { # create an RCS directory in parent to store RCS files in if ( !( $options{'rcs-dirs-flat'} or (-d "RCS") or mkpath ( "RCS" ) ) ) { error_count 'error', \$errors, "failed to make directory $cd/RCS - skipping directory $cd"; @pvcsarchives = (); # after all, we have nowhere to put them... } } # begin a for loop to execute on each filename in the list @files foreach $pvcsarchive (@pvcsarchives) { my $got_workfile = 0; my $got_version_labels = 0; my $got_description = 0; my $got_rev_count = 0; my $abs_file = $cd . "/" . $pvcsarchive; print("Verifying $abs_file...\n") if ($options{verbose}); print "vlog $pvcsarchive\n"; # FIXME: Quoting this is better than no quotes, but quotes in # filenames remain unquoted. my $vlog_output = `vlog \"$pvcsarchive\"`; # Split the vcs status output into individual lines my @vlog_strings = split /\n/, $vlog_output; my $num_vlog_strings = @vlog_strings; $_ = $vlog_strings[0]; if ( /^\s*$/ || /^vlog: warning/ ) { error_count 'warning', \$warnings, "$abs_file is NOT a valid PVCS archive!!!\n"; next; } my $num; # Collect all vlog output into appropriate variables # # This will ignore at the very least the /^\s*Archive:\s*/ field # and maybe more. This should not be a problem. for ( $num = 0; $num < $num_vlog_strings; $num++ ) { # print("$vlog_strings[$num]\n"); $_ = $vlog_strings[$num]; if( ( /^Workfile:\s*/ ) && (!$got_workfile ) ) { my $num_fields; $got_workfile = 1; # get the string to the right of the above search (with any path stripped) $workfile = $'; $num_fields = split /[\/\\]/, $workfile; if ( $num_fields > 1 ) { $workfile = $_[$num_fields - 1 ]; } $rcsarchive = $options{'rcs-dirs-flat'} ? "" : "RCS/"; $rcsarchive .= $workfile; $rcsarchive .= $options{'rcs-extension'} if ($options{'rcs-extension'}); print "Workfile is $workfile\n" if ($options{debug}); } elsif ( ( /^Rev count:\s*/ ) && (!$got_rev_count ) ) { $got_rev_count = 1; # get the string to the right of the above search $rev_count = $'; print "Revision count is $rev_count\n"; } elsif ( ( /^Version labels:\s*/ ) && (!$got_version_labels ) ) { $got_version_labels = 1; $first_vl = $num+1; print "Version labels start at $first_vl\n" if ($options{debug}); } elsif ( ( /^Description:\s*/ ) && (!$got_description ) ) { $got_description = 1; $description = $vlog_strings[$num+1]; print "Description is `$description'\n" if ($options{debug}); $last_vl = $num++ - 1; } elsif ( /^Rev\s+/ ) # get all the revision information at once { $rev_index = 0; @rev_num = (); while ( $rev_index < $rev_count ) { $_ = $vlog_strings[$num]; /^\s*Rev\s+(\d+\.(\d+\.\d+\.)*\d+)$/; $rev_num[$rev_index] = $1; print "Found revision: $rev_num[$rev_index]\n" if ($options{debug}); die "Not a valid revision ($rev_num[$rev_index]).\n" if ($rev_num[$rev_index] !~ /^(\d+\.)(\d+\.\d+\.)*\d+$/); $_ = $vlog_strings[$num+1]; /^\s*Locked\s*/ and $num++; $_ = $vlog_strings[$num+1]; /^\s*Checked in:\s*/; $checked_in{$rev_num[$rev_index]} = "\"" . $' . "\""; print "Checked in: $checked_in{$rev_num[$rev_index]}\n" if ($options{debug}); $_ = $vlog_strings[$num+3]; /^\s*Author id:\s*/; my @fields = split; $author{$rev_num[$rev_index]} = "\"" . $fields[2] . "\""; print "Author: $author{$rev_num[$rev_index]}\n" if ($options{debug}); my @branches = (); $_ = $vlog_strings[$num+1]; if (/^\s*Branches:\s*/) { $num++; @branches = split /\s+/, $'; } $relative_comment_index = 0; @comment_string = (); while (($num + 4 + $relative_comment_index) < @vlog_strings) { last if $vlog_strings[$num+4+$relative_comment_index] =~ /^\s*Rev\s+(\d+\.(\d+\.\d+\.)*\d+)$/ && $vlog_strings[$num+3+$relative_comment_index] =~ /^-{35}$/; # We need the \n added for multi-line comments. There is no effect for # single-line comments since RCS inserts the \n if it doesn't exist already # print "Found commment line: $vlog_strings[$num+4+$relative_comment_index]\n" # if ($options{debug}); push @comment_string, $vlog_strings[$num+4+$relative_comment_index], "\n"; $relative_comment_index += 1; } # print "Popped from comment: " . join ("", splice (@comment_string, -2)) # . "\n" # if ($options{debug}); # Pop the "-+" or "=+" line from the comment while ( (pop @comment_string) !~ /^-{35}|={35}$/ ) {} $comment{$rev_num[$rev_index]} = join "", @comment_string; $num += ( 4 + $relative_comment_index ); print "Got comment for $rev_num[$rev_index]\n" if ($options{debug}); print "comment string: $comment{$rev_num[$rev_index]}\n" if ($options{debug}); $rev_index += 1; } # while ( $rev_index < $rev_count ) $num -= 1; #although there should be nothing left for this to matter } # Get Rev information } # for ($num = 0; $num < $num_vlog_strings; $num++) # hit_any_key if ($options{debug}); # Create RCS revision numbers corresponding to PVCS version numbers my @rcs_rev_nums; foreach $revision (@rev_num) { $rcs_rev_num{ $revision } = &pvcs_to_rcs_rev_number( $revision ); push @rcs_rev_nums, $rcs_rev_num{$revision}; print"PVCS revision is $revision; RCS revision is $rcs_rev_num{ $revision }\n" if ($options{debug}); } # Sort the revision numbers - PVCS and RCS store them in different orders # Clear @_ so we don't pass anything in by accident... @_ = (); @rev_num = sort revisions @rev_num; print "Sorted rev_nums:\n" . join ("\n", @rev_num) . "\n" if ($options{debug}); # hit_any_key; # Loop through each version label, checking for need to relabel ' ' with '_'. $num_version_labels = $last_vl - $first_vl + 1; print "Version label count is $num_version_labels\n"; for( $i = $first_vl; $i <= $last_vl; $i += 1 ) { # print("$vlog_strings[$i]\n"); $label_index = $i - $first_vl; $_=$vlog_strings[$i]; print "Starting with string '$_'\n" if ($options{debug}); my @fields = split /\"/; $label = $fields[1]; print "Got label '$label'\n" if ($options{debug}); @fields = split /\s+/, $fields[2]; $label_revision[$label_index] = $fields[2]; print "Original label is $label_revision[$label_index]\n" if ($options{debug}); # Create RCS revision numbers corresponding to PVCS version numbers by # adding 1 to the revision number (# after last .) $label_revision[ $label_index ] = pvcs_to_rcs_rev_number( $label_revision [ $label_index ] ); # replace ' ' with '_', if needed $_=$label; $new_label[$label_index] = $label; $new_label[$label_index] =~ s/ /_/g; $new_label[$label_index] =~ s/\./_/g; $new_label[$label_index] = "\"" . $new_label[$label_index] . "\""; print"Label $new_label[$label_index] is for revision $label_revision[$label_index]\n" if ($options{debug}); } ########## # # See if the RCS archive is up to date with the PVCS archive # ########## my $cvsarchive; $cvsarchive = "$cvs_dir/$rcsarchive" if $options{'cvs-module-path'}; $cvsarchive .= $rcsarchive; if ($options{verify} =~ /^locks|exists$/ and -f $cvsarchive) { print "Verified existence of " . ($options{'cvs-module-path'} ? $cvsarchive : "$cd/$rcsarchive") . "." . ( ($options{mode} =~ /^convert$/) ? " Skipping." : "" ) . "\n" if ($options{verbose}); next; } # Create RCS archive and check in all revisions, then label. my $first_time = 1; foreach $revision (@rev_num) { # print "get -p$revision $pvcsarchive >$workfile\n"; print "get -r$revision $pvcsarchive\n"; # $vcs_output = `vcs -u -r$revision $pvcsarchive`; # $get_output = `get -p$revision $pvcsarchive >$workfile`; # FIXME: Doesn't handle quotes in filenames as FIXME above. $get_output = `get -r$revision \"$pvcsarchive\"`; # if this is the first time, delete the rcs archive if it exists # need for $options{verify} == none unlink $rcsarchive if ($first_time and $options{verify} =~ /^none$/ and -f $rcsarchive); # Also check here whether this file ought to be "binary" if ( $first_time ) { $rcs_command = "$rcs_base_command -i"; if ( ( @hits = grep { $workfile =~ /$_/ } keys %bin_ext ) || $options{'force-binary'} ) { $rcs_command .= " -kb"; $workfile =~ /$hits[0]/ if (@hits); print "Binary attribute -kb added (" . (@hits ? "file type is '$bin_ext{$hits[0]}' for extension '$&'" : "forced") . ")\n"; } # FIXME: Doesn't handle quotes and other special characters in # filenames as two FIXMEs above. $rcs_command .= " \"$workfile\""; # print and execute the rcs archive initialization command print "$rcs_command\n"; $wtr = new IO::File "|$rcs_command"; $wtr->print ($description); $wtr->print ("\n") unless ($description =~ /\n$/s); $wtr->print (".\n"); $wtr->close; # $rcs_output = `$rcs_base_command -i -kb $workfile`; } # if this isn't the first time, we need to lock the rcs branch # # This is a little messy, but it works. Some extra locking is attempted. # (This happens the first time a branch is used, at the least) my $branch = ""; my @branch; @branch = split /\./, $rcs_rev_num{$revision}; pop @branch; $branch = join ".", @branch if @branch != 1; # FIXME: Quotes around file names handles spaces but not shell # metacharacters in file names. unless ($first_time) { print "$rcs_base_command -l$branch \"$workfile\"\n" if $options{'debug'}; $rcs_output = `$rcs_base_command -l$branch \"$workfile\"`; } # If an empty comment is specified, RCS will not check in the file; # check for this case. (but an empty -t- description is fine - go figure!) # Since RCS will pause and ask for a comment if one is not given, # substitute a dummy comment "no comment". $comment{$revision} =~ /^\s*$/ and $comment{$revision} = "no comment\n"; $ci_command = $ci_base_command; $ci_command .= " -f -r$rcs_rev_num{$revision} -d$checked_in{$revision}" . " -w$author{$revision}"; $ci_command .= " \"$workfile\""; # print and execute the ci command print "$ci_command\n"; $wtr = new IO::File "|$ci_command"; $wtr->print ($comment{$revision}); $wtr->print ("\n") unless ($comment{$revision} =~ /\n$/s); $wtr->print (".\n"); $wtr->close; # $ci_output = `$ci_command`; # $ci_output = `cat $tmpdir/ci.out`; $first_time = 0 if ($first_time); } # foreach revision # Keep track of 1.*, 2.*, etc. branches as they are created. my %trunk_branches; # Attach version labels for( $i = $num_version_labels - 1; $i >= 0; $i -= 1 ) { print "$rcs_base_command -n$new_label[$i]:$label_revision[$i] \"$workfile\"\n" if $options{'debug'}; $rcs_output = `$rcs_base_command -n$new_label[$i]:$label_revision[$i] \"$workfile\"`; print "Version label $new_label[$i] added to revision $label_revision[$i]\n"; # If the label revision is attached to a 1.* revision on the trunk # when a 2.* revision exists, then 1.MAX needs to be branched to # allow commits to this label. This applies to 2.* when 3.* # exists, as well. if ($label_revision[$i] !~ /\./) { # This revision is attached to the trunk. # $rcs_rev_nums[0] will always be the max revision. print "Label `$new_label[$i]' moved from $label_revision[$i] to "; if (exists $trunk_branches{$label_revision[$i]}) { $label_revision[$i] = $trunk_branches{$label_revision[$i]}; } else { # Attached to X.* with X < M my @X_revs = grep /^$label_revision[$i]\./, @rcs_rev_nums; # Need a _NEW_ branch from $X_revs[0] to attach # to. CVS could do this easily, but our archive # isn't in a CVS repository yet. my @tmp_lbl = @label_revision; my @branch_nums = grep s/^\Q$X_revs[0]\E\.0\.(\d+)$/$1/, @tmp_lbl; @tmp_lbl = @rcs_rev_nums; push @branch_nums, grep (s/^\Q$X_revs[0]\E\.(\d+)\.\d+$/$1/, @tmp_lbl); my $max = 0; foreach my $num (@branch_nums) { $max = $num if $num > $max; } $max += 2; $trunk_branches{$label_revision[$i]} = "$X_revs[0].0.$max"; $label_revision[$i] = "$X_revs[0].0.$max"; } print "$label_revision[$i].\n"; } $rcs_output = `$rcs_base_command -n$new_label[$i]:$label_revision[$i] \"$workfile\"`; print "Version label $new_label[$i] added to revision $label_revision[$i]\n"; if ($label_revision[$i] =~ /^(.*)\.0\./) { my $base = $1; my $rootlbl = $new_label[$i]; $rootlbl =~ s/.$/_broot$&/; $rcs_output = `$rcs_base_command -n$rootlbl:$base \"$workfile\"`; print "Version label $rootlbl added to revision $base\n"; } } # foreach label if ($options{'cvs-module-path'}) { print "Moving $rcsarchive to $cvsarchive\n"; move $rcsarchive, $cvsarchive or warn "Move failed: $!"; } # hit_any_key; } # foreach pvcs archive file # We processed a vcs directory, so if there were any files, lock it. # We are guaranteed to have made the attempt at # # $skipdirlock gets set if a single file name was passed to this function to enable # a '$0 *' operation... if ( @pvcsarchives && !$skipdirlock) { my $fh = new IO::File ">>$donefile_name" or new IO::File ">$donefile_name"; if ($fh) { $fh->close; } else { error_count 'error', \$errors, "couldn't create lockfile $cd/$donefile_name"; } } $curlevel = $curlevel - 1; chdir $old_dir or die "Failed to restore original directory ($old_dir): ", $!, ", stopped"; # Update the relative directory path. pop @rel_dirs if -d $dir; return ($errors, $warnings); } # # This function effectively does a cmp between two revision numbers # It is intended to be passed into Perl's sort routine. # # the pvcs_out is not implemented well. It should probably be # returnning $b[0] <=> $a[0] rather than $a[0] <=> $b[0] # # The @_ argument implementation was going to be used for revision # comparison as an aid to remove the /^\sRev/ in revision comment # error. The effort was fruitless at the time. sub revisions { my @a = split /\./, (defined $a) ? $a : shift; my @b = split /\./, (defined $b) ? $b : shift; my $function = @_ ? shift : 'rcs_in'; my ($i, $ret_val); die "Not enough arguments to revisions : a = ", join (".", @a), "; b = ", join (".", @b), ", stopped" unless (@a and @b); for ($i = 0; $i < scalar( @a ) && $i < scalar( @b ); $i++) { $a[$i] == $b[$i] or return ($a[$i] <=> $b[$i]); } return 0 if (scalar (@a) == scalar (@b)); if ($function eq 'rcs_in') { return (($i == @b) || -1); } elsif ($function eq 'pvcs_out') { return (($i == @a) || -1); } else { die "error - Invalid function type passed to revisions ($function)", ", stopped"; } } sub pvcs_to_rcs_rev_number { my($input, $num_fields, @rev_string, $return_rev_num, $i); $input = $_[0]; $num_fields = split /\./, $input; @rev_string = @_; # @rev_string[$num_fields-1] += 1; for( $i = 1; $i < $num_fields; $i += 1 ) { if ( $i % 2 ) { # DRP: 10/1 # RCS does not allow revision zero $rev_string[ $i ] += 1; } elsif ( $i ) { # DRP: 10/1 # Branches must have even references for compatibility # with CVS's magic branch numbers. # (Indexes 2, 4, 6...) $rev_string[ $i ] *= 2; } } # If this is a branch revision # (PVCS: a.b.c.*) then we want the CVS # revision # instead. It's okay to do this conversion here since we # never commit to branches. We'll only get a PVCS revision # in that # form when looking through the revision labels. if ($input =~ /\*$/) { pop @rev_string; # If there is only one entry in @rev_string, this is a # revision that needs to be attached to the trunk. Let it be # for now. It might require a new branch, but we can't decide # which branches are valid to create before we know what # branches already exist. push @rev_string, splice (@rev_string, -1, 1, "0") unless @rev_string == 1; } $return_rev_num = join ".", @rev_string; return $return_rev_num; } ### ### ### ### ### ### MAIN program: checks to see if there are command line parameters ### ### ### ### ### # and read the options die $usage unless GetOptions (\%options, "h|help" => \&exit_help, "recurse!", "mode|m=s", "errorfiles!", "l", "rcs-dirs|rcs-directories|r=s", "pvcs-dirs|pvcs-directories|p=s", "test-binaries|t!", "rcs-extension=s", "verify|v=s", "vcsid|i=s", "verbose!", "debug!", "force-binary!", "cvs-branch-labels!", "warnings|w!", "cvs-module-path|d=s"); # # Special processing for -l !^#%$^@#$%#$ # # At the moment, -l overrides --recurse, regardless of the order the # options were passed in # $options{recurse} = 0 if defined $options{l}; delete $options{l}; # Make sure we got acceptable values for rcs-dirs and pvcs-dirs my @hits = grep /^$options{'rcs-dirs'}/i, ("leaf", "flat"); @hits == 1 or die "$0: $options{'rcs-dirs'} invalid argument to --rcs-dirs or ambiguous\n" . " abbreviation.\n" . " Must be one of: 'leaf' or 'flat'.\n" . $usage; $options{'rcs-dirs'} = $hits[0]; $options{'rcs-dirs-flat'} = ($options{'rcs-dirs'} =~ /flat/); delete $options{'rcs-dirs'}; @hits = grep /^$options{'pvcs-dirs'}/i, ("leaf", "flat"); @hits == 1 or die "$0: $options{'pvcs-dirs'} invalid argument to --pvcs-dirs or ambiguous\n" . " abbreviation.\n" . " Must be one of: 'leaf' or 'flat'.\n" . $usage; $options{'pvcs-dirs'} = $hits[0]; $options{'pvcs-dirs-flat'} = ($options{'pvcs-dirs'} =~ /flat/); delete $options{'pvcs-dirs'}; # and for verify @hits = grep /^$options{verify}/i, ("none", "locks", "exists", "lockdates", "revs", "full"); @hits == 1 or die "$0: $options{verify} invalid argument to --verify or ambiguous\n" . " abbreviation.\n" . " Must be one of: 'none', 'locks', 'exists', 'lockdates', 'revs',\n" . " or 'full'.\n" . $usage; $options{verify} = $hits[0]; $options{verify} =~ /^none|locks|exists$/ or die "$0: --verify=$options{verify} unimplemented.\n" . $usage; # and mode @hits = grep /^$options{mode}/i, ("convert", "verify"); @hits == 1 or die "$0: $options{mode} invalid argument to --mode or ambiguous abbreviation.\n" . " Must be 'convert' or 'verify'.\n" . $usage; $options{mode} = $hits[0]; $options{'cvs-branch-labels'} or die "$0: RCS Branch Labels unimplemented.\n" . $usage; # export VCSID into th environment for ourselves and our children $ENV{VCSID} = $options{vcsid}; # # Verify we have all the binary executables we need to run this script # # Allowed this feature to be disabled in case which is missing or we are # running on a system which does not return error codes properly (e.g. WIN95) # # -- i.e. I don't feel like grepping output yet. -- # my @missing_binaries = (); if ($options{'test-binaries'}) { foreach (@bin_dependancies) { my $output = qx/which $_ 2>&1/; print $output if $options{verbose} && $output; if ($? || $output =~ /^no/) { push @missing_binaries, $_; } } if (scalar @missing_binaries) { print STDERR "The following executables were not found in your PATH: " . join ( " ", @missing_binaries ) . "\n" . "You must correct this before continuing.\n"; exit 1; } } delete $options{'test-binaries'}; # # set up our base archive manipulation commands # # set up our rcs_command mods $rcs_base_command = "rcs"; $rcs_base_command .= " -x$options{'rcs-extension'}" if $options{'rcs-extension'}; # set up our rcs_command mods $ci_base_command = "ci"; $ci_base_command .= " -x$options{'rcs-extension'}" if $options{'rcs-extension'}; # # So our logs fill in a manner we can monitor with 'tail -f' fairly easily: # STDERR->autoflush (1); STDOUT->autoflush (1); # Initialize the globals we use to keep track of recursion if ($options{recurse}) { $maxlevel = 10000; # Arbitrary recursion limit } else { $maxlevel = 1; } delete $options{recurse}; # So we can lock the directories behind us $donefile_name = $options{'rcs-dirs-flat'} ? "" : "RCS/"; $errorfile_name = $donefile_name . "#conv.errors"; $donefile_name .= "#conv.done"; # # start the whole thing and drop the return code on exit # push @ARGV, "." unless (@ARGV); while ($_ = shift) { # reset the recursion level (corresponds to directory depth) # level 0 is the first directory we enter... $curlevel = -1; my ($e, $w) = execdir($_); $errors += $e; $warnings += $w; } print STDERR "$0: " . ($errors ? "Aborted" : "Done") . ".\n"; print STDERR "$0: "; print STDERR ($errors ? $errors : "No") . " error" . (($errors != 1) ? "s" : ""); print STDERR ", " . ($warnings ? $warnings : "no") . " warning" . (($warnings != 1) ? "s" : "") if ($options{warnings}); print STDERR ".\n"; # # Woo-hoo! We made it! # exit $errors; cvs-1.12.13/contrib/rcs2log.sh0000644000076400007640000004610410264747747013001 00000000000000#! /bin/sh # Copyright (C) 1995-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # RCS to ChangeLog generator # Generate a change log prefix from RCS files (perhaps in the CVS repository) # and the ChangeLog (if any). # Output the new prefix to standard output. # You can edit this prefix by hand, and then prepend it to ChangeLog. # Ignore log entries that start with `#'. # Clump together log entries that start with `{topic} ', # where `topic' contains neither white space nor `}'. Help='The default FILEs are the files registered under the working directory. Options: -c CHANGELOG Output a change log prefix to CHANGELOG (default ChangeLog). -h HOSTNAME Use HOSTNAME in change log entries (default current host). -i INDENT Indent change log lines by INDENT spaces (default 8). -l LENGTH Try to limit log lines to LENGTH characters (default 79). -L FILE Use rlog-format FILE for source of logs. -R If no FILEs are given and RCS is used, recurse through working directory. -r OPTION Pass OPTION to subsidiary log command. -t TABWIDTH Tab stops are every TABWIDTH characters (default 8). -u "LOGINFULLNAMEMAILADDR" Assume LOGIN has FULLNAME and MAILADDR. -v Append RCS revision to file names in log lines. --help Output help. --version Output version number. Report bugs to .' Id='$Id: rcs2log,v 1.48 2001/09/05 23:07:46 eggert Exp $' # Copyright 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 2001, 2003 # Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the # Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, # Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. Copyright='Copyright 1992-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program comes with NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law. You may redistribute copies of this program under the terms of the GNU General Public License. For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING. Author: Paul Eggert ' # functions @MKTEMP_SH_FUNCTION@ # Use the traditional C locale. LANG=C LANGUAGE=C LC_ALL=C LC_COLLATE=C LC_CTYPE=C LC_MESSAGES=C LC_NUMERIC=C LC_TIME=C export LANG LANGUAGE LC_ALL LC_COLLATE LC_CTYPE LC_MESSAGES LC_NUMERIC LC_TIME # These variables each contain a single ASCII character. # Unfortunately, there's no portable way of writing these characters # in older Unix implementations, other than putting them directly into # this text file. SOH='' # SOH, octal code 001 tab=' ' nl=' ' # Parse options. # defaults : ${MKTEMP="@MKTEMP@"} : ${AWK=awk} : ${TMPDIR=/tmp} changelog=ChangeLog # change log file name datearg= # rlog date option hostname= # name of local host (if empty, will deduce it later) indent=8 # indent of log line length=79 # suggested max width of log line logins= # login names for people we know fullnames and mailaddrs of loginFullnameMailaddrs= # loginfullnamemailaddr triplets logTZ= # time zone for log dates (if empty, use local time) recursive= # t if we want recursive rlog revision= # t if we want revision numbers rlog_options= # options to pass to rlog rlogfile= # log file to read from tabwidth=8 # width of horizontal tab while : do case $1 in -c) changelog=${2?}; shift;; -i) indent=${2?}; shift;; -h) hostname=${2?}; shift;; -l) length=${2?}; shift;; -L) rlogfile=${2?}; shift;; -[nu]) # -n is obsolescent; it is replaced by -u. case $1 in -n) case ${2?}${3?}${4?} in *"$tab"* | *"$nl"*) echo >&2 "$0: -n '$2' '$3' '$4': tabs, newlines not allowed" exit 1;; esac login=$2 lfm=$2$tab$3$tab$4 shift; shift; shift;; -u) # If $2 is not tab-separated, use colon for separator. case ${2?} in *"$nl"*) echo >&2 "$0: -u '$2': newlines not allowed" exit 1;; *"$tab"*) t=$tab;; *) t=':';; esac case $2 in *"$t"*"$t"*"$t"*) echo >&2 "$0: -u '$2': too many fields" exit 1;; *"$t"*"$t"*) uf="[^$t]*$t" # An unselected field, followed by a separator. sf="\\([^$t]*\\)" # The selected field. login=`expr "X$2" : "X$sf"` lfm="$login$tab"` expr "X$2" : "$uf$sf" `"$tab"` expr "X$2" : "$uf$uf$sf" `;; *) echo >&2 "$0: -u '$2': not enough fields" exit 1;; esac shift;; esac case $logins in '') logins=$login;; ?*) logins=$logins$nl$login;; esac case $loginFullnameMailaddrs in '') loginFullnameMailaddrs=$lfm;; ?*) loginFullnameMailaddrs=$loginFullnameMailaddrs$nl$lfm;; esac;; -r) case $rlog_options in '') rlog_options=${2?};; ?*) rlog_options=$rlog_options$nl${2?};; esac shift;; -R) recursive=t;; -t) tabwidth=${2?}; shift;; -v) revision=t;; --version) set $Id rcs2logVersion=$3 echo >&2 "rcs2log (GNU Emacs) $rcs2logVersion$nl$Copyright" exit 0;; -*) echo >&2 "Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [FILE ...]$nl$Help" case $1 in --help) exit 0;; *) exit 1;; esac;; *) break;; esac shift done month_data=' m[0]="Jan"; m[1]="Feb"; m[2]="Mar" m[3]="Apr"; m[4]="May"; m[5]="Jun" m[6]="Jul"; m[7]="Aug"; m[8]="Sep" m[9]="Oct"; m[10]="Nov"; m[11]="Dec" ' logdir=`$MKTEMP -d $TMPDIR/rcs2log.XXXXXX` test -n "$logdir" || exit llogout=$logdir/l trap exit 1 2 13 15 trap "rm -fr $logdir 2>/dev/null" 0 # If no rlog-format log file is given, generate one into $rlogfile. case $rlogfile in '') rlogfile=$logdir/r # If no rlog options are given, # log the revisions checked in since the first ChangeLog entry. # Since ChangeLog is only by date, some of these revisions may be duplicates of # what's already in ChangeLog; it's the user's responsibility to remove them. case $rlog_options in '') if test -s "$changelog" then e=' /^[0-9]+-[0-9][0-9]-[0-9][0-9]/{ # ISO 8601 date print $1 exit } /^... ... [ 0-9][0-9] [ 0-9][0-9]:[0-9][0-9]:[0-9][0-9] [0-9]+ /{ # old-fashioned date and time (Emacs 19.31 and earlier) '"$month_data"' year = $5 for (i=0; i<=11; i++) if (m[i] == $2) break dd = $3 printf "%d-%02d-%02d\n", year, i+1, dd exit } ' d=`$AWK "$e" <"$changelog"` || exit case $d in ?*) datearg="-d>$d";; esac fi;; esac # Use TZ specified by ChangeLog local variable, if any. if test -s "$changelog" then extractTZ=' /^.*change-log-time-zone-rule['"$tab"' ]*:['"$tab"' ]*"\([^"]*\)".*/{ s//\1/; p; q } /^.*change-log-time-zone-rule['"$tab"' ]*:['"$tab"' ]*t.*/{ s//UTC0/; p; q } ' logTZ=`tail "$changelog" | sed -n "$extractTZ"` case $logTZ in ?*) TZ=$logTZ; export TZ;; esac fi # If CVS is in use, examine its repository, not the normal RCS files. if test ! -f CVS/Repository then rlog=rlog repository= else rlog='cvs -q log' repository=`sed 1q &2 "$0: $CVSROOT: CVSROOT has multiple ':/'s" exit 1;; *:/*) # remote repository pository=`expr "X$repository" : '.*:\(/.*\)'`;; *) # local repository case $repository in /*) ;; *) repository=${CVSROOT?}/$repository;; esac if test ! -d "$repository" then echo >&2 "$0: $repository: bad repository (see CVS/Repository)" exit 1 fi pository=$repository;; esac # Ensure that $pository ends in exactly one slash. while : do case $pository in *//) pository=`expr "X$pository" : 'X\(.*\)/'`;; */) break;; *) pository=$pository/; break;; esac done fi # Use $rlog's -zLT option, if $rlog supports it. case `$rlog -zLT 2>&1` in *' option'*) ;; *) case $rlog_options in '') rlog_options=-zLT;; ?*) rlog_options=-zLT$nl$rlog_options;; esac;; esac # With no arguments, examine all files under the RCS directory. case $# in 0) case $repository in '') oldIFS=$IFS IFS=$nl case $recursive in t) RCSdirs=`find . -name RCS -type d -print` filesFromRCSfiles='s|,v$||; s|/RCS/|/|; s|^\./||' files=` { case $RCSdirs in ?*) find $RCSdirs \ -type f \ ! -name '*_' \ ! -name ',*,' \ ! -name '.*_' \ ! -name .rcsfreeze.log \ ! -name .rcsfreeze.ver \ -print;; esac find . -name '*,v' -print } | sort -u | sed "$filesFromRCSfiles" `;; *) files= for file in RCS/.* RCS/* .*,v *,v do case $file in RCS/. | RCS/.. | RCS/,*, | RCS/*_) continue;; RCS/.rcsfreeze.log | RCS/.rcsfreeze.ver) continue;; RCS/.\* | RCS/\* | .\*,v | \*,v) test -f "$file" || continue;; RCS/*,v | RCS/.*,v) ;; RCS/* | RCS/.*) test -f "$file" || continue;; esac case $files in '') files=$file;; ?*) files=$files$nl$file;; esac done case $files in '') exit 0;; esac;; esac set x $files shift IFS=$oldIFS;; esac;; esac case $datearg in ?*) $rlog $rlog_options "$datearg" ${1+"$@"} >$rlogfile;; '') $rlog $rlog_options ${1+"$@"} >$rlogfile;; esac || exit;; esac # Get the full name of each author the logs mention, and set initialize_fullname # to awk code that initializes the `fullname' awk associative array. # Warning: foreign authors (i.e. not known in the passwd file) are mishandled; # you have to fix the resulting output by hand. initialize_fullname= initialize_mailaddr= case $loginFullnameMailaddrs in ?*) case $loginFullnameMailaddrs in *\"* | *\\*) sed 's/["\\]/\\&/g' >$llogout <$llogout || exit output_authors='/^date: / { if ($2 ~ /^[0-9]*[-\/][0-9][0-9][-\/][0-9][0-9]$/ && $3 ~ /^[0-9][0-9]:[0-9][0-9]:[0-9][0-9][-+0-9:]*;$/ && $4 == "author:" && $5 ~ /^[^;]*;$/) { print substr($5, 1, length($5)-1) } }' authors=` $AWK "$output_authors" <"$rlogfile" | sort -u | comm -23 - $llogout ` case $authors in ?*) cat >$llogout </dev/null | $AWK -F: "$awkscript" `$initialize_fullname;; esac # Function to print a single log line. # We don't use awk functions, to stay compatible with old awk versions. # `Log' is the log message. # `files' contains the affected files. printlogline='{ # Following the GNU coding standards, rewrite # * file: (function): comment # to # * file (function): comment if (Log ~ /^\([^)]*\): /) { i = index(Log, ")") filefunc = substr(Log, 1, i) while ((j = index(filefunc, "\n"))) { files = files " " substr(filefunc, 1, j-1) filefunc = substr(filefunc, j+1) } files = files " " filefunc Log = substr(Log, i+3) } # If "label: comment" is too long, break the line after the ":". sep = " " i = index(Log, "\n") if ('"$length"' <= '"$indent"' + 1 + length(files) + i) sep = "\n" indent_string # Print the label. printf "%s*%s:", indent_string, files # Print each line of the log. while (i) { logline = substr(Log, 1, i-1) if (logline ~ /[^'"$tab"' ]/) { printf "%s%s\n", sep, logline } else { print "" } sep = indent_string Log = substr(Log, i+1) i = index(Log, "\n") } }' # Pattern to match the `revision' line of rlog output. rlog_revision_pattern='^revision [0-9]+\.[0-9]+(\.[0-9]+\.[0-9]+)*(['"$tab"' ]+locked by: [^'"$tab"' $,.0-9:;@]*[^'"$tab"' $,:;@][^'"$tab"' $,.0-9:;@]*;)?['"$tab"' ]*$' case $hostname in '') hostname=`( hostname || uname -n || uuname -l || cat /etc/whoami ) 2>/dev/null` || { echo >&2 "$0: cannot deduce hostname" exit 1 } case $hostname in *.*) ;; *) domainname=`(domainname) 2>/dev/null` && case $domainname in *.*) hostname=$hostname.$domainname;; esac;; esac;; esac # Process the rlog output, generating ChangeLog style entries. # First, reformat the rlog output so that each line contains one log entry. # Transliterate \n to SOH so that multiline entries fit on a single line. # Discard irrelevant rlog output. $AWK ' BEGIN { pository = "'"$pository"'" SOH="'"$SOH"'" } /^RCS file: / { if (pository != "") { filename = substr($0, 11) if (substr(filename, 1, length(pository)) == pository) { filename = substr(filename, length(pository) + 1) } if (filename ~ /,v$/) { filename = substr(filename, 1, length(filename) - 2) } if (filename ~ /(^|\/)Attic\/[^\/]*$/) { i = length(filename) while (substr(filename, i, 1) != "/") i-- filename = substr(filename, 1, i - 6) substr(filename, i + 1) } } rev = "?" } /^Working file: / { if (repository == "") filename = substr($0, 15) } /'"$rlog_revision_pattern"'/, /^(-----------*|===========*)$/ { line = $0 if (line ~ /'"$rlog_revision_pattern"'/) { rev = $2 next } if (line ~ /^date: [0-9][- +\/0-9:]*;/) { date = $2 if (date ~ /\//) { # This is a traditional RCS format date YYYY/MM/DD. # Replace "/"s with "-"s to get ISO format. newdate = "" while ((i = index(date, "/")) != 0) { newdate = newdate substr(date, 1, i-1) "-" date = substr(date, i+1) } date = newdate date } time = substr($3, 1, length($3) - 1) author = substr($5, 1, length($5)-1) printf "%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s", filename, SOH, rev, SOH, date, SOH, time, SOH, author, SOH rev = "?" next } if (line ~ /^branches: /) { next } if (line ~ /^(-----------*|===========*)$/) { print ""; next } if (line == "Initial revision" || line ~ /^file .+ was initially added on branch .+\.$/) { line = "New file." } printf "%s%s", line, SOH } ' <"$rlogfile" | # Now each line is of the form # FILENAME@REVISION@YYYY-MM-DD@HH:MM:SS[+-TIMEZONE]@AUTHOR@LOG # where @ stands for an SOH (octal code 001), # and each line of LOG is terminated by SOH instead of \n. # Sort the log entries, first by date+time (in reverse order), # then by author, then by log entry, and finally by file name and revision # (just in case). sort -t"$SOH" +2 -4r +4 +0 | # Finally, reformat the sorted log entries. $AWK -F"$SOH" ' BEGIN { logTZ = "'"$logTZ"'" revision = "'"$revision"'" # Initialize the fullname and mailaddr associative arrays. '"$initialize_fullname"' '"$initialize_mailaddr"' # Initialize indent string. indent_string = "" i = '"$indent"' if (0 < '"$tabwidth"') for (; '"$tabwidth"' <= i; i -= '"$tabwidth"') indent_string = indent_string "\t" while (1 <= i--) indent_string = indent_string " " } { newlog = "" for (i = 6; i < NF; i++) newlog = newlog $i "\n" # Ignore log entries prefixed by "#". if (newlog ~ /^#/) { next } if (Log != newlog || date != $3 || author != $5) { # The previous log and this log differ. # Print the old log. if (date != "") '"$printlogline"' # Logs that begin with "{clumpname} " should be grouped together, # and the clumpname should be removed. # Extract the new clumpname from the log header, # and use it to decide whether to output a blank line. newclumpname = "" sep = "\n" if (date == "") sep = "" if (newlog ~ /^\{[^'"$tab"' }]*}['"$tab"' ]/) { i = index(newlog, "}") newclumpname = substr(newlog, 1, i) while (substr(newlog, i+1) ~ /^['"$tab"' ]/) i++ newlog = substr(newlog, i+1) if (clumpname == newclumpname) sep = "" } printf sep clumpname = newclumpname # Get ready for the next log. Log = newlog if (files != "") for (i in filesknown) filesknown[i] = 0 files = "" } if (date != $3 || author != $5) { # The previous date+author and this date+author differ. # Print the new one. date = $3 time = $4 author = $5 zone = "" if (logTZ && ((i = index(time, "-")) || (i = index(time, "+")))) zone = " " substr(time, i) # Print "date[ timezone] fullname ". # Get fullname and email address from associative arrays; # default to author and author@hostname if not in arrays. if (fullname[author]) auth = fullname[author] else auth = author printf "%s%s %s ", date, zone, auth if (mailaddr[author]) printf "<%s>\n\n", mailaddr[author] else printf "<%s@%s>\n\n", author, "'"$hostname"'" } if (! filesknown[$1]) { filesknown[$1] = 1 if (files == "") files = " " $1 else files = files ", " $1 if (revision && $2 != "?") files = files " " $2 } } END { # Print the last log. if (date != "") { '"$printlogline"' printf "\n" } } ' && # Exit successfully. exec rm -fr $logdir # Local Variables: # tab-width:4 # End: cvs-1.12.13/contrib/rcslock.in0000755000076400007640000001767510305571537013064 00000000000000#! @PERL@ -T # -*-Perl-*- # Copyright (C) 1994-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # # THIS SCRIPT IS PROBABLY BROKEN. REMOVING THE -T SWITCH ON THE #! LINE ABOVE # WOULD FIX IT, BUT THIS IS INSECURE. WE RECOMMEND FIXING THE ERRORS WHICH THE # -T SWITCH WILL CAUSE PERL TO REPORT BEFORE RUNNING THIS SCRIPT FROM A CVS # SERVER TRIGGER. PLEASE SEND PATCHES CONTAINING THE CHANGES YOU FIND # NECESSARY TO RUN THIS SCRIPT WITH THE TAINT-CHECKING ENABLED BACK TO THE # <@PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@> MAILING LIST. # # For more on general Perl security and taint-checking, please try running the # `perldoc perlsec' command. # ############################################################################### ############################################################################### ############################################################################### # Author: John Rouillard (rouilj@cs.umb.edu) # Supported: Yeah right. (Well what do you expect for 2 hours work?) # Blame-to: rouilj@cs.umb.edu # Complaints to: Anybody except Brian Berliner, he's blameless for # this script. # Acknowlegements: The base code for this script has been acquired # from the log.pl script. # rcslock.pl - A program to prevent commits when a file to be ckecked # in is locked in the repository. # There are times when you need exclusive access to a file. This # often occurs when binaries are checked into the repository, since # cvs's (actually rcs's) text based merging mechanism won't work. This # script allows you to use the rcs lock mechanism (rcs -l) to make # sure that no changes to a repository are able to be committed if # those changes would result in a locked file being changed. # WARNING: # This script will work only if locking is set to strict. # # Setup: # Add the following line to the commitinfo file: # ALL /local/location/for/script/lockcheck [options] # Where ALL is replaced by any suitable regular expression. # Options are -v for verbose info, or -d for debugging info. # The %s will provide the repository directory name and the names of # all changed files. # Use: # When a developer needs exclusive access to a version of a file, s/he # should use "rcs -l" in the repository tree to lock the version they # are working on. CVS will automagically release the lock when the # commit is performed. # Method: # An "rlog -h" is exec'ed to give info on all about to be # committed files. This (header) information is parsed to determine # if any locks are outstanding and what versions of the file are # locked. This filename, version number info is used to index an # associative array. All of the files to be committed are checked to # see if any locks are outstanding. If locks are outstanding, the # version number of the current file (taken from the CVS/Entries # subdirectory) is used in the key to determine if that version is # locked. If the file being checked in is locked by the person doing # the checkin, the commit is allowed, but if the lock is held on that # version of a file by another person, the commit is not allowed. $ext = ",v"; # The extension on your rcs files. $\="\n"; # I hate having to put \n's at the end of my print statements $,=' '; # Spaces should occur between arguments to print when printed # turn off setgid # $) = $(; # # parse command line arguments # require 'getopts.pl'; &Getopts("vd"); # verbose or debugging # Verbose is useful when debugging $opt_v = $opt_d if defined $opt_d; # $files[0] is really the name of the subdirectory. # @files = split(/ /,$ARGV[0]); @files = @ARGV[0..$#ARGV]; $cvsroot = $ENV{'CVSROOT'}; # # get login name # $login = getlogin || (getpwuid($<))[0] || "nobody"; # # save the current directory since we have to return here to parse the # CVS/Entries file if a lock is found. # $pwd = `/bin/pwd`; chop $pwd; print "Starting directory is $pwd" if defined $opt_d ; # # cd to the repository directory and check on the files. # print "Checking directory ", $files[0] if defined $opt_v ; if ( $files[0] =~ /^\// ) { print "Directory path is $files[0]" if defined $opt_d ; chdir $files[0] || die "Can't change to repository directory $files[0]" ; } else { print "Directory path is $cvsroot/$files[0]" if defined $opt_d ; chdir ($cvsroot . "/" . $files[0]) || die "Can't change to repository directory $files[0] in $cvsroot" ; } # Open the rlog process and apss all of the file names to that one # process to cut down on exec overhead. This may backfire if there # are too many files for the system buffer to handle, but if there are # that many files, chances are that the cvs repository is not set up # cleanly. print "opening rlog -h @files[1..$#files] |" if defined $opt_d; open( RLOG, "rlog -h @files[1..$#files] |") || die "Can't run rlog command" ; # Create the locks associative array. The elements in the array are # of two types: # # The name of the RCS file with a value of the total number of locks found # for that file, # or # # The name of the rcs file concatenated with the version number of the lock. # The value of this element is the name of the locker. # The regular expressions used to split the rcs info may have to be changed. # The current ones work for rcs 5.6. $lock = 0; while () { chop; next if /^$/; # ditch blank lines if ( $_ =~ /^RCS file: (.*)$/ ) { $curfile = $1; next; } if ( $_ =~ /^locks: strict$/ ) { $lock = 1 ; next; } if ( $lock ) { # access list: is the line immediately following the list of locks. if ( /^access list:/ ) { # we are done getting lock info for this file. $lock = 0; } else { # We are accumulating lock info. # increment the lock count $locks{$curfile}++; # save the info on the version that is locked. $2 is the # version number $1 is the name of the locker. $locks{"$curfile" . "$2"} = $1 if /[ ]*([a-zA-Z._]*): ([0-9.]*)$/; print "lock by $1 found on $curfile version $2" if defined $opt_d; } } } # Lets go back to the starting directory and see if any locked files # are ones we are interested in. chdir $pwd; # fo all of the file names (remember $files[0] is the directory name foreach $i (@files[1..$#files]) { if ( defined $locks{$i . $ext} ) { # well the file has at least one lock outstanding # find the base version number of our file &parse_cvs_entry($i,*entry); # is our version of this file locked? if ( defined $locks{$i . $ext . $entry{"version"}} ) { # if so, it is by us? if ( $login ne ($by = $locks{$i . $ext . $entry{"version"}}) ) {# crud somebody else has it locked. $outstanding_lock++ ; print "$by has file $i locked for version " , $entry{"version"}; } else { # yeah I have it locked. print "You have a lock on file $i for version " , $entry{"version"} if defined $opt_v; } } } } exit $outstanding_lock; ### End of main program sub parse_cvs_entry { # a very simple minded hack at parsing an entries file. local ( $file, *entry ) = @_; local ( @pp ); open(ENTRIES, "< CVS/Entries") || die "Can't open entries file"; while () { if ( $_ =~ /^\/$file\// ) { @pp = split('/'); $entry{"name"} = $pp[1]; $entry{"version"} = $pp[2]; $entry{"dates"} = $pp[3]; $entry{"name"} = $pp[4]; $entry{"name"} = $pp[5]; $entry{"sticky"} = $pp[6]; return; } } } cvs-1.12.13/contrib/sccs2rcs.in0000755000076400007640000002347510264747747013160 00000000000000#! @CSH@ -f # Copyright (C) 1995-2005 The Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # Sccs2rcs is a script to convert an existing SCCS # history into an RCS history without losing any of # the information contained therein. # It has been tested under the following OS's: # SunOS 3.5, 4.0.3, 4.1 # Ultrix-32 2.0, 3.1 # # Things to note: # + It will NOT delete or alter your ./SCCS history under any circumstances. # # + Run in a directory where ./SCCS exists and where you can # create ./RCS # # + /usr/local/bin is put in front of the default path. # (SCCS under Ultrix is set-uid sccs, bad bad bad, so # /usr/local/bin/sccs here fixes that) # # + Date, time, author, comments, branches, are all preserved. # # + If a command fails somewhere in the middle, it bombs with # a message -- remove what it's done so far and try again. # "rm -rf RCS; sccs unedit `sccs tell`; sccs clean" # There is no recovery and exit is far from graceful. # If a particular module is hanging you up, consider # doing it separately; move it from the current area so that # the next run will have a better chance or working. # Also (for the brave only) you might consider hacking # the s-file for simpler problems: I've successfully changed # the date of a delta to be in sync, then run "sccs admin -z" # on the thing. # # + After everything finishes, ./SCCS will be moved to ./old-SCCS. # # This file may be copied, processed, hacked, mutilated, and # even destroyed as long as you don't tell anyone you wrote it. # # Ken Cox # Viewlogic Systems, Inc. # kenstir@viewlogic.com # ...!harvard!cg-atla!viewlog!kenstir # # Various hacks made by Brian Berliner before inclusion in CVS contrib area. # # Modified to detect SCCS binary files. If binary, skip the keyword # substitution and flag the RCS file as binary (using rcs -i -kb). # -Allan G. Schrum schrum@ofsoptics.com agschrum@mindspring.com # Fri Sep 26 10:40:40 EDT 2003 # #we'll assume the user set up the path correctly # for the Pmax, /usr/ucb/sccs is suid sccs, what a pain # /usr/local/bin/sccs should override /usr/ucb/sccs there set path = (/usr/local/bin $path) ############################################################ # Error checking # if (! -w .) then echo "Error: ./ not writeable by you." exit 1 endif if (! -d SCCS) then echo "Error: ./SCCS directory not found." exit 1 endif set edits = (`sccs tell`) if ($#edits) then echo "Error: $#edits file(s) out for edit...clean up before converting." exit 1 endif if (-d RCS) then echo "Warning: RCS directory exists" if (`ls -a RCS | wc -l` > 2) then echo "Error: RCS directory not empty" exit 1 endif else mkdir RCS endif sccs clean set logfile = /tmp/sccs2rcs_$$_log rm -f $logfile set tmpfile = /tmp/sccs2rcs_$$_tmp rm -f $tmpfile set emptyfile = /tmp/sccs2rcs_$$_empty echo -n "" > $emptyfile set initialfile = /tmp/sccs2rcs_$$_init echo "Initial revision" > $initialfile set sedfile = /tmp/sccs2rcs_$$_sed rm -f $sedfile set revfile = /tmp/sccs2rcs_$$_rev rm -f $revfile # the quotes surround the dollar signs to fool RCS when I check in this script set sccs_keywords = (\ '%W%[ ]*%G%'\ '%W%[ ]*%E%'\ '%W%'\ '%Z%%M%[ ]*%I%[ ]*%G%'\ '%Z%%M%[ ]*%I%[ ]*%E%'\ '%M%[ ]*%I%[ ]*%G%'\ '%M%[ ]*%I%[ ]*%E%'\ '%M%'\ '%I%'\ '%G%'\ '%E%'\ '%U%') set rcs_keywords = (\ '$'Id'$'\ '$'Id'$'\ '$'Id'$'\ '$'SunId'$'\ '$'SunId'$'\ '$'Id'$'\ '$'Id'$'\ '$'RCSfile'$'\ '$'Revision'$'\ '$'Date'$'\ '$'Date'$'\ '') ############################################################ # Get some answers from user # echo "" echo "Do you want to be prompted for a description of each" echo "file as it is checked in to RCS initially?" echo -n "(y=prompt for description, n=null description) [y] ?" set ans = $< if ((_$ans == _) || (_$ans == _y) || (_$ans == _Y)) then set nodesc = 0 else set nodesc = 1 endif echo "" echo "The default keyword substitutions are as follows and are" echo "applied in the order specified:" set i = 1 while ($i <= $#sccs_keywords) # echo ' '\"$sccs_keywords[$i]\"' ==> '\"$rcs_keywords[$i]\" echo " $sccs_keywords[$i] ==> $rcs_keywords[$i]" @ i = $i + 1 end echo "" echo -n "Do you want to change them [n] ?" set ans = $< if ((_$ans != _) && (_$ans != _n) && (_$ans != _N)) then echo "You can't always get what you want." echo "Edit this script file and change the variables:" echo ' $sccs_keywords' echo ' $rcs_keywords' else echo "good idea." endif # create the sed script set i = 1 while ($i <= $#sccs_keywords) echo "s,$sccs_keywords[$i],$rcs_keywords[$i],g" >> $sedfile @ i = $i + 1 end onintr ERROR sort -k 1,1 /dev/null >& /dev/null if ($status == 0) then set sort_each_field = '-k 1 -k 2 -k 3 -k 4 -k 5 -k 6 -k 7 -k 8 -k 9' else set sort_each_field = '+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8' endif ############################################################ # Loop over every s-file in SCCS dir # foreach sfile (SCCS/s.*) # get rid of the "s." at the beginning of the name set file = `echo $sfile:t | sed -e "s/^..//"` # work on each rev of that file in ascending order set firsttime = 1 # Only scan the file up to the "I" keyword, then see if # the "f" keyword is set to binary. The SCCS file has # -aI denoting the start of the file (or end of header). set binary = (`sed -e '/^.I/,$d' < $sfile | grep '^.f e 1$'`) #if ($#binary) then # echo This is a binary file #else # echo This is not a binary file #endif sccs prs $file | grep "^D " | @AWK@ '{print $2}' | sed -e 's/\./ /g' | sort -n -u $sort_each_field | sed -e 's/ /./g' > $revfile foreach rev (`cat $revfile`) if ($status != 0) goto ERROR # get file into current dir and get stats # Is the substr stuff and the +0 in the following awk script really # necessary? It seems to me that if we didn't find the date format # we expected in the output we have other problems. # Note: Solaris awk does not like the following line. Use gawk # mawk, or nawk instead. set date = `sccs prs -r$rev $file | @AWK@ '/^D / {print (substr($3,0,2)+0<70?20:19) $3, $4; exit}'` set author = `sccs prs -r$rev $file | @AWK@ '/^D / {print $5; exit}'` echo "" echo "==> file $file, rev=$rev, date=$date, author=$author" sccs edit -r$rev $file >>& $logfile if ($status != 0) goto ERROR echo checked out of SCCS # add RCS keywords in place of SCCS keywords (only if not binary) if ($#binary == 0) then sed -f $sedfile $file > $tmpfile if ($status != 0) goto ERROR echo performed keyword substitutions cp $tmpfile $file endif # check file into RCS if ($firsttime) then set firsttime = 0 if ($#binary) then echo this is a binary file # Mark initial, empty file as binary rcs -i -kb -t$emptyfile $file endif if ($nodesc) then echo about to do ci echo ci -f -r$rev -d"$date" -w$author -t$emptyfile $file ci -f -r$rev -d"$date" -w$author -t$emptyfile $file < $initialfile >>& $logfile if ($status != 0) goto ERROR echo initial rev checked into RCS without description else echo "" echo Enter a brief description of the file $file \(end w/ Ctrl-D\): cat > $tmpfile ci -f -r$rev -d"$date" -w$author -t$tmpfile $file < $initialfile >>& $logfile if ($status != 0) goto ERROR echo initial rev checked into RCS endif else # get RCS lock set lckrev = `echo $rev | sed -e 's/\.[0-9]*$//'` if ("$lckrev" =~ [0-9]*.*) then # need to lock the brach -- it is OK if the lock fails rcs -l$lckrev $file >>& $logfile else # need to lock the trunk -- must succeed rcs -l $file >>& $logfile if ($status != 0) goto ERROR endif echo got lock sccs prs -r$rev $file | grep "." > $tmpfile # it's OK if grep fails here and gives status == 1 # put the delta message in $tmpfile ed $tmpfile >>& $logfile <>& $logfile if ($status != 0) goto ERROR echo checked into RCS endif sccs unedit $file >>& $logfile if ($status != 0) goto ERROR end rm -f $file end ############################################################ # Clean up # echo cleaning up... mv SCCS old-SCCS rm -f $tmpfile $emptyfile $initialfile $sedfile echo =================================================== echo " Conversion Completed Successfully" echo "" echo " SCCS history now in old-SCCS/" echo =================================================== set exitval = 0 goto cleanup ERROR: foreach f (`sccs tell`) sccs unedit $f end echo "" echo "" echo Danger\! Danger\! echo Some command exited with a non-zero exit status. echo Log file exists in $logfile. echo "" echo Incomplete history in ./RCS -- remove it echo Original unchanged history in ./SCCS set exitval = 1 cleanup: # leave log file rm -f $tmpfile $emptyfile $initialfile $sedfile $revfile exit $exitval cvs-1.12.13/contrib/validate_repo.in0000664000076400007640000005774210214654417014236 00000000000000#! @PERL@ -w ######################################################################## # # Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 by Donald Sharp # All Rights Reserved # # Some portions Copyright (c) 2002, 2003 by # Derek R. Price # & Ximbiot . # All rights reserved. # # Permission is granted to copy and/or distribute this file, with or # without modifications, provided this notice is preserved. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # ######################################################################## =head1 validate_repo.pl Script to check the integrity of the Repository. =head1 SYNOPSIS perldoc validate_repo.pl validate_repo.pl --help [--verbose!] validate_repo.pl [--verbose!] [--cvsroot=CVSROOT] [--exec=SCRIPT]... [--all-revisions!] [module]... =head1 DESCRIPTION This script will search through a repository and determine if any of the files in it are corrupted. This is normally accomplished by checking out all I revisions, where I revisions are defined as the smallest set which, when checked out, will cause each and every revision's integrity to be verified. This resolves to the most recent revision on each branch and the first and last revisions on the trunk. Please do not run this script inside of the repository itself. This will cause it too fail. =head1 OPTIONS =over =item C<--help> Print this very help text (or, with C<--verbose>, act like C). =item C<-a> or C<--all-revisions> Check out each and every revision rather than just the I ones. This flag is useful with C<--exec> to execute the C